Home

User Manual - Sütron electronic GmbH

1. MAC 0 7 93 FF FF CE IP 192 168 100 82 Mask 255 255 255 0 Device Name MyName DHCP enabled MAC 0 7 93 FF FF CE IP Address 192 168 100 82 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Save registry and restart device to work with new parameters Gate 000 000 000 000 Device Name MyName 1 DNS 000 000 000 000 DHCP enabled 2 DNS 000 000 000 000 Gate 0 0 0 0 1 WINS 000 000 000 000 2 WINS 000 000 000 000 DHCP DHCP enabled DHCP enabled work with new parameters Save registry and restart device to FTP Settings Add new user Add new user Home List all users Delete a user List all users Delete a user IP Address Home IP Address Home Gateway Gateway DNS WINS DNS WINS IP Address IP 000 000 000 000 IP Address 000 000 000 000 km Subnet 000 000 000 000 Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 Ok Cancel Ok Cancel Gateway Change Default Gateway Change Default Gateway gt 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 OK Cancel OK Cancel DNS Primary 000 000 000 000 Primary DNS 000 000 000 000 _ Secondary 000 000 000 000 Secondary DNS 000 000 000 000 OK Cancel OK Cancel WINS Primary 000 000 000 000 Primary WINS 000 000 000 000 _ Secondary 000 000 000 000 Secondary WINS 000 000
2. Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 1 0 F1 2 0 F2 1 Cursor left 1 Cursor down 2 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 0 F3 4 0 F4 1 Plus 1 Minus 2 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned S SUTRON 3 179 Tutorial Table 3 75 BTO3AM keyboard image Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 5 0 Data release 6 0 Help 1 Enter 1 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 0 Not assigned 8 0 Not assigned 1 Not assigned 1 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 180 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 21 2 Keyboard Image for the BTO5AM The keyboard image consists of eight bytes that must be stored contiguously in the controller Table 3 76 Arrangement of th
3. Unicode GB2312 80 Built in standard 0x3000 0x2121 OxA1A1 0x5509 0x3026 OxBOA6 0x54C0 0x3027 OxBOA7 0x7691 0x3028 OxBOA8 Ox9F44 Ox777E OxF7FE OXH OxL 0x H 0x80 Ox L 0x80 2 9 4 Protocol Loop through Operation Using loop through operation you can link the programming unit to the operating de vice that connects through the signals to the controller If you are using the BRC Symbolic protocol loop through operation allows automatic recognition of the programming unit With point to point connections you must acti vate deactivate and monitor loop through operation using system variables While loop through mode is activated the terminal s COM1 interface can not be used for other applications such as a scanner printer transfer of recipe data sets See chapter Loop through Operation on page 3 97 2 34 S TRON Programming 2 9 5 Encoding of Alphanumerical Strings Text character identification For alphanumeric strings read by the operating device from the controller you must specify the standard code to be used to interpret the characters For 8 bit characters ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 IBM OEM CP437 ANSI MS Windows For 16 bit characters 16 bit Unicode For characters of variable bit length Unicode UTF 8 2 10 Languages The Languages category combines all of the elements that belong to a national lan guage The elements are as follows
4. Key Letters Characters 0 0 1 STU1 2 VW X2 3 YZ 3 4 JKL4 5 MNO5 6 PQR6 7 ABC7 8 DEF8 9 GHI9 Decimal point Plus lt gt Minus 3 82 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 9 ShiftCase Function Enables alphanumerical character input Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Initial state only numerical input possible Upper case and lower case alphanumerical character input enabled Key Letters Characters 0 0 1 STUstu1 2 VW Xvwx2 3 YZ YX 3 4 JKLjkI4 5 MNOmno5 6 PQRpqr6 7 ABCabc7 8 DEFdef8 9 GHIghi9 Decimal point 72 Plus lt gt Minus 3 4 9 10 ShiftTouch Function Displays the state of the shift mode Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val OFF ues ON 3 4 9 11 KeyCursLeft Function Simulates the key function of the Cursor Left key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Cursor Left active 3 83 S SUTRON Tutorial
5. ues You can display the content of the Compact Flash card using this system variable The items for the text list are generated automatically 3 106 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 19 2 CardApplicationMove Function Starts a firmware update from the Compact Flash card The name of the S3 file must be entered in the system variable CardFileName Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Initial state Start firmware update 3 4 19 3 CardFileError Function Displays errors that occurred while using the Compact Flash card The er ror number has different meanings depending on the type of operating de vice Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues No error No Compact Flash card inserted The specified file does not exist on the Compact Flash card or can not be read The Compact Flash card is full or write protected The file already exists on the Compact Flash card The file has the wrong data type S3 for application and Firmware TXT for data sets The S3 file was generated for another operating device Select a different S3 file or generate a new S3 file for the corresponding
6. 3 53 Variable type saines 3 32 VANADICS esse tn 3 6 Variables ASCII 3 7 Variables bits eds 3 6 Variables bytes ss 3 6 Variables LWord 3 7 A 5 SUTRON Index A 6 S SUTRON S TRON
7. The Write Coordination byte only works together with the Read Coordination byte 3 15 8 1 External Data Release The controller can use the External Data Release bit to influence data release in the operating device If the operator would like to change a value in the operating device he must first request data release For this purpose the operating device writes a logical 1 to the Editing Request bit in the Read Coordination byte During this time the Data Release status LED flashes Once the controller establishes that the Editing Request bit in the Read Coordination byte is set to logical 1 it can release the editing process in the operating device by setting the External Data Release bit in the Write Coordination byte to logical 1 The Data Release status LED is then lit 3 15 8 2 Refresh Acknowledgement Once the controller has read the Refresh Request bit in the Read Coordination byte as logical 1 it can read in the changed variable value When finished the controller can write a logical 1 to the Refresh Acknowledgment bit and confirm execution to the operating device 3 15 8 3 Delete Password When the operator exits a screen for which he requires a password for access pass word protection needs to be activated again for this screen This can be forced by the controller by entering a logical 1 in the Delete Password bit 3 168 SUTRON Tutorial 3 15 8 4 Liveness Flag Write Coordination Byte
8. 3 73 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 6 16 RepoutQuitText41 Function Displays the most recent unacknowledged serial message beginning from the 41st character The message is displayed in accordance with the spec ified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 6 17 RepoutQuitText61 Function Displays the most recent unacknowledged serial message beginning from the 61st character The message is displayed in accordance with the spec ified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 6 18 RepoutQuitAnz Function Displays the number of messages that still need to be acknowledged Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 3 4 6 19 RepoutMarker Function Indicates the current position of the messages within the message box Data type Numeric Representation Decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadeci mal number binary number bar Configurable val ues The message with the highest priority is visible Neither the message with the highest priority nor the message with the low est priority is visible The message with the lowest priority is visible
9. 0 Touch to calibrate the operator starts the calibration process with the next touch 1 Touch left pixel the operator needs to touch a specific coordinate at the top left 2 Touch right pixel the operator needs to touch a specific coordinate at the lower right 3 Calibration successful calibration process complete For the user interface we recommend that you create a text list or an image list and that you present the instructions to the operator as selection text or a selection im age 3 4 15 7 MaskStartupTime Function Displays how much time in milliseconds has elapsed for screen buildup Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Milliseconds 3 4 15 8 ScreenStartupComCnt Function Shows how many communication requests the terminal sends to the con troller during screen buildup Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 3 4 15 9 ComMeanTime Function Displays the mean transfer time in milliseconds for each communication request during screen buildup Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Conf
10. 3 4 9 12 KeyCursRight Function Simulates the key function of the Cursor Right key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Cursor Right active 3 4 9 13 KeyCursUp Function Simulates the key function of the Cursor Up key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Cursor Up active 3 4 9 14 KeyCursDown Function Simulates the key function of the Cursor Down key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Cursor Down active 3 4 9 15 KeyHome Function Simulates the key function of the Cursor Home key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Cursor Home active 3 4 9 16 KeyHelp Function Simulates the key function of the Help key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexade
11. 3 25 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 3 4 4 Cyclical The operating device always polls the controller for the value of a variable when the operator goes to a screen in which a value is to be displayed However to display actual values the value must be continuously updated Therefore always select the field type Cyclical for displaying actual values The system will then continuously update the value of the variables based on the in terval set as the polling time 3 3 3 5 Format 3 3 3 5 1 Only Positive Use the attribute Only Positive to display variable values that are to be displayed without a sign This means that the range of values that can be displayed changes for example for a byte from between 128 and 127 to between 0 and 255 You can also display positive decimal numbers with leading zeros 3 3 3 5 2 Display Leading Zeros For positive decimal numbers you can display more significant digits with a value of zero as zeros For example If the field length is 5 digits the number 25 is displayed with leading zeros as follows 00025 3 3 3 5 3 Field Length The field length of a variable is made up of The sign The number of digits The decimal point For the representation type Binary Number the number of blank spaces is added to the number of digits to determine the field length 3 3 3 5 4 Fractional Digits You can define the number of fractional digits for decimal and floating point n
12. The message with the highest priority and the message with the lowest pri ority is visible No message is visible within the message box 3 74 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 6 20 RepoutSelectGroup Function Sets the group numbers whose messages are displayed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Ox01h Group number 1 to 8 ues to Ox80h ics Each group is represented by one bit of a byte A logical 1 in bit 0 activates group1 in bit 1 activates group2 and so on The settings for a message field override the settings for this system variable To pre vent the settings in the operating device from being overridden you must activate the Global Settings function for the message field 3 4 6 21 RepoutSelectTime Function Specifies the time rule according to which messages are displayed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val All messages in chronological order ues 2 All acknowledged messages that do not have the attribute Disappear 3 All messages that do not have the attribute Acknowledged 3 4 6 22 RepoutGroup Function Allows you to output a group number along with the message Data
13. Configurable val ues First language N n th language IS The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 1 11 IdentVersion Function Displays the version of the current project application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 5 characters 3 4 1 12 IdentName Function Displays the name of the current project application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 13 characters Ie The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 1 13 IdentDate Function Displays the date of the current project application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 6 characters 3 4 1 14 IdentTime Function Displays the time of the current project application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 6 characters 3 58 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 1 15 IdentCount Function Displays the counter value of the current project application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 4 characters 3 4 1
14. Field length Display size and Display height The field length determines the data length to be stored in the controller The display size determines how many characters can be displayed at maximum width With display height you can reserve enough space to be able to display characters using larger font types Alphanumeric type variables function as follows For alphanumeric display ASCII strings are read in byte format from the controller and displayed in the operating device The number of characters displayed varies depending on the options offered by the operating device A variable of the type Al phanumeric can not be longer than one display line Longer texts are truncated The controller address specifies the start of the string It does not contain a length byte as this is not required You can use the plus and minus keys to input alphanumeric characters The system variables Shift and ShiftCase are also available for upper case Shift and lower case ShiftCase respectively You can use these keys to enter the additional characters displayed on the numeric keys To use the system variables link the system variables as press and release variables with a function key to the screen During input the operator must press the function key and the corresponding numeric key You can use the Password field type to enable concealed password entry on the op erating device However you can only enter numbers here
15. Frame for the pressed and released states Note When you program an input variable in the same way as for a keyboard operated operating device a button is automatically generated around the variable Buttons can only overlap with background images Buttons in tables that contain a variable have no frame and have one line Buttons in input and output screens are not allowed to contain input variables When you program a button with an input variable of the type Selection Text or Selection Image the Enter button is automatically created on request In other words no input or output screen is linked for both of these types The user press es the button to navigate in the corresponding list If the selection text variable only has one line the variable value is decremented when you press the left half of the button and incremented when you select the right half For multiline selec tion text variables and for selection image variables in general the variable value is decremented when you press the top half of the button and incremented when you press the bottom half The following image depicts a button that has a horizontal layout This type is activated for selection text that only has one line Figure 3 21 Button with horizontal layout The following image depicts a button that has a vertical layout This type is activated for selection texts and selection images with several lines Figure 3 22 Bu
16. Old list The system only displays acknowledged messages that do not have the status Dis appeared In the Group Assignment area you can select whether you would like to display mes sage groups in the current message field and if you would specify the correspond ing groups Next to the group number the system also displays the group identifier that you set up Select the check box next to the group number to select the required group Any number of combinations are possible If you do not select any check box the system can display all groups The Font area specifies the character set used to display all elements of a message field on the operating device To display all elements of a message field in another font click the New button 3 3 10 Creating System Icons Button Display If you are configuring table recipe or message fields for touch sensitive terminals you need to generate additional buttons for navigation in the field The buttons as sume the functions of the Cursor Up Page Up Cursor Down and Page Down keys Colors The colors set for the released button idle state and pressed button pressed state apply to all generated buttons Frames the frames configured for the released button idle state and pressed button pressed state are used in all generated buttons 3 3 11 Creating Navigation Buttons If you are configuring table recipe and message fields for touch sensitive operating terminals t
17. Variable type Attributes static or dynamic Character set Help screen See chapter Working with System Variables on page 3 55 3 3 3 1 Symbolic Names In the programming software you assign a symbolic name to each variable This name can have up to 255 characters 3 3 3 2 Controller Address You use the controller address to specify the storage location in the controller Depending on the protocol selected the system carries out a syntax check To avoid incorrect input you can call a syntax diagram for each protocol in the online help for the programming software Note whether a variable will be accessed on a byte word or double word basis 3 3 3 3 Representation Type You can choose from the following options for displaying variables on the operating device Decimal number Alphanumeric 3 7 S TRON Tutorial Selection text Selection image Floating point number Hexadecimal number Binary number Bars Curves 3 3 3 3 1 Decimal Number In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable If Password is selected output is suppressed on the operating device or replaced by an asterisk Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or event controlled The representation format comprises four main details 1 The field length that is the total length including signs and
18. 2 58 Output variables 3 49 Languages eeunenn 2 35 E E esters 3 49 Laser scanner Formatted output 3 50 CLV410 from SICRS means 3 170 ONCO Off citirii iae aa 3 49 Laser Scanner DL 80 11 from Data Logic 3 171 Outputting messages to a logging printer 3 141 Laser Scanner DL910 from DataLogic 3 172 OVETVOItAQR 25 552 dhscesdedssvcessndsanccsediesctesinees ss 2 64 Laser Scanner DLL 5012 M1 from Data LOgiIC 52usretinunenannn coheed 3 174 P Laser Scanner DLL 6010 M1 from Parallel message system 3 142 Data LOgIC s2sitsinir sine iasinnnns 3 175 Password MISSING 2 65 Launch exe E 3 188 Password unchanged 2 64 LIMIS 2252558 este in eet eee 3 27 PC gt gt Terminal 2 31 Linking with screen 2 40 PC gt gt Terminal enable transfer 2 31 Linking with variable 2 40 PC gt gt Terminal interface parameters 2 32 Loading procedure on the Windows CE Planned tasks 2 70 operating system 3 188 Polling area Loop through active 2 65 Byte oriented 3 162 Loop through operation 2 34 DIZO rieiaitene bhai eal dati eee 3 165 System variables 3 97 Wor
19. Representation Capture Grid Status display Capture area You can define separate settings for the horizontal and vertical capture function El ements that are not aligned by means of a grid can be positioned more easily in a screen using the capture function You can choose between the following options Deactivate the capture function Adopt the standard font norm font values for the capture function Apply the numerical values to the horizontal and vertical direction 2 7 S TRON Programming Capture Grid area In this area you can specify whether You want to display a grid in screens The color of the grid Status Display area Decide whether you want to display the position of the mouse cursor using Pixel units or Grid units in the status bar The Grid unit corresponds to the area taken up by one character of the standard font norm font Representation area You can assign separate colors to the input and output variables to differentiate be tween them more clearly A colored frame is then displayed around the variable This area also lets you choose the zoom factor to be used when displaying a screen To display Background images with a frame in screens so they are more appar ent select the corresponding check box The Brief info about screen element variable check box activates a small window with a brief explanation for the element in the screen selected
20. 2 10 6 10 Output Format Printer Printer You can have the messages printed in indented format To do so specify the number of characters by which the lines are to be indented after the first line The value you enter here refers only to printing messages on a logging printer You can choose from the following variants for outputting to the printer 1 No output 2 Formatted message message output with preset formatting parameters 8 Entire message entire message output Indention in characters The messages will be printed in indented format by the number of characters entered here Number of messages per page Define how many messages shall be printed on one page Especially USB printer can only print out page by page The operating device collects as many messages as you assign and then starts printing them all together The less messages shall be printed on one page the faster is the reaction of the printer on message events 2 10 7 Recipes You can set parameters in the following categories for every recipe Transfer active Data set transfer from the terminal Data set transfer to the terminal Data set sorting The recipes editor is divided into two halves You have a view on the left similar to a screen This section allows you to enter the static texts e g item names and units and variables specific to a particular recipe You enter the variable values stored in a data set in the right h
21. 2 81 Terminal Ethernet Settings ccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeees 2 84 EEE 3 1 Working with Program Call Parameters 3 1 Working with Screens ss 3 3 Screen Structure is 3 3 System Screen Seuss ianei aie este ete aiiai 3 3 Input Output Screen 3 4 Working with Screen Objects 3 5 PSY EE LEONE EP PIE 3 5 Text FISId eve ane mn pen Ale A ee 3 5 NEVA S ss sn uen cm em net 3 6 Background Mago r 3 32 BUTTONS eosina SE E 3 33 Set of Curves Graph 3 43 Recipe Field enren E 3 47 Table Fieldsa a eae aaia a 3 47 Message Feld scono facie nt Musee etna 3 48 Creating System Icons Button Display ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 49 Creating Navigation Buttons ccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 3 49 Output Variables 3 49 Input Variables sis avec nee teed indeed aceite tis scanned 3 51 Dynamic and Static Attributes 0 cece rene eeeeeeeneeesaeeeeenaaes 3 51 Aligning Selected Elements to the Grid 3 54 Aligning Selected Element ccccecccceccteeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeee 3 54 Working with System Variables ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 3 55 Basic FUNCONS i stccctisscccei cine teens cca eesti hentai amant rendit 3 55 Communication SER1 iii 3 60 Error Statistics SERI 35422280 a ee aa 3 64 Communication SER2 iii 3 65 Real Time Clock ists ss tisan
22. 3 4 9 26 Key7 Function Simulates the key function of the key 7 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 7 active 3 86 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 27 Key8 Function Simulates the key function of the key 8 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 8 active 3 4 9 28 Key9 Function Simulates the key function of the key 9 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 9 active 3 4 9 29 KeyPlus Function Simulates the key function of the Plus key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Plus active 3 4 9 30 KeyMinus Function Simulates the key function of the Minus key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary nu
23. Figure 3 42 Setup Main Some settings are password protected The password is 3 188 S TRON Tutorial Update Update ET ter Stick Stick Update Image Update Image Update Update Bootloader Bootloader Figure 3 43 Update Update Copy USB Stick This function copies the data from the USB stick to the internal flash file system Several projects can be managed in subdirectories below the directory TSvisRT If more than one project is in different subdirectories a choice dialog is displayed Only directories which contain a project file xxxx cb are listed The entire TSvisRT directory or the corresponding subdirectory and the AppStarter exe are copied into the target directory of the flash file system Update Update Image If the Image subdirectory on the memory stick contains a xxxx nb0 file this file is used to perform the image update There must only be one xxxx nbo file in this direc tory In this case the Flash registry is always deactivated so that the image is processed with a new default registry Update Update Bootloader If the Bootloader subdirectory on the memory stick contains a xxxx nb0 file this file is used to perform the bootloader update There must only be one xxxx nbo file in this directory The user is informed that the update has been successfully completed Registry Save Registry Display Mode _ Change Display Mode SNTP Settings Start SNTP Calibrat
24. Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Delete 1 Standard and Mixmode Variable is selected The value is deleted and you can enter a new value 2 Standard and Mixmode Cursor was moved within the value The character is deleted and the more significant digits are moved to the left 3 Increment No function 3 10 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 3 4 Alphanumeric In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable If Password is selected output is suppressed on the operating device or replaced by an asterisk Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or _event controlled If you want to start a script after entering the variable value select the name of a script from the Post editing script field For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly For the format of the variable define the following information
25. Preferred WINS server Assign the address of the preferred WINS server in decimal notation if you use a WINS server The WINS server resolves NetBIOS names in IP addresses and re verse Alternative WINS server Assign the address of an alternative WINS server in decimal notation The alternative WINS server resolves NetBIOS names in IP addresses if the preferred WINS server is not available 2 85 S TRON Programming SUTRON Tutorial 3 Tutorial 3 1 Working with Program Call Parameters You can start the program from the console and submit call parameters You use the following syntax for it Program directory TSwin exe n N Template directory Template name o O Out put directory Project directory Project name Directory names which contain blanks must be put into apostrophes For example C Programme suetron TSwin net 4 1 EN Table 3 1 Call parameters Parameter Meaning Program directory TSwin exe Name of the directory where the TSwin exe file is located n N Template directory Template A new project is generated from a name template You have to assign the template file with the complete directory but without the file extension Without a directory name the cur rent directory is used o O Output directory Name of the directory where the out put file is written to Project directory Project name Name of the directory where the project is writte
26. 03 3 170 SUTRON Tutorial These interface parameters must not be altered If you do so in error the connection to the operating device is interru Table 3 57 Cable operating device 25 pin to scanner CLV410 pted Operating Device 25 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 TD RD 3 3 RD TD 2 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DTR 20 7 GND GND 7 Table 3 58 Cable operating device 9 pin to scanner CLV410 Operating Device 9 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 RD TD 2 3 TD RD 3 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS DTR 20 3 16 2 Parameters for Scanner DL 80 11 from Data Logic The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters Table 3 59 Parameters for sca nner DL 80 11 Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Hardware Handshake Default ASCII 0D Initializing ASCII EC1CF2EA0102EA1103EA1200 0D Data Prefix ASCII 02 Data Postfix ASCII 03 05 S SUTRON 3 171 Tutorial These interface parameters must not be altered If you do so in error the connection to the operating device is interrupted You must then re initialize the scanner by means of bar codes Table 3 60 Cable operating device 25 pin to scanner DL
27. 3 158 314 3 SONKEYS aah rer ea tt nd AR NN Rite 3 159 3 14 4 Reaction Time of Function and Soft Keys ccessceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 3 160 3 14 5 Using Control Keys as Function Keys ccccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 160 3 14 6 Status LEDs of Function Keys 3 160 3 15 Working with the Cyclic Polling Area cccccceeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeaes 3 161 3 15 1 Byte Oriented Polling Area ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeees 3 162 3 15 2 Word Oriented Polling Area 3 163 3 15 3 Serial Message Channel 3 164 3 15 4 Image of Status LEDs 3 164 3 15 5 Polling TMG Sienne a eee need 3 164 3 15 6 Size of the Polling Area oo cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaes 3 165 3 15 7 Read Coordination Byte 3 165 3 15 8 Write Coordination Byte 3 168 3 16 Working with Scanners ccececceeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeessaeeneaes 3 170 3 16 1 Parameters for Scanner CLV410 from Sick 3 170 3 16 2 Parameters for Scanner DL 80 11 from Data Logic seesseeeeneen 3 171 3 16 3 Parameters for Scanner DL910 from Data Logic 3 172 3 16 4 Parameters for Scanner DLL 5012 M1 from Data Logic 0 3 174 3 16 5 Parameters for Scanner DLL 6010 M1 from Data Logic 0 3 175 3 16 6 Parameters for Scanner BB Snapshot ST from Percon sss 3 176 3 17 How do I
28. 3 24 Working on Older Projects With TSwin net 4 xx Projects created with TSwin 3 xx or TSwin 2 xx can also be processed by TSwin net 4 xx You have to keep in mind that you had the possibility of creating customer spe cific character sets by TSwin 2 xx that are no longer valid for TSwin 3 xx and TSwin net 4 xx In TSwin 3 xx and TSwin net 4 xx the customer specific character set is converted to Arial Unicode In this case the set size of the text changes and eventually defined special characters are found on other positions in the Arial Unicode font 3 197 S TRON Tutorial You should check all text in any case and keep attention to the text flow and to spe cial characters If elements overlap due to changes to the text flow you will get an corresponding error message during project compilation 3 24 1 Download of Old Projects S3 Files To perform a download you must connect the operating device to the PC and set it to the download operating mode To do this Ina screen mask enter the value 1 in the system variable IntEraseEprom OR Switch off the supply voltage set the user mode switch S4 to ON switch on the device again and after the system message appears switch the user mode switch S4 to OFF again under operating voltage If instead of a Flash memory the operating device contains a UV erasable EPROM the system recognizes this and prevents a deletion or programming process The follow
29. Global function keys Message system Recipes Print log Subprint logs Language resources 2 10 1 System Defaults In system defaults you define parameters that are valid for the current language Starting with the number for the current language you can set specific fonts to be used for texts the screen displayed at the start of the user interface and much more 2 10 1 1 System Defaults Identifier In the Language number area you can specify a number for the current language in the range of 1 to 16 You will reuse this language number if you create a language selection using a text list These settings you can assign a number for the customer version to serve as a ref erence The valid range of values is 0 to 255 The value is saved in the UserVersion system variable You can output this system variable in any input output screen 2 35 S TRON Programming There is no other functional link in the operating device You can not change the value in the operating device See chapter UserVersion on page 3 56 2 10 1 2 System Defaults Base Screens Within a project you have five screens whose functions differ from a standard screen for input and output Startup The startup screen is the first one displayed after the electrical supply to the operat ing device is switched on It is only displayed for 5 seconds During this time all LEDs on the operating device are turned on so
30. In addition the corresponding variables for the transfer buffers must be defined 7FFAh 3 11 15 Data Set Transfer from Operating Device to Controller You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice transfer a data set from the operating device to the controller The number of the data set must be written to the variable defined for this purpose In addition the corresponding variables for the transfer buffers must be defined 7FFBh 3 153 S TRON Tutorial Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code 3 11 16 Send Keyboard Image to Controller You can use the following control code from the controller to have the current key board status transferred from the operating device to the controller 7FFCh 3 11 17 Data Set Transfer from Controller to Operating Device Single Mode You can use the following control code from the controller to have a data set trans ferred from the controller to the operating device The data are read in single mode The number of the data set must be written to the variable defined for this purpose In addition the corresponding variables for the transfer buffers must be defined 7FFDh 3 11 18 Erase Serial Message Memory You can use the following control code from the controller to have the entire mes sage memory of the operating device s serial message system erased 7FFEh 3 11 19 Refresh
31. Key SDW Parameter Offset of the variables in the recipe variable size in bytes value of the variables as a hexadecimal string Table 3 33 End of data set identifier End of Data Set Identifier Key SDE Parameter none Explanations Recipe version number On creating or changing the recipe description in the programming software this ver sion number is increased automatically whenever the structure of the data sets has changed To be able to load a data set from the PC to the operating device the down loaded version number and the version number stored in the operating device for the recipe involved must match The downloaded data set will not be stored if the version numbers do not match Write over identifier The value 1 means that the downloaded data set is to overwrite any data set with the same number that may already exist in the operating device The value 0 means that the downloaded set is to be rejected if a data set with the same number already ex ists Only those data sets can be overwritten that are not stored in the Flash memory i e that were loaded into the operating device together with the project 3 7 3 7 Printing Data Sets The data set print process can be started from both the operating device and the con troller To be able to initiate a print process from the operating device either the sys tem variable StartRezPrint must be placed into a screen or a softkey must be a
32. SUTRON visualization control communication User Manual Programming with TSwin Part Number 80 860 055 Version 4 Date 01 02 2007 Valid for TSwin net 4 1x SP3 visualization control communication Version Date Modifications 1 29 07 2005 First Edition 2 30 11 2005 Validation changed new script class and methods new system variables IP settings transparency buttons new options settings data set names for recipes project names new library functions transfer of project files USB printer chapter Switching On revised 3 01 03 2006 Remedying of general faults design changes 4 01 02 2007 Working with scripts removed modifications concerning SP2 and SP3 added This manual including all illustrations contained herein is copyright protected Use of this manual by any third party in departure from the copyright provision is forbidden No part of this manual may be reproduced trans lated or electronically or photographically archived or altered without the express written consent from S tron electronic GmbH Violations shall be cause for damage liability S tron electronic reserves the right to make any changes that contribute to technical improvement SUTRON Overall Table of Contents Overall Table of Contents 1 important Notes end endettement tnt 1 1 1 1 SYMBOLS isna eee pers anna jag caste a a a e Dean die stern ban 1 1 122 Safety Nobs eenaa ATE rate een es 1 1 1 3 mended WSS oa san
33. The Recipe field classifies the area in a screen used to display recipes To create a recipe field carry out the following steps 1 Select the Recipe Field icon in the toolbar and in the screen select the area where recipes will be displayed This area is displayed as a rectangle The recipe field is marked with the letter R on the left edge of the rectangle 2 Youcan use the sizing handles to change the height of the area You can not change the width of the area You can change the recipe field parameters by selecting Recipe field parameters from the context menu See chapter Working with Recipes on page 3 113 3 3 7 1 Recipe Field Parameters Select the name of the recipe for which you want to set up a recipe field Just below enter the height for the recipe field The Font area specifies the font used to display all elements of a recipe field on the operating device To display all elements of a recipe field in another font click the New Font button 3 3 8 Table Field The Table field classifies the area in a screen used to display values in a table To create a table field carry out the following steps 1 Select the Table Field icon in the toolbar and in the screen select the area where the table will be displayed This area is displayed as a rectangle The table field is marked with the letter T on the left edge of the rectangle 2 Youcan use the sizing handles to change the height of the area You can no
34. The polling area is broken down into three zones 1 Write Coordination byte 1 byte 2 Serial message channel 2 bytes high byte and low byte 3 Control bytes for the status LEDs of the function keys number depends on the operating device type You must enter the starting address for the polling area in the system parameters for the polling area Here enter the length of the polling area and the polling time as well The length of the polling area is based on the number of status LEDs on the operating device that is being used The polling time is based on the total system load Note the cycle times for other vari ables The structures of byte and word oriented polling areas are a little different There fore a selection cannot be changed once made 3 161 S TRON Tutorial 3 15 1 Byte Oriented Polling Area The byte oriented polling area is located on a byte address The controller must be able to access this area in bit mode Table 3 51 Byte oriented polling area Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ByteAddress Write Coordination Byte Free Free BS DDF LM PL RQ ED ByteAddress Serial Message Channel Low Byte 1 ByteAddress Serial Message Channel High Byte 2 Byte Address LED1 LED1 LED2 LED2 LED3 LED3 LED4 LED4 3 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddr
35. 1 Select the name of an existing project folder from the bottom display field Make sure the file extension is correct Template File name tst Project File name tsw Library File name tsb 2 Change the name 3 Click the Next gt button You can also return to the previous page To do so click the Back lt button 2 2 2 3 Create Project Folder Template or Library Terminal Type The Create project folder template or library terminal type dialog is the third dialog that the wizard shows you to create a new project folder If you have already created a project folder the last selection is automatically high lighted The icons illustrate the graphical capabilities of the individual devices Follow the steps below to specify the terminal type 1 Select a terminal type from the list 2 Select the memory size of your device if possible 3 Click the Next gt button You can also return to the previous page To do so click the Back lt button 2 4 SUTRON Programming 2 2 2 4 Create Project Folder or Template Protocol Type The Create project folder or template templates dialog is the fourth and final di alog that the wizard shows you to create a new project folder If you have already created a project folder the last selection is automatically high lighted The icons indicate whether this is a field bus connection or a point to point connec tion Follow the steps below to specify t
36. A button can contain a static text a text field a variable an image symbols or nothing at all Buttons that have no content are displayed without a frame and are transparent screen elements Application Transparent buttons are superimposed on a back ground image for example a plant overview to map hot areas on an image When you select this area a specific action is carried out for example the system opens another screen 3 3 5 2 Creating a Button To create a button 1 Click the Button icon in the toolbar Figure 3 18 Tool symbol for button 2 While holding down the left mouse button draw a frame on the screen and then release the left mouse button The buttons wizard opens and helps you by issuing a prompt for all the necessary parameters for a button Content Empty Button displays no content and is thus transparent You can not have an empty button displayed with a frame or color Text Static text is displayed in the button This text is edited in the Static Text tab Text field A piece of text of multiple lines is displayed on the button This text is edited in the Text Field tab Variable A variable is displayed on the button all variable and representation types are possible If you select this option the Variable Reference tab is shown as well as the Screen Variable tab Image symbol An image or symbol is displayed on the button This is edited in the Picture Symbo
37. All matching index entries are automatically listed below the input box Double click an index entry in the list to view the associated topic 2 5 3 Help Menu Browse This menu item allows you to display help for the programming software The Search tab appears on the left hand side Enter a keyword into the Search tab If you click the List Topics button the entire help system is searched and all topics that include the keyword are listed below the input box Double click a topic in the list to view it 2 5 4 Help Menu About Displays the software version level Please have this information on hand whenever you contact the hotline The Internet www suetron de button brings you to the homepage of S tron elec tronic By clicking the File list button you obtain a list of all programming software files in stalled 2 26 SUTRON Programming 2 5 5 Help Menu Sutron Homepage This menu item opens your default Internet browser and the homepage of S tron electronic is automatically loaded 2 5 6 Help Menu Netviewer This menu item starts the Netviewer software This software provides the support person the following capabilities enabling him to better assist you The support person can see your screen contents The support person can use a flashing pointer to draw your attention to a partic ular item on your screen The support person can remotely control your PC The support person is
38. An X appears for each digit you enter 3 11 S TRON Tutorial Table 3 6 Key functions for alphanumeric variables Key Function With With Shift Shift Case 0 Enters the number 0 0 0 1 Enters the number 1 STU1 STUstu1 2 Enters the number 2 VWX2 VWXvwx2 3 Enters the number 3 YZ 3 YZ YZ 3 4 Enters the number 4 JKL4 JKLjkl4 5 Enters the number 5 MNO5 MNOmno5 6 Enters the number 6 PQR6 PQRpar6 7 Enters the number 7 ABC7 ABCabc7 8 Enters the number 8 DEF8 DEFdef8 9 Enters the number 9 GHI9 GHighig Decimal point Enters the decimal point ad 22L Plus Enters the numbers 0 to 9 the letters A to Z and a to z lt gt lt gt lt gt Minus Enters the numbers 0 to 9 the letters A to Z and a to z A Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Delete Deletes the character at the cursor position E See chapter Working with Password Protec
39. Count The counter is represented by a 4 character string and specifies the number of com pilations performed This text can not be edited 2 12 S SUTRON Programming Postfix The Postfix is a random number consisting of 2 characters This number can not be edited Use the Refresh button to update the entries in all fields The File name area allows you to select an S3 SB CB file created using the pro gramming software and output its application ID To do this select the file and then click the Refresh button in the S3 CB file area In the Operating device area you can read the application ID from the connected operating device You can either define the interface parameters for the connection separately or use the parameters from the selected S3 SB CB file To define the in terface parameters click the Parameters button 2 4 4 Tools Menu Firmware Update You can easily replace the firmware for the operating devices by using the option that allows you to load the firmware together with the programming software on the oper ating device If the firmware is no longer up to date it is possible to easily exchange it with a newer version This applies only to terminals containing the firmware in FLASH memory This relies to all operating devices with 386EX processor and all op erating devices with 25 pin universal interface If the firmware is loadable you can read the firmware version while initialization of the ter
40. Each operating device can have a specific number of keys and therefore has its own keyboard image Image of language number The image of the language number corresponds to the screen number as an integer value Fractional digit control The variables for the fractional digit control enable you to define the number of dec imal places fractional digits to be used to change the representation of decimal numbers This variable is read once when you boot the operating device and can not be refreshed during runtime 2 76 S TRON Programming Example A decimal number has 7 digits Two of these digits are defined as global fractional digits offset The value 12345 is to be displayed Fractional digit control 0 Result 123 45 Fractional digit control 1 Result 12 345 Fractional digit control 2 Result 1 2345 See chapter Image of the Screen Number on page 3 178 See chapter Read Coordination Byte on page 3 165 See chapter Send Keyboard Image to Controller on page 3 154 See chapter Image of the Keyboard on page 3 178 2 13 9 Supplementary Functions Data Input Screen change Activate the parameter Allow screen change with active editor if despite having an active editor e g for a variable value you want to exit from the current screen with out first withdrawing the data release You can not normally change to another screen while an editor e g for a variable v
41. No No Indication of the error message via the status LED Help Data transmission to the data set which is defined in the system variable UploadDSNr Data transmission to the next free data set within the terminal memory Figure 2 6 Data transfer to the operating device operator controlled 2 10 7 4 Specify how the data sets should be sorted The following are the sorting options By data set number By data set name Recipes Data Set Sorting 2 54 nN 2 SUTRON Programming 2 10 7 5 Recipes Number Specify any recipe number provided it is unique to use as an identifier for the rec ipe 2 10 7 6 Recipes Controller Target Address Specify the controller address for the recipe buffer which can be used to replace the recipe data sets You do not need to create a recipe buffer if you can write the data set values to indi vidual controller variables 2 10 7 7 Recipes Font The Font area shows the font used to display recipe elements in the programming software To display the recipe in a different font click the New font button 2 10 8 Print Logs A print log comprises the printer page layout static texts and output variables Print logs can not contain graphical elements The print logs can not be displayed on the operating device They are merely man aged by the operating device and output using the SER2 or USB only for Windows CE interface Th
42. SUTRON Important Notes 1 Important Notes i 1 1 Symbols The symbols in this manual are used to draw your attention on notes and dangers Danger This symbol is used to refer to instructions which if ignored or not carefully followed could result in personal injury Note This symbol indicates application tips or supplementary notes Reference to source of information This symbol refers to detailed sources of information on the current topic 1 2 Safety Notes Read this manual carefully before using the software Keep this manual in a place where it is always accessible to all users The user manual in particular the safety notes must be observed by all person nel working with the software and the programmed device Observe the accident prevention rules and regulations that apply to the operating site Installation and operation must only be carried out by qualified and trained per sonnel 1 3 Intended Use The software has to be used for programming operating devices exclusively Ev ery other use is not permitted 1 4 Target Group All configuration and programming work in connection with the automation system must be performed by trained personnel only e g qualified electricians electrical en gineers The configuration and programming personnel must be familiar with the safety con cepts of automation technology 1 1 S TRON Important Notes S SUTRON
43. See chapter Working with Running Time Meters on page 3 147 See chapter Write Values of Running Time Meters to Controller on page 3 150 2 13 7 Supplementary Functions Unicode Subareas subrange list Unicode fonts are split up into code ranges that are assigned to specific character types or languages In order to save memory in the operating device not all Unicode subranges are used Instead you can choose the subranges that you need to create text elements The Memory needs for each font field indicates how much memory the operating device needs for the selected subranges The subranges available in the programming software are not the same as those of www unicode org 2 73 S TRON Programming In the following table you find an assignment of the software program s subranges to the original Unicode subranges Table 2 12 Unicode subranges Name for Unicode sub range in software pro gram Unicode chart name Unicode character code range taken into account by the programming soft ware Latin 1 always available CO Controls and Basic Latin C1 Controls and Latin 1 Supplement U 0000 to U 00FF 0 to 255 Latin erweitert Latin Extended Latin Extended A Latin Extended B IPA Extensions Spacing Modifier Letters Combining Diacritical Marks U 0100 to U 036F 256 to 879 Griechisch Greek Greek U 0370 to U 03FF 880 to 1023 Kyrillisch Cyril
44. moved within a positive value A negative sign is placed in front of the value 3rd case Cursor was moved within a negative value The value is not changed Delete Deletes the position where the cursor is located and also deletes the sign 3 3 3 3 8 Hexadecimal Number In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or event controlled Enter the field length for the display format If you want to start a script after entering the variable value select the name of a script from the Post editing script field In case of input variables you can enter upper and lower limit values for the range monitoring area supervision which are not to be exceeded Assign a color to every limit value to indicate that the upper or the lower value has been exceeded For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Hexadecimal number type variables function as follows The significance of the displayed digits increases from right to left
45. 0 when the pump is on Use it to set flag M 100 0 to 1 when the pump is off 3 159 S TRON Tutorial 3 14 4 Reaction Time of Function and Soft Keys Whenever function keys need to influence PLC variables they are given highest pri ority when transferred via the protocol The reaction times during the transfer proce dure are protocol specific and range from 60 to 120 ms This is the period of time which elapses after a key has been pressed until an output is set or reset in the PLC The reaction time varies depending on the protocol itself the load on the protocol cy clical data etc and the cycle time of the PLC Note that reaction times can be influenced by the polling times of the variables mes sages and images of the LEDs 3 14 5 Using Control Keys as Function Keys Control keys can alternatively be used as function keys to trigger certain actions in the PLC They can be defined to carry out the same functions as function keys i e they are capable of assigning any values to a variable The transfer procedure is in dependent of the screen parameter assignment Thus if a control key is to carry out a specific function in a screen it should not be programmed as a screen selector key at the same time The screen specific evaluation is identical to that of the function key 3 14 6 Status LEDs of Function Keys For each function key status LED a 2 bit piece of information is available in the cy clical polli
46. 000 000 OK Cancel OK Cancel Current IP Add new user Delete a user Enter User MyName Enter User Enter Password oes MyName Confirm Password OK Cancel OK Cancel Password da p Confirm Luis OK Cancel Figure 3 45 Network Settings Network Settings Fix Settings IP Address The system deselects DHCP and enters the settings from the IPSetting ini file of the USB stick This file must exist in the root directory of the USB stick If no USB stick is connected the information is read from the registry S TRON 3 191 Tutorial This entry is password protected Contents of the IPSetting ini file IPCONFIG IPAddress 172 016 042 150 SubnetMask 255 255 255 000 All addresses must be given in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Numbers smaller than 100 you have to fill up with zeros Example 192 168 42 1 gt 192 168 042 001 Network Settings Fix Settings Gateway The system deselects DHCP and enters the settings from the IPSetting ini file of the USB stick This file must exist in the root directory of the USB stick If no USB stick is connected the information is read from the registry This entry is password protected Contents of the IPSetting ini file IPCONFIG Gateway 172 016 042 150 All addresses must be given in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Numbers smaller than 100 you have to fill up
47. 100 are to be displayed as a horizontal bar 1 For a reference value of 0 the bar grows from left to right as the values increase 2 Forareference value of 50 the bar grows from the center depending on whether the variable value lies above or below 50 3 21 S TRON Tutorial 1st limit value 1 Corner value The 1st limit value determines the variable value from which the bar is to grow from the lower or left corner If you enter the name of a variable this value will be calcu lated at runtime Example The values from 0 to 100 are to be displayed as a horizontal bar 1 Fora 1st limit value of 0 the bar grows from left to right as the values increase 2 Fora 1st limit value of 50 the bar only grows from left to right as of a variable value of 50 For variable values below 50 the bar is displayed with the limit value not reached graphic 2nd limit value 2 Corner value The 2nd limit value determines the variable value up to which the bar is to grow to the lower or right corner If you enter the name of a variable this value will be calcu lated at runtime Example The values from 0 to 100 are to be displayed as a horizontal bar 1 Fora 2nd limit value of 100 the bar grows from left to right as the values in crease 2 Fora 2nd limit value of 50 the bar grows from left to right up to a variable value of 50 For variable values above 50 the bar is displayed with the limit value ex ceeded
48. 15 3 LCDDACOutput Function Current input value of the DA converter for contrast control Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 255 3 4 15 4 Break Function Cancels the current input process Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ues Cancel input process RS The input values are not transferred to the controller 3 4 15 5 StartCalibrationTouch Function Starts the calibration process for the touch screen Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Starts the calibration process Once you have set the system variable to the value 1 the next touch screen touches are used for calibration You must set up the system variable StateCalibrati onTouch to ensure that operators will know how to proceed 3 99 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 15 6 StateCalibration Touch Function Displays the calibration status Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues
49. 16 IdentRandom Function Displays the current project s ending application ID Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Max 2 characters 3 4 1 17 ComErrorRetry Function Displays the number of communication errors Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Oton Number of communication errors ues IS The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 1 18 SerialNumber Function Displays the serial number Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val Max 64 characters ues 3 4 1 19 IPAddress Function Displays the toplical IP address of the operating device Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 3 59 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 1 20 BaseScreenDelay Function Delay until base screen target screen is displayed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 10 to Seconds ues 9999 ics The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used aga
50. 2 Temperature 285 C at station 07 Explanation of the message structure 4 digit message number Date is recorded when the message is detected in the operating device Time is recorded when the message is detected in the operating device Text 1 in front of variable 1 value of variable 1 at the time of message generation is stored in the operating device Text 2 between variable 1 and 2 value of variable 2 at the time of message generation is stored in the operating device 3 8 5 4 Size of the Message Memory The maximum message memory size allows management of up to 3000 message entries As the amount of data is considerable a high performance level is required when sorting the messages and during resorting and initialization As you usually do not require this many entries you can set the maximum memory size for messages as needed The basic setting for the message memory allows 500 entries When making the setting take note that for example you will need about 50 pages of paper to print an entire message memory containing 3000 messages The message buffer is output in a screen containing a message field You can use the system variable RepmanSortCrit to define message sorting See chapter Memory Requirement for Messages and Data Sets on page 3 144 See chapter RepmanSortCrit on page 3 70 3 137 S TRON Tutorial 3 8 5 5 Message Sorting You can optionally display messages in the message
51. 2 6 S TRON Programming Ifyou select One single backup a backup file is generated when you reopen a database The backup file is then overwritten every time this database is re opened This backup file is always called DATABASENAME 000 Ifyou select Many multiple backup a backup file is generated when you reopen a database Another backup file is created every time this database is opened These files are assigned ascending numbered file extensions If you wish you can also store the backup files in compressed form Current Database area Decide whether you want to compress the current database after exiting it This will reduce the memory requirement considerably Always make sure that you have enough memory available on your hard disk to allow you to unpack a compressed file again Template Directory area Select the path to be used for the templates You can then create a new database on the basis of a template Undo single step undo area Activate the Single Step Undo check box to cancel the last action The undo function does not apply to all actions To check whether a particular action can be undone view the status of the button in the tool bar You must enable the undo function before opening or creating a file The undo func tion can not be reversed while you are programming 2 4 1 2 Options Graphic Editors The graphic editor functions are divided into the following areas Capture
52. 3 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeees 2 32 2 9 4 Protocol Loop through Operation 2 34 2 9 5 Encoding of Alphanumerical Strings cececceseceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeees 2 35 2 10 Languages 52428 seal nete leeds estes ecu esta eed ntti 2 35 2 10 1 System Defaults sente mu manne ue 2 35 2 10 2 Screens cinigis onara ai Eaa danses ete 2 37 210 3 SUDSCIOONS urirsri iania aia i iit eee ene 2 41 2 10 4 Help SChOCNS i ecinsscccrauersnweceenbeaeedcndt aaeetintend id etapedantiaed ected 2 41 2 10 5 Global Function Keys 2 42 2 10 6 Message System ccccceecccecsceeeeeneeeseeeeseeaeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeseiaeesseneeess 2 43 2 107 RECOS usant ann nes 2 51 2 10 8 Pon LOJ EE RE a ns 2 55 210 97 Subprint LOGS vinci csi aed that dete late unless 2 58 2 10 10 Language Resources 2 58 2 11 User Management 2 68 2 11 1 User Management Passwords nenne 2 68 2 11 2 User Management Parameters 2 69 2 12 SCNIPIS Here ctaes raaigras inona tell ssh plane dettes 2 69 2 12 1 Soripts General ivsancdevvssanacavndsdacde cava sina cdvadasheceunsdeaacauveaacedexvesencvivasan 2 69 Z 12 2 Variable Lists uns nina nina 2 70 2 12 3 Planned TaskS sissitir samedis iee 2 70 2 13 Supplementary FUNCTIONS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaaeeeeeeeesetaeeseeeeee 2 71 2 13 1 Supplementary Functions Polling Times 2 71 2 13 2 Supplementary F
53. 46 Image of date and time with a 4 digit year Address Content Address 0 H H Century 00 to 99 Address 1 Y Y Year 00 to 99 Address 2 M M Month 01 to 12 Address 3 D D Day 01 to 31 Address 4 h h Hour 00 to 23 Address 5 m m Minute 00 to 59 Address 6 S S Seconds 00 to 59 Address 7 W W Weekday 0 to 6 or 1 to 7 Table 3 47 Image of date and time with a 2 digit year Address Content Address 0 Y Y Year 00 to 99 Address 1 M M Month 01 to 12 Address 2 D D Day 01 to 31 Address 3 h h Hour 00 to 23 Address 4 m m Minute 00 to 59 Address 5 S S Seconds 00 to 59 Address 6 W W Weekday 0 to 6 or 1 to 7 S S TRON e Tutorial The byte for the weekday is independent of the calendar and always runs Modulo 6 Create the names of the weekdays in a text list To display the weekdays in the op erating device in any screen create the system variable RTCDayofWeek with the representation type Selection Text Link this variable with the weekday text list You must order the names of the weekdays in the correct sequence You can select any starting point Table 3 48 Text list for operating devices with a Z80 CPU or RISC CPU Value Text 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 3 12 2 Setting the Real Time Clock from the Con
54. 5 Terminal Ethernet Settings Enter the parameters for the ethernet connection that must be available in the oper ating device as default values With this it is only necessary to make changes to the parameters at the operating device if changes to the net environment occur Obtain IP address automatically The IP address is assigned automatically by a server or router In this case you can not enter an IP address subnet mask and default gateway Use fixed IP address The IP address is not given by a server or router automatically In this case assign an IP address for the operating device Eventually you have to assign a subnet mask and a default gateway too IP address Assign an IP address in decimal notation that is used to address the operating device in the network Subnet mask Assign a subnet mask in decimal notation The operating device must be in the scope of the assigned subnet mask Default gateway Assign an address in decimal notation for the default gateway if you use a gateway in your network Preferred DNS server Assign the address of the preferred DNS server in decimal notation if you use a DNS server The DNS server resolves names in IP addresses and reversed Alternative DNS server Assign the address of an alternative DNS server in decimal notation The alternative DNS server resolves names in IP addresses if the preferred DNS server is not avail able 2 84 SUTRON Programming
55. 80 11 Operating Device 25 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 TD RD 3 3 RD 1D 2 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DTR 20 7 GND GND 7 RTS 4 Table 3 61 Cable operating device 9 pin to scanner DL 80 11 Operating Device 9 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 RD 1D 2 3 TD RD 3 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS DTR 20 RTS 4 3 16 3 Parameters for Scanner DL910 from Data Logic The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters You must configure the scanner with the ENQ ACK Host side protocol You can define up to 4 characters e g 02 as the data prefix and up to 4 characters e g 0305 as the data postfix for initializing Table 3 62 Data prefixes Number of Characters Code 1 EC1CF2EA01xxEA1 10305EA1200 0D 2 EC1CF2EA02xxEA1 10305EA1200 0D 3 EC1CF2EA03xxEA1 10305EA1200 0D 4 EC1CF2EA04xxEA1 10305EA1200 0D 3 172 SUTRON Tutorial Table 3 63 Data postfixes Number of Characters Code 1 EC1CF2EA0102EA11xxEA1200 0D 2 EC1CF2EA0102EA12xxEA1200 0D 3 EC1CF2EA0102EA13xxEA1200 0D 4 EC1CF2EA0102EA14xxEA1200 0D Table 3 64 Parameters for scanner DL 910 Parameter Value
56. Click Open to confirm your selection You are returned to the Insert Object dialog 9 Confirm with OK The image is now displayed on the right side of the window using the set width and height Follow the steps below to use another program to insert an image OLE The image has not been created yet 1 Enter a name for the image into the Image name column 2 Complete the entry with Enter 3 Inthe Insert new image dialog box select the Insert image as OLE object but ton The Insert object dialog appears 4 Select the Create new radio button 5 Select an image application 6 Click OK 2 79 S TRON Programming The image application opens 7 Create an image in the image application 8 Close the image application by selecting Exit and return to OLE image in the File menu The image is now displayed on the right side of the window using the set width and height 2 14 2 Image Lists An image list is a table which assigns images to numerical values It is used wherever an image is to be displayed in a screen instead of a numerical value from the PLC The window for image lists consists of two sections The left section of the window displays a table the right section displays a blank screen The screen located on the right allows you to specify the size of the image and to control the representation in the process The table on the left consists of four columns and at least two rows The first
57. Comment You can enter comments of any length about the database created Example of some useful details you might include Database version Last changed on date Database created by name Machines and machine variants for which the project has been created 2 8 Demomode Check the checkbox Demomode to create a project which supports testing the op erating device without having a controller connected Translate the project with this setting and download the project to the operating de vice Start the operating device again if it doesn t boot automatically During the boot process the text DEMOMODE is displayed for two seconds Without a controller no realistic values are displayed The entered values are not saved Please check the navigation the function of the keys or buttons the input editors the script performance the design of the project To operate the operating device in standard mode uncheck the checkbox Demo mode and compile the project once again Download the project into the operating device After download is complete the operating device reboots automatically and operates in standard mode 2 30 SUTRON Programming 2 9 Communication The operating device can communicate with the PC a controller a logging printer or a scanner To add a controller as a communication partner to the project follow the steps below 1 Right click with the mou
58. Configure the Contrast Brightness Setting for the Operating D6VICE 3 ci wii ee A ee ee 3 177 3 18 Renaming Objects 525082 dan retirent enida eaaa a ara EE 3 178 3 19 Image of the User Mode Switch 3 178 S SUTRON Overall Table of Contents 3 20 Image of the Screen Number 3 178 3 21 Image of the Keyboard 3 178 3 21 1 Keyboard Image for the BTO3AM 00 eeeceeeeeeeesteeeeeeenteeeeeeettaeeeeeeeee 3 179 3 21 2 Keyboard Image for the BTO5AM cceeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaaes 3 181 3 21 3 Keyboard Image for the BTO7AM ccceeeeeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 3 183 3 21 4 Keyboard Image for the BT21AM eccceeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 3 185 3 22 Starting the Operating Devices eecceceeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeenees 3 187 3 22 1 BOOt PrOCOSS 222 admettant msn eee ne 3 187 3 22 2 Loading Procedure on Windows CE Operating Procedure 3 188 3 22 3 Function of the AppStarter exe Program ccseeeseeeseseeeeseeeeees 3 196 3 22 4 Function of the TSvisLD exe Program 3 196 3 22 5 Memory Media Used 3 196 3 22 6 Important Files and Directories eecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaes 3 197 3 23 Communication With a Controller oo cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneseneeeseeeaaes 3 197 3 24 Working on Older Projects With TSwin net 4 XX cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 197 3 24 1 Download of Old Projects S3 Files 3 198 Ph WM ce crac as ed en E A 1 vi
59. Hexadecimal numbers are displayed with the digits 0 to 9 and A to F in upper case and with lead ing zeros The representation refers to the data types byte word and LWord The maximum length is 8 digits There are no blanks between the characters 3 18 SUTRON Tutorial Example A hexadecimal number 164 16 162 16 16 Significance 0 E 4 5 A Displayed 0E45AH Table 3 11 Key functions for hexadecimal numbers Key Function Oto 9 Enters the numbers 0 to 9 Decimal point No function Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Plus Enters the characters 0 to 9 and A to F in ascending or der Minus Enters the characters 0 to 9 and A to F in descending or der Delete No function 3 3 3 3 9 Binary Number In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or _event controlled To
60. Import Use this function to import variables from symbol files that you created while pro gramming the controller These variables are then transferred to the programming software s variable list and can be used in programming You can also import text entries from external files To do this first select a text list where you want to enter the texts 2 4 11 1 Import Variables from Symbol File A variable list must be open before variables can be imported from a symbol file The programming software provides a function for importing symbol files from other manufacturers At present the Bosch SXS format is supported as of WINSPS 2 11 To carry out the import you require the protocol type controller BUEP19E Select this as the active controller and open the variable list Follow the steps below 1 If necessary create a new controller BUEP19E 2 Open the variable list editor 3 The Tools Import Variables from symbol file menu item is now enabled activate it You can use the import function to perform the following tasks Fill an empty variable list Compare existing variable list entries with the import file In this case you must select the variable entries in the variable list for comparison Only selected lines are included in the comparison process Any additional entries that are recog nized at data read in time as not yet created are then added to the variable list provided they were selected This step occurs
61. In some communication protocols you can not control the operability of the interface in the controller The Liveness flag has been developed to address this shortfall This is a simple function which has proven very effective in practice Whenever the controller needs to know whether the connection is still active it writes a logical 1 and subsequently a logical 0 to bit 3 of the Write Coordination byte The operating device constantly monitors the Liveness flag in the Write Coordination byte and compares it with the status of the Liveness flag in the Read Coordination byte As soon as the two bytes are no longer the same the operating device copies bit 3 from the Write Coordination byte to the Read Coordination byte Within a timeout time the controller must now also check whether both statuses are identical PLC Compare PLC RERIEIR WCB No Time out Yes Communication error LM Bit in RCB Yes PLC Invert status of LM Bit in WCB 0to1 1 to 0 Operating device read polling area and copy LM Bit into RCB PLC Start timer Figure 3 35 Monitoring the liveness flag Define the following settings for the liveness flag monitoring System parameters Poll area Create a variable for the Write Coordination byte Enter a polling time that meets the requirements of real life situations 3 169 S TRON Tutorial System parameters
62. Message System You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice load all new parallel messages This allows implementation of an event controlled message system 7FFFh 3 154 SUTRON Tutorial 3 12 Working with a Real Time Clock in the Operat ing Device Each operating device has a real time clock You set the parameters of the real time clock in the system parameters You use system variables to set the time date and weekday in the operating device and insert these variables in any screen You can transfer the data for the real time clock to the connected controller cyclically or on request or provide values from the controller to the real time clock on request To allow the values to be exchanged you must agree on a variable in which the im age of date and time is stored Enter the name of this variable in the system param eters of the real time clock either for setting the real time clock or for transferring the real time clock to the controller 3 12 1 Date and Time Image The time and date image describes the structure of the array variables that must be defined for setting and updating the time The date and time image is exchanged in the BCD format For the image you require an array variable with up to 8 bytes The length of the array variable is based on the length of the year specified The fol lowing table illustrates the image with a 4 digit year Table 3
63. Programming 2 Programming E TSwin net 4 00 D TSwin Projects TSwin 400 BT03AM tsw 2 1 Programming Interface When all of the windows are open the programming interface looks roughly like this File Edit View Tools Help SCOR AGE ECCERE P QQmglee 134 PRR RY ONT BEARS i amp 8 Format serial messages poi amp 9 Format parallel messages amp Mainscreen Screen objects FRS Curso A Static Text i Text fiela Variable E Background graphics A Button face E Graph Recipe field Table field H Message field A Message text Main screen x a gt Fassnord protection General Help screen One Background color nn 7 Script parameters Editing direction from left to right Function keys C Editing direction from top to T Automatic data release Position 0 1 Figure 2 1 Complete overview of TSwin net The interface consists of windows that you can dock at a required location dockable windows or position anywhere you like floating windows The remaining free space is used as the working area In this working area the programming software displays screen list recipe and graphic editors that you can use to edit objects for example a screen editor for the main screen The menu bar and toolbar appear at the top of the main window The status bar appears at the bottom of the main w
64. Request bit in the Read Coordination byte To allocate an editing release to the operating device the controller writes a logical 1 to the Editing Release bit in the Write Coordination byte 3 15 7 2 Editing Status The operating device uses the Editing Status bit to indicate to the controller that the value of a variable could be changed Once the operating device has received the Editing Release from the controller the device sets the Editing Status bit in the Read Coordination byte to logical 1 The operator can now change the variable value To send the changed variable value to the controller the operator must select the Enter key to complete the entry 3 165 S TRON Tutorial The operator can then change other variable values Then the operator must press the Data Release key This resets the Editing Status bit to logical 0 The Refresh Request and Refresh Acknowledgment bits are used to write the new variable value to the controller Once the controller has read the new variable value it uses the Refresh Acknowl edgment bit to indicate of the Write Coordination byte that the Editing Status bit can once again be reset to logical 0 3 15 7 3 Refresh Request If you changed a variable value in the operating device and selected the Data Re lease key the Refresh Requestbit in the Read coordination byte must be set to log ical 1 This triggers the read process in the controller and then confirms it with
65. Running Time Meters on page 3 147 2 13 2 Supplementary Functions Polling Area The polling area consists of three segments 1 Write coordination byte 1 byte or 1 word 2 Serial message channel 2 bytes or 1 word 3 Segment for controlling the status LEDs in the function keys up to 12 bytes or 6 words You can operate the entire polling area with a single field variable OR operate each segment of the polling area with separate variables If you operate the polling area with 1 variable 1 Specify the name of the variable for the polling area 2 Specify the polling time 3 Specify the size of the polling area 2 71 S TRON Programming If you operate the polling area with 3 variables 1 Specify the name of the variable for the write coordination byte 2 Specify the name of the variable for the serial message channel 3 Specify the name and the size of the variable for controlling the status LED in the function keys See chapter Working with the Cyclic Polling Area on page 3 161 See chapter Write Coordination Byte on page 3 168 See chapter Serial Message Channel on page 3 164 See chapter Status LEDs of Function Keys on page 3 160 2 13 3 Supplementary Functions Transfer Date amp Time Send to control Here you can specify the name of the variable used for the data associated with the date time and day of the week in the controller as well as the polling tim
66. Terminal initializes transfer variables transfer from the terminal with the values of the system variables SelectRezeptNr and SelectDSNr No Abort by operator via system variable DSDnloadBreak DDR bit in WCB 1 No WCB in the poll area Write Co ordination Byte free free free DDR LF DP RA EDR Ks Yes DDR bit in RCB is set by the terminal RCB al lt lt gt Read Co ordination Byte free free free DDR LF DP RA EDR Start of data transmission Abort of data transmission by loss of voltage or abort of communication No DDR bit in the RCB is reset by the terminal Initialization of transfer variables transfer from the terminal by the terminal e recipe no 0 data set no FF Y PLC resets the DDF bit in the WCB a End N LL Figure 3 32 Data transfer to the controller operator controlled 3 118 SUTRON Tutorial 3 7 3 2 Recipe buffer Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 4 by the operator new Upload from data set C Start PLC single address Upload to 2 Recipe buffer existing data set Upload from Transfer to the Operating Device Operator Controlled PLC single address I
67. acknowledgment Appear Disappear active 4 Messages whose first variable has a size of greater than 4 bytes 3 144 SUTRON Tutorial The following table illustrates the memory use for 500 messages and a maximum number of data sets containing 22 bytes of user data Table 3 40 Memory use for 500 messages CPU in Operating Device Z80 32 Bit RISC Available Memory Space in Bytes About About 116000 for FW version 1 07 or lower 116000 About 147000 for FW version 1 08 or higher in Bytes Memory Requirement per Message 24 x 500 32 x 500 16000 12000 Bytes Remaining Memory Capacity in 104000 About 100000 for FW version 1 07 or lower About 12 4000 for FW version 1 08 or higher Possible Number of Data Sets 104000 100000 22 44 1515 for FW version 1 07 or 22 33 lower 1890 1294000 22 44 1960 for FW version 1 08 or higher View level Edit level You can use the following formula to determine the exact message buffer size G gt M1 M3 20 G Size of message buffer B Size of parallel message system in bytes M1 Number of messages which require only 1 memory location are entered in the message editor and have message numbers smaller than B x 8 M3 Number of messages which require 3 memory locations are entered in the message editor and have message numbers smaller than B x 8 20 Minimum size of message buffer 3 9 Working with Passwor
68. already an el ement with a particular name in the project and you want to add an element with the same name from a library Choose one of the options below 1 The element from the library is assigned a different name when it is added to the project 2 The element from the library is not added 3 A prompt is displayed This must be confirmed before you can add the element Regarding 1 The date and time are appended to the name of the element being added This clearly differentiates the element from the existing element 2 9 S TRON Programming 2 4 1 5 Options Message Editor Using the message editor options you can make basic settings for the editor that you use to create messages The message editor options are divided into the following areas Grid Status display Representation Message number Grid area You can display a grid for character boundaries as an input help Select the Display check box to activate this function You can also select a Color for the grid Status Display area The status bar at the bottom of the screen in the message editor shows the current cursor position displayed in either Dots pixel or Grid units Representation area With the Output variables field you can select the Color of output variables in the message editor from a list provided This makes it easier for you to identify the output variable within a message text With the Zoom field selec
69. and Variable you can assign 255 ranges of values for dynamic attributes Dynamic attributes change the display of a text or variable value in the operating de vice based on a variable or control variable value The system displays the values for the upper and lower limit in a list box In the same line it displays the attributes for values that are within the limits You can not enter overlapping value ranges 1 Enter the values for the upper and lower limit under the list box 2 Select the corresponding attributes in the relevant check boxes 3 Assign the attributes to the range of values The range of values and its attributes are simultaneously entered in the list box The dynamic attributes are either derived directly from the value of a variable or from the value of a corresponding control variable For variables in input and output screens the entry of a control variable is optional In general no control variables are permitted in recipes Here the dynamic attributes can only be derived from the value of the variables For texts in input output screens a control variable is always required to control the attributes You can not assign dynamic attributes for texts in recipes 3 51 S TRON Tutorial To assign dynamic attributes carry out the following steps 1 Click one of the lines in the list box Enter limit values into the appropriate fields Select the corresponding attributes Enter the na
70. are stored on this server and the operating device accesses the centrally stored files via the Ether net Transfer of CB DLL EXE and INI files In the Source directory of the terminal file CB area the selected project file for transfer is indicated If you want to transfer the files to a removable storage medium select the relevant PC drive from a list of available drives The TSvisRT subdirectory is automatically created on the storage medium and the files are stored there Start the transfer by clicking the Start button For transmission to an operating device with internal FTP server please enter the IP address If you already assigned an IP address of the operating device in the project you may automatically insert the address by clicking on the Take from project but ton To shorten the transmission you have the choice to suppress the transmission of the TSvisRT_CE runtime if this file has no changes Click on the Extended button to open an extended FTP transfer dialog This dialog contains more functionality for FTP transmissions Start the transfer by clicking the Start button For operating devices with integrated FTP server you have the possibility to display the content of the internal flash file system by means of a browser 2 82 SUTRON Programming a amp amp F1 ftp 192 168 100 107 Microsoft Internet Exc pluses m 1 Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 4 sy Zuri
71. automatically set to 0 if you enter an incorrect pass word Ifyou select the Data Release key for an edit level that is too low no function is implemented when you select the key You can enter a password in all screens The only special case is the setup screen The system variable ScrchgPasswd is available for entry See chapter ScrchgPasswd on page 3 88 In the programming software you can select the Password Editor which allows hid den password entry on the operating device An X then appears for each character you enter in the operating device During programming we advise you to ensure that at least one password a master password has the highest authorization level The first password entered in the pro gramming system is of particular significance as a master password Unlike all other passwords the master password can not be changed in the operating device It also allows you to reset all changed passwords to the standard values entered in the pro gramming software Access level for screen 5 10 Access level for screen 6 20 Access level for screen 7 30 Password 4712 has the edit level 15 and the view level 25 The following accesses are possible after the password 4712 has been entered Screen 5 will be displayed editing of values is authorized Screen 6 will be displayed editing of values is not authorized Screen 7 will not be displayed editing of values is not authorized The acce
72. by the mouse If the element is linked to a controller variable the full controller address is displayed If the element is linked to a system variable the name of the variable is displayed To display subscreens that are linked you must select the corresponding check box With the Display referenced image list check box you can decide whether to dis play the default image in selection image variables By activating the Fit working area to editor size check box you can ensure that the graphic editor is maximized in the window 2 4 1 3 Options List Editors The list editor options are divided into the following areas Font Variable list Text and image list Default text length for text lists Font area This area displays the font used in the list editors by default To change a font click Select Any existing entries in a list are automatically con verted to the selected font Variable List area To activate an automatic syntax check for the address definition in a variable list se lect the appropriate check box in this area The check is performed after a line of the variable list is exited 2 8 SUTRON Programming Text and Image List area When the Display values hexadecimally check box is selected you can also dis play and enter the values in text and image lists in hexadecimal format Always pre cede the hexadecimal value with the letter H Default Text Length for Text Lists
73. can define whether to use pixels or grids characters when specifying the position of an element Sorting area Possible sorting options are Horizontally Vertically or Vertically Horizontally Horizontally Vertically means you want to sort text items using the horizontal position as the main criterion and the vertical position as the sub criterion Vertically Horizontally means you want to sort text items using the vertical position as the main criterion and the horizontal position as the sub criterion Import area Specify whether you want the programming software to notify you if the position of a translated element has changed in relation to the original element position You can also determine whether you want a warning to be displayed if the translated text is longer than the original text If this is the case you can double click the corre sponding message to open the text editor screen editor message editor text list ed itor and reposition or check the text However any changes to position or text length made here will not be reflected in the export file 2 11 S TRON Programming 2 4 2 Tools Menu Defining the Interface Define the interface parameters for connection between the PC and the operating device First select the COM interface whose values you wish to change The Interface Parameters area contains default values To change those values simply select other values from the appropriate lis
74. ceived but can be called up once a message is selected within the message field 2 44 SUTRON Programming Screen change on arrival of message If the controller transmits a message the operating device automatically changes to the specified screen You can select any screen here The parameter when a message arrives does not apply to screen changes that have been enforced by the controller Furthermore the screen accessed does not necessarily have the same number as the message Screen change within the message screen Once messages arrived have been displayed in a screen s message field the top message is indicated by the gt cursor arrow You can select other messages us ing the Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys You can activate the RepmanChg Screen system variable to effect a screen change to the screen of your choice according to the settings for the message This parameter can therefore be used to design a message based user interface It allows you to access screens fast er which contain more detailed information on the message in question to allow particular settings etc Help screen The help screen the operator can call up for message management can be specified in the Help Screen area Group The message entered previously can be assigned to a group 1 to 8 The messages can then be displayed in different message screens in accordance with the established groups Advantages Further class
75. controller immedi ately after being entered but are stored in the operating device as data sets These data sets are protected against power failure The data sets can be loaded to the con troller as a unit as and when required The maximum number of recipes that can be created at programming time is 250 For each recipe up to 250 data sets can be created The data sets can either be cre ated at programming time and be stored in the operating device s Flash memory to gether with the project or can be entered online on the operating device and are then stored in the battery backed RAM You must copy data sets stored in the Flash memory to the RAM first before you can edit them Data sets that have been edited remain in the battery backed RAM Example Settings of a machine for manufacturing various products Table 3 26 Recipe for the product clamp Variable Value Unit Material ST37 3 Feedrate 25 00 mm s Setpoint Value Axis 1 43 5 mm Setpoint Value Axis 2 56 30 mm Cutting Angle 30 Cutting Speed 110 mm s Table 3 27 Recipe for the product shaft Variable Value Unit Material X20Cr13 Feedrate 20 00 mm s Setpoint Value Axis 1 45 6 mm Setpoint Value Axis 2 51 20 mm Cutting Angle 45 7 Cutting Speed 76 mm s The variables Material Feedrate Setpoint Value Axis 1 Setpoint Value Axis 2 Cut ting Angle and Cutting Speed can be organized into the recipe Mac
76. define the binary number representation format you must specify the length of the field and the number of blank spaces in between gap characters You define the format of binary numbers by specifying the following information Number of bits maximum 32 Number of gaps maximum 255 Field length maximum 7937 and Order 01234567 MSB to LSB or Order 876543210 LSB to MSB You can insert blanks gaps between the individual digits to facilitate readability of binary numbers However depending on the operating terminal this reduces the maximum number of places that can be displayed The Field length field will tell you how many places are currently set once you have exited one of the two input fields using the tab key for example 3 19 S TRON Tutorial For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired If you want to start a script after entering the variable value select the name of a script from the Post editing script field The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly You use binary numbers to display individual bits bytes words and Lwords Select the number of bits and blank sp
77. files To copy data sets use the gt gt and lt lt copy buttons The following menu items are available in a popup menu or via the keyboard Refresh structure Copy Paste Delete Select All Overwriteable Make over writable Non overwriteable Make not overwriteable Note Data in a recipe data set can only be edited using the programming software You can use a popup menu to delete the messages in the status window of the data set transfer tool The parameters for the serial interface of the PC are displayed to the bottom left of the dialog COM 2 19200 Baud 7 1 Odd Figure 2 3 Interface parameters for data set transfer tool These parameters are used to transfer a data set both to and from the operating de vice Meaning of the parameters COM 2 Number of the serial interface 19200 Baud Baud rate of transmission 7 Number of data bits 1 Number of stop bits Odd Not even parity 2 16 SUTRON Programming 2 4 8 Tools Menu TSDiag With TSDiag you get access to any operating device with Windows CE operating system that is available within the connected ethernet With TSDiag you have the possibility of looking at the content of the display of the operating device and interacting with the control unit so as if you would operate it di rectly In addition you can transfer files to the operating device such as updated project data or s
78. for the Operating Device For all operating devices the contrast brightness is set by the software For this purpose you need to set up one of the following the system variables in any screen LedContrast to set the contrast LcdBackLight to set the brightness 1 Open the Language branch of the project tree 2 Double click the name of any screen The screen editor opens the screen 3 In the toolbar click the Variable button 4 Drag the mouse to open a frame The Screen element variable dialog appears 5 Select the system variable LedContrast or LcdBackLight in the variable folder System variables basic functions 6 Select the Decimal number representation type 7 Click the Edit type button The Decimal number dialog appears 8 Select the Input radio button from the Field type area 9 If necessary modify the settings made in the Format area Use the following procedure to enter the contrast value numerically 10 Select the Standard radio button from the Editor area 11 Select the with Enter radio button from the Data acceptance area Use the following procedure to enter the contrast value incrementally 12 Select the Increment radio button from the Editor area 13 Select the Upon any modification for each change radio button from the Data acceptance area Use the following procedure to enter the contrast value in mixed mode 14 Select the Mixmode radio button from the Editor area 15 Select the
79. im ages static texts and selection texts If you use a selection text to label softkeys you can use the function key for several functions within a screen The action to be performed is determined by the Screen number Number of the selection text Variable value transferred with the softkey Depending on the operating device the number of keys you can use as softkeys var ies Example We want a softkey F1 in screen 10 to be able to switch a pump on and off 1 Create a text list pump with two entries Table 3 49 Text list for example softkey Value Text 0 Switch Pump OFF 1 Switch Pump ON 2 Define the variables Table 3 50 Variables for example softkey Symbolic Name Address Example Softkey Labeling M100 0 Softkey Status M100 1 Image of the screen MW110 3 Create the screen number 10 Set up a controller variable M 100 0 next to or above a function key Link the controller variable with the representation type Selection Text for cyclical output with the text list pump Link the function key F1 of the screen with the variable Softkey Status M 100 1 set reset 4 Create the controller program to perform the following Output A32 0 is to be used to control the pump Evaluate the screen number MW 110 must have the value 10 Evaluate the edge for M 100 1 Create a ELTACO function for pump output A32 0 Use it to set flag M 100 0 to
80. image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Delete password and reset access authorization 3 4 10 3 ChangePasswd Function Changes a password Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 11 characters 3 88 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 10 4 FlashPasswd Function Resets the passwords to the values specified in the programming software Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Inactive ues 1 Reset passwords ics Before you use this system variable make sure to save the password with the high est level access authorizations 3 4 10 5 Passwdinactive Function Deactivates password protection Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Password protection active inactive during initial initialization 1 Password protection active edit and view level 255 ics The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 10 6 ActViewLevel Function Displays the current view level Data type Numeric Representation Posit
81. is being displayed you can press the Enter key to go to the setup screen You can not go to the setup screen if the access level of the setup screen is set to 255 On the startup screen you can display the following information for example Service address Machine type Program version 3 2 2 3 Password Screen In a project in which specific screens or variables are to be protected from unautho rized access you must create a password screen In your password screen you must create the system variable SerchgPasswd Select the name of the password screen in the language properties to activate the password screen You can create your own password screen for each language used in the project 3 2 3 Input Output Screen The user interface of a project is primarily made up of input and output screens You can display the following contents in these screens Static text Text fields Variables System variables Background images Set of curves graph Buttons Recipe fields Table fields 3 4 S TRON Tutorial Message fields You can also assign the following functions to an input output screen Sub screens Help screens Background color Key functions softkey function 3 3 Working with Screen Objects You can use the following objects to configure a screen You can use a wide range of parameters to adjust these objects to suit your re
82. is reactivated af ter you exit this screen If you return to this screen you must enter your password again 2 38 SUTRON Programming 2 10 2 3 Screen Help Screen You can create a specific help screen for each screen and display it by selecting the Help key a corresponding button or clicking a free area of the display background If you wish to provide a help screen for the current screen select an existing help screen You can not use the Activate help screen parameter for operating devices equipped with a keyboard You activate a free area of the display background to call up the help screen 2 10 2 4 Screen Background Color For each screen you can select a separate color for the entire screen area All ele ments that may be contained in a screen cover over the background color You can only use this parameter for operating devices that use gray scales or color display 2 10 2 5 Screen Script Parameters At the same time a screen is displayed you can execute a script Enter the name of the script in the Display script field 2 10 2 6 Screen Function Keys You can redefine the functions of the keys function keys and special function keys for each screen Keys defined for one screen specifically are also referred to as soft keys The specific function of a key within a screen takes precedence over the global func tion assigned to the same key Possible definitions are as listed below Direct
83. jump to screen Indirect jump to screen Screen reference list required Write a value to a variable 0 to 255 when a key is pressed Write a value to a variable 0 to 255 when a key is released Direct jump to screen Setting up a function key to call up a screen directly allows the operator to access a specified screen quickly by simply pressing this function key The authorization to ac cess the screen is checked by the password management function if necessary a password screen is displayed first In this case a valid password must be entered before the screen is called up Indirect jump to screen The controller can effect an indirect jump to a screen The operator always presses the same function key At run time the controller writes a value to the variable for screen reference control The operating device reads this value and compares it to the values in the screen reference list The screen that is assigned the corresponding value in the screen reference list is then accessed Follow the steps below to jump to a screen indirectly Create a screen reference list Define a transfer variable Specify a screen reference list in the function key table 2 39 S TRON Programming 2 10 2 7 Linking with Screen First decide whether the operator should be able to press a key and jump to a screen directly or whether he she should switch to a screen whose number can be controlled by the PLC All
84. keyboard image consists of eight bytes that must be stored contiguously in the controller Table 3 80 Arrangement of the keyboard image in the controller Address Byte number 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 Table 3 81 BT21AM keyboard image Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 1 0 F2 2 0 F1 1 F3 1 F9 2 F4 2 F10 3 F5 3 F11 4 F6 4 F12 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 0 Help 4 0 Print 1 Cursor right 1 Cursor home 2 Cursor down 2 Cursor up 3 Cursor left 3 Page down 4 F7 4 F8 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned S SUTRON 3 185 Tutorial Table 3 81 BT21AM keyboard image Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 5 0 Enter 6 0 Minus 1 Delete 1 3 2 Decimal point 2 2 3 0 3 1 4 F16 4 F15 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 0 Plus 8 0 Data release 1 6 1 9 2 5 2 8 3 4 3 7 4 F14 4 F13 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 186 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 22 Once you have connected the operating device to the supply voltage the dev
85. like an ECG plotter Flash light all values The values for the curve are read as a snapshot from the controller and displayed in full copy of all data at a point in time The number of data points must be specified for the horizontal direction 3 43 S SUTRON Tutorial You can also select the display orientation The number of data records per channel determines the horizontal extension of the set of curves area 3 3 6 2 Address and Data Recording for Data Recorder The data to be recorded are kept in the controller in a variable and is polled by the operating device in accordance with a specific criterion Enter the name of a controller variable into the Variable field of the Address area Click the folder icon to selecta controller variable from the Variable dialog or to create a new controller variable in this dialog Click the properties icon to display the prop erties of this variable The variable address must be a byte address The values of the data logger must be in the range of 0 to 254 Select the number of curves in the graph at the Maximum number of channels field In the Number of data records per channel field specify how many data records are to be recorded in the x direction In the Direction area select the direction in which the record process is to be carried out In the Trigger area choose whether a value is to be recorded if an external event occurs External Event or at
86. message field and data release has not been requested the help screen appears for the length of time you press the Help key or after you have pressed a button that has been programmed accordingly In order for the button to simulate the key function of the Help key you must create the Help key using the key simulation function and link it with the system variable KeyHelp See chapter KeyHelp on page 3 84 3 157 S TRON Tutorial 3 14 Working with Function Keys Softkey Func tions Another important feature in addition to the screens are the function keys and their LEDs Function keys are user programmable They can be used as direct selector keys to switch to another screen or as control keys for the machine When used as control keys the integrated LEDs provide feedback information Programming the function keys as direct selector keys allows fast direct access to the screens as well as to entire menu structures In the programming system the combination of direct selection and control function can be programmed for function keys and for softkeys Only the press codes of the keys should be evaluated in this mode of operation This is because depending on the length of time the key is pressed and the nature of the assigned screen the stop code may have already changed 3 14 1 Direct Selector Keys Direct selector keys are function keys programmed to directly call up a specific screen Pressing this funct
87. of 256 bytes for this area By entering the polling time you also specify the interval at which the operating de vice reads the data area of the status messages from the controller For the polling time you can enter values from 0 to 25 5 seconds The active messages are displayed in an I O screen with a message field for parallel messages The status messages can be sorted according to various criterion 3 8 1 Internal Messages Internal messages are all messages that are generated by the operating system A distinction is made between terminal messages and error messages The user pro grammer can not influence the generation of these messages 3 8 2 System Icon The system icon is used to display and retrieve terminal internal information e g ter minal messages It can be configured for touch sensitive terminals The system icon replaces the function of the help status LED and is used to display pending terminal messages The pending terminal message is acknowledged by pressing the system icon To configure a system icon 1 Open the relevant screen 2 Press the right mouse button and select the option Generate system icon 3 A wizard is displayed assisting you in specifying the colors and the frame for the icon 4 When finished press Finish Two buttons will then be displayed top left of the screen one button with the system icon function and 3 124 S TRON Tutorial and one button wit
88. of Delete key Key0 Function of key 0 Key1 Function of key 1 Key2 Function of key 2 Key3 Function of key 3 Key4 Function of key 4 Key5 Function of key 5 Key6 Function of key 6 Key7 Function of key 7 Key8 Function of key 8 Key9 Function of key 9 KeyPlus Function of the Plus key KeyMinus Function of the Minus key KeyEnter Function of the Enter key KeyEdit Function of the Data Release Edit key HR RAR ARR AR MAR 3 80 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 9 1 NewScreen Function Changes to the screen with the indicated number Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 1 to Screen number ues 9999 3 4 9 2 VarTablenRO Function Creates a continuous numbering in tables beginning with 0 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Oton ues 3 4 9 3 VarTablenR1 Function Creates a continuous numbering in tables beginning with 1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 1 ton ues 3 4 9 4 TabLeft Function Is used to move to the lef
89. of numbers to messages the appropriate check box must be selected in the Message Editor options dialog Existing messages can automat ically be numbered consecutively later A scale is displayed above the column for the message contents The scale is dis played with Pixel or Grid as the unit depending on the setting in the message editor options dialog 2 43 S TRON Programming Any text can be entered in the column for the message contents Up to two output variables and up to 255 line breaks can also be included in the message Line breaks are displayed within the row as a gray rectangular Every line break counts as a mes sage character thereby reducing the total number of displayable characters for the message Within the input field of the message editor marks indicate the width of the display of the selected operating device The marks can be activated or deactivated in the message editor options dialog The messages can be displayed on the operating device with the font defined for the message field This font can be selected freely depending on the operating device type The font used to display the message numbers in the message editor can be changed individually in the Tools menu Options menu item Message editor tab Any of the Windows fonts can be selected You can either display all of the messages in the message field of a screen or display them individually using the system variables Any messages
90. of the screens already created are available in a list for direct selection Follow the steps below to select a screen for direct screen change Select a field from the Screen column Select Edit from the context menu Select the Reference to screen direct selection button Select the required screen from the list Confirm with OK The name is then entered in the table field GE QD To select screens indirectly you must first create screen reference lists Screen ref erence lists already created are provided in a list Follow the steps below to select a screen reference list for an indirect screen change Select a field from the Screen column Select Edit from the context menu Select the Reference to screen list indirect selection button Select the name of the required screen reference list in the list Confirm with OK The name is then entered in the table field OR DE 2 10 2 8 Linking with Variable Follow the steps below to select a variable name 1 Inthe Press variable or Release variable column select a field 2 Select Edit from the context menu 3 In the dialog box that opens select the name of the required variable 4 Confirm with OK The name is then entered in the table field To transfer a variable value to the con troller only for the time the key remains pressed select the same variable name for the release variable and enter a value of 0 zero for this action 2 40 SUTRON P
91. of the user interface Messages are reactions to events that are communicated to the operator in an intelligible form A distinction is made between internally and externally generated messages depending on where the event occurred The diagram below shows the structure of the message system Message system Internal messages External messages Serial message system Terminal messages Parallel message system Error messages Figure 2 4 Structure of the messages system The areas shown in gray color can be freely designed during programming 2 10 6 1 Messages The message editor assigns texts to message numbers that may be transmitted from the PLC to the operating device Messages are distinguished by their priority The priority is determined by a combi nation of message number and message group where the following applies The lower the message number and group number the higher the message priority Messages can be created on the basis of the following specifications A maximum of 3000 messages A maximum of 8 message groups A maximum of 255 characters per message A maximum of 2 variables per message A maximum of 255 line breaks per message The message editor is in tabular form The table consists of two columns allowing you to enter the message numbers and message contents For automatic assignment
92. open the corresponding screen the recipe field will contain the recipe that was specified when programming was carried out If you do not permanently assign a recipe to a screen with a recipe field during the program ming phase the last recipe that was processed appears when the screen is opened By means of the system variable SelectRezeptNr You can edit the system vari able using any Editor It is a good idea however to use a selection text coded text and assign meaningful recipe names to each recipe number See chapter SelectRezeptNr on page 3 92 3 7 2 2 Selecting a Data Set Data sets can be assigned both a number from 1 to 250 and a name You assign the data set numbers and names when the data sets are created in other words either when programming is carried out for the data sets stored in the Flash memory or on the operating device in the case of data sets stored in the RAM The maximum data set name length is 15 characters Data set names need not neces sarily be unique though it is recommended that they are You can select a data set as follows Select a new recipe The associated data set with the lowest number is then se lected for the new recipe automatically By means of the system variable SelectDSNr You can edit this system variable only as aselection text In this case only the numbers of those data sets that are available for the active recipe are displayed 3 115 SUTRON Tut
93. operating device The S3 file is for an operating device equipped with a different memory size Select a different S3 file or generate a new S3 file for the correspond ing operating device The Compact Flash card was detected 3 107 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 19 4 CFCardError Function Displays errors that occurred while using the Compact Flash card Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues No error _ No Compact Flash card in device The requested file does not exist on the Compact Flash card The Compact Flash card is full or write protected The file already exists on the Compact Flash card File has the wrong file extension S3 file is for the wrong device type S3 file is for the wrong memory type COIN oO BR OJN The Compact Flash card was detected 3 4 20 Set of Curves Graphs DataLogTrig DataLogClear 3 4 20 1 DataLogTrig Function Release a trigger event for a data logger Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Initial state Trigger for data logger 1 Trigger for data logger 2 Trigger for data
94. oriented polling area is located on a word address The controller must be able to access this area in bit mode Table 3 52 Word oriented polling area ysejg USE USE Sel USE sels mo 2014 8431 91d31 vzaa1 zeag 0rq31 svag HO UO HO UO HO UO HOMO HOMO HOUO D 2014 8d31 91431 vzaa1 2 q31 0rq11 svag E yseiy useig yseig Sel ysel sels co o v amp a37 stagi cd31 teaa1 6 q31 rq31 a HO JUO HOMO HO UO HOMO HOMO YOO m o eal4 Z a37 stagi ezaa1 eag 6 q31 vaal USeI4 useig USE Sel Sel uses co 9014 S 9031 tagi zzaa1 ocag seaaq 9rq21 lt HO UO HO UO HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO m in seu 9031 tagi zzag ocag 8eq31 9rq21 z D USel4 USE yseg ysejg ysel useli m o aal4 sag 1d31 tzaa1 ezag q31 svag HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOUO con 9914 0 sag 1d31 tzaa1 ezag q31 svag z USeI4 useig yseg Sel ysel uses m co aa ag zag ozaa1 82q31 9 q11 vraa HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOMO m o Ou vag zag ozaa1 82q31 geqaq vraa se g qse USE yseig Sel ysel ysel D 1d ea31 11d31 61q31 2q31 geq31 eragi D HO UO HO UO HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO m F WI ea31 tiaa1 6taa1 2q31 seaaq eragi oO a USel4 USE Se Sel ysel uses HT aa s
95. out puts In the Variable position in area you can choose to specify the position of variables in messages using either pixel dots or grid units The description of the variables in a message only appears when you select the With variable description check box Select the Include text list strings in variable description check box in the Text list area if you want to list the text strings of text lists linked to selection text variables For the text strings to be listed the value entered in the Max number of text list strings field must be greater than the actual number of text list strings You can thus selectively document all text lists in a message that contain fewer than a particular number of entries 2 4 10 Tools Menu Translation Support The translation support function allows the user to export all text elements of a lan guage so that they can be translated externally The text is exported to a Unicode file This file can easily be imported and edited in any editor that supports Unicode such as Editor or Wordpad When saving the file make sure that text file has been selected as the file type and that Unicode is specified as the code type After trans lation you can import the text elements again Translation support applies to texts in Screens subscreens help screens terminal messages edit screens Messages Recipes Text lists 2 19 S TRON Programming Follow the steps b
96. printing using all of the formatting options 3 4 8 4 PrintAllState Function Starts to print all parallel messages Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Starts the print process 3 79 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 8 5 BlockPrintLong Function Starts printing the selected messages using all of the formatting options Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Starts the print process 3 4 9 Menu Control Keys NewScreen Screen change VarTablenRO Table numbering beginning with 0 VarTablenR1 Table numbering beginning with 1 TabLeft Moves to next column on the left TabRight Moves to next column on the right TabPgUp Page down TabPgDn Page up Shift Shift mode 1 for alphanumeric editor ShiftCase Shift mode 2 for alphanumeric editor ShiftTouch Display shift mode for touch screen panels KeyCursLeft Function of Cursor Left key KeyCursRight Function of Cursor Right key KeyCursUp Function of Cursor Up key KeyCursDown Function of Cursor Down key KeyHome Function of Cursor Home key KeyHelp Function of Help key KeyDot Function of the Dot key KeyClear Function
97. re initialize the scanner by means of bar codes Table 3 68 Cable operating device 25 pin to scanner DLL 5012 M1 Operating Device 25 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 TD RD 3 3 RD TD 2 4 RTS CTS 7 5 CTS RTS 8 7 GND GND 5 Table 3 69 Cable operating de vice 9 pin to scanner DLL 5012 M1 Operating Device 9 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 RD TD 2 3 TD RD 3 5 GND GND 5 7 RTS CTS 7 8 CTS RTS 8 3 174 SUTRON Tutorial 3 16 5 Parameters for Scanner DLL 6010 M1 from Data Logic The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters Table 3 70 Parameters for sca nner DLL 6010 M1 Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Software Handshake Default ASCII 0D Initializing ASCII CPOCE2EA0102EA120305 0D Data Prefix ASCII 02 03 05 Data Postfix ASCII These interface parameters must not be altered If you do so in error the connection to the operating device is interrupted You must then re initialize the scanner by means of bar codes Table 3 71 Cable operating device 25 pin to scanner DLL 6010 M1 Operating Device 25 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 TD RD 3 3 RD TD 2
98. regardless of whether or not the entries are already contained in the variable list 2 21 S TRON Programming 2 4 11 2 Import Variables from Symbol File Step 1 The Symbols area allows you to import either all symbols without restrictions or only symbols that contain the specified string In this case the SXS file is searched for symbols with names that contain the specified character string The Default Access Mode area allows you to specify Byte or Word as the default ac cess method The default access method is applied to all symbols whose access method can not be clearly identified The Create Variable Name From area allows you to choose whether to create the variable names on the basis of the symbolic name of the symbol the symbol s com ment or both Click Next to continue this procedure 2 4 11 3 Import Variables from Symbol File Step 2 Select a symbol file Use the Select button to search the computer s directory for the symbol file that you want to open and import If the symbol file is in the same directory as the programming software simply enter the name of the symbol file in the input field Click Next to continue this procedure To return to the previous step click Back 2 4 11 4 Import Variables from Symbol File Step 3 Step 3 lists all symbols that can be imported A symbol is displayed to the left of each entry in the list box The symbols indicate the status of the entry Use t
99. regular time intervals Timer Event Determine the time intervals by specifying a value in the range of full seconds minutes or hours 3 3 6 3 Axis Scale Wizard You can use the axis scale wizard to define how the sets of curves are to be dis played To start the wizard click the Start button To do so specify the following parameters Position of the set of curves element within the screen Extension of the set of curves element in the X direction Extension of the set of curves element in the Y direction Size of the area for the set of curves Origin for the set of curves area Color of the curves Color of the background Maximum value Tick marks grid of X axis Position of the Y axis Number of measured values X axis scale grid Position of the X axis 3 3 6 4 Axis Scale Wizard Colors of Graphs and Background Select a color for each graph curve the position index of the plotter the background of the curve and the frame The position index of the plotter is displayed as a vertical line and shows the current position of the plotter along the X axis The frame is displayed provided that the graph area area for the set of curves is smaller than the entire graph set of curves element 3 44 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 6 5 Axis Scale Wizard Geometry and Grid To display a Grid grid composed of dots you must select the relevant check box and choose a c
100. repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 7 8 RepoutRepText41P Function Displays the most recent parallel message beginning from the 41st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 77 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 7 9 RepoutRepText61P Function Displays the most recent parallel message beginning from the 61st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 7 10 RepoutSelectGroupP Function Sets the group numbers whose messages are displayed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 0 to 256 iS A Each group is represented by one bit of a byte A logical 1 in bit O activates group1 in bit 1 activates group2 and so on The settings for a message field override the settings for this system variable To pre vent the settings in the operating device from being overridden you must activate the Global Settings function for the message field 3 4 7 11 RepoutGroupP Function Allows you to output a gr
101. row of the column Value contains the word Default Default indicates that the image in this row is displayed as long as no valid value is read from the controller Otherwise enter the numerical value in the column Value that the controller must transmit to the terminal for the corresponding image to be displayed 2 14 2 1 Inserting a New Image The following example is used to illustrate how to insert an object an image in this case All types of objects can be inserted including documents tables or charts etc 1 Enter a name for the image into the Image Name column 2 Click Enter to complete your entry 3 Click the program want to use to create an object image example CorelDraw 1 4 Click OK to confirm your selection 5 Create the object using the selected program 6 Return to the programming software using the menu item which exits the pro gram On the right side of the window the image is now displayed in screen size You can use the sizing handles to resize the image The new numeric values for height and width are automatically entered in the table on the left You can also enter values and view the result on the right side The image is completed and you can now insert another image into the table 1 CorelDraw is a registered trademark of the Corel Corporation 2 80 SUTRON Programming 2 15 Project Management The project management function allows you to assemble the elements fro
102. screen according to their time of arrival or according to their priority The desired sorting option can be selected when the system is programmed If both possible message systems are used it is possible to select the sorting set tings separately The settings are stored in the system variables RepmanRepSort Crit and RepmanSortCritP You can use these system variable to change the set tings during operation on the operating device using a configuration screen for example If you do not give the operator a configuration option the preselected sorting settings will apply Sorting options for the serial message system 0 by priority 1 by time of arrival most recent first 2 by time of arrival oldest first 3 by group Sorting options for the parallel message system 0 by priority 1 by time of arrival most recent first 2 by time of arrival oldest first 3 by group 3 8 5 6 Message Priority for Direct Display The priority of a message is determined by its message number The higher the message number the lower the message priority The value that represents the upper limit for the message number that is to be indi cated on arrival by a flashing LED or by outputting a terminal message can be en tered into the system parameters of the message system If you enter the value 0 you will not be notified of newly arrived messages 3 8 5 7 Printing the Message Memory This function is available for all operat
103. the folder to expand it and see the directories beneath 2 Double click the variable entry A red flag now marks the variable Use the following procedure to create a new controller variable 1 Click the Controller variables folder 2 Select New PLC variable from the context menu 3 Enter the variable name and address of the variable into the dialog that appears 4 Click OK to confirm your entries Note You can not exit this page if you select a system variable that is in conflict with the settings specified in the Button tab You can not exit this page if you select a system variable that is in conflict with the settings specified in the Button tab 3 39 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 5 3 8 Image Symbol for Button Select an image or symbol to be displayed on the button in the Image Symbol area The preview window on the right hand side will help you to make this selection To use the preview select the Display preview check box To resize the button within the screen without changing the image Drag a sizing handle with the mouse to change the dimensions of the button as de sired To resize the button in the screen and to resize the image at the same time Hold the Control key down and drag a sizing handle with the mouse 3 3 5 4 Representation of Buttons Attributes for displaying a button are Foreground and background color for the pressed and released states Position and dimension of the button
104. the operating device to this variable Global control is thus disabled for the current screen reference list 2 67 S TRON Programming 2 10 10 4 Edit Screens If input variables are configured for an operating device with a touch screen these variables are edited in the relevant edit screen The editor is activated by clicking the input variable Five different types of edit screens are available Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Increment Alphanumeric See chapter Working with Edit Screens on page 3 111 2 10 10 4 1 Edit Screens Background Color From the list select a color combination for the edit screen background See chapter Terminal Type Color Palette on page 2 29 2 10 10 4 2 Edit Screens Cancelling If you enable the Close if free area of edit screen is pressed Close at print in free edit screen area parameter you can close the Editor by pressing a free area of the edit screen display and the current screen reappears the data is not saved in this case 2 11 User Management In the user management function create an access profile for every operating device user This profile consists of passwords and the related authorization levels See chapter Working with Password Protection on page 3 145 2 11 1 User Management Passwords In the password management function of the programming software you can define any number of passwords each with a length of 1
105. the text strings of text lists linked to selection text variables For the text strings to be listed the value entered in the Max number of text list strings field must be greater than the actual number of text list strings This option allows you to selectively document text lists that have a limited number of text string entries In the Data sets area define whether you want to document the data set values for the recipe 2 4 9 5 Documeniation Parameters Help Screens In the Variables area choose whether you want to specify the position of variables in help screens in pixels dots or grid units The variables in a help screen are displayed in a numerical sequence when you ac tivate the corresponding check box The description of the variables in a help screen only appears when you select the With variable description check box Select the Include text list strings in variable description check box in the Text list area if you want to list the text strings of text lists linked to selection text variables For the text strings to be listed the value entered in the Max number of text list strings field must be greater than the actual number of text list strings You can thus selectively document all text lists in a help screen that contain fewer than a particular number of entries 2 18 SUTRON Programming 2 4 9 6 Documentation Parameters Terminal Messages In the Variables area you can choose to specify the p
106. the variable Enter the value of the variable when the button is re leased and type in the name of the variable The values for the variables must comply with the following table T able 3 17 Variable values for the Pushbutton function Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 Pressed 1 Released 0 You can also specify an access level for the button 3 36 SUTRON Tutorial Enter a value from 1 to 255 for the access level and activate password protection for the button This ensures that the function associated with the button is only executed once you have entered the correct password Table 3 18 Access level Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 0 password protection inactive If you program a button with a screen change and a simultaneous variable change this can trigger critical machine statuses that can no longer be stopped from the fol lowing screen Never use this combination in connection with manual machine operations e g teach in 3 3 5 3 2 Switch The Switch function is comparable to that of a current surge relay ELTACO When the button is pressed the other status is always restored Specify the following Name of the status variable whose value is to be influenced Value of the variable when you press the button and Value of the variable when you release the button Access level for the button Ta
107. with or Enter radio button from the Data acceptance area 16 Enter the permitted minimum input value into the Lower limit field 17 Enter the permitted maximum input value into the Upper limit field 18 Click OK to confirm your entries You are returned to the Screen element Variable dialog 19 Click OK to confirm your entries You are returned to the screen editor Please refer to the user manual of the respective operating device for the upper and lower limit values For information please refer to the chapter Contrast Setting or Brightness Setting respectively When selecting the input mode take the capabilities offered by the respective oper ating device into consideration If the operating device is not equipped with a numeric keypad only the Incremental mode may be available for use On touch screen de vices a keypad is automatically displayed to allow you to enter the values either nu merically or incrementally 3 177 S TRON Tutorial 3 18 Renaming Objects Enter any unique name for the object Confirm with OK 3 19 Image of the User Mode Switch The image of the user mode switch is transmitted in standard mode to the controller after initializing of the operating device You can evaluate the free assigned DIP switches from the controller Due to this you can call individual programs or process a service routine making queries 3 20 Image of the Screen Number You can have the number of th
108. zaa1 01d31 81q31 92431 eq31 2rq21 ape 7 HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOMO YOO me sa zaa1 01d31 81q31 9211 eq31 zvag aS 9 USE USE yseg Sel ysel use m o 1931 6dq31 zagi sza3 esagi ragi a 2 HO UO HOMO HOMO HOMO HOMO 40 00 me oH 1a31 6qa1 ztaa1 szag eeag raal 0 L z E pt G 9 Z ssoippy ssouppy ssouppy ssouppy ssouppy ssouppy ssouppy ssouppy PIONM PIOAA PIONM PION PIONM PIONM PIOAA PIOAA See chapter Write Coordination Byte on page 3 168 See chapter Serial Message Channel on page 3 164 3 163 SUTRON S Tutorial 3 15 3 Serial Message Channel The serial message channel is a part of the cyclical polling area and is used to trans fer 16 bit information The numbers of serial messages selection of message screens external selection of screens and transfer of control codes are made possi ble via this data channel The following handshake is used for the information transfer The PLC stores a value gt 0 in this data word This value is then transferred to the operating device which will write the value 0 into this data word again This indicates to the PLC that it can now transfer the next value The value is interpreted by the op erating terminal and its function is executed Values can be Message numbers Screen numbers screen number 8000H Control Codes 3 15 4 Imag
109. 00 to U 1EFF 4608 to 7935 2 74 S SUTRON Programming Table 2 12 Unicode subranges Name for Unicode sub range in software pro gram Unicode chart name Unicode character code range taken into account by the programming soft ware Griechisch erweitert Greek Extended Greek Extended U 1F00 to U 1FFF 7936 to 8191 Interpunktion und Sym bole Punctuation and Symbols General Punctuation Superscripts and Subscripts Currency Symbols Combining Diacritical Marks for Symbols U 2000 to U 20FF 8192 to 8447 Symbole 2 Symbols 2 Letterlike Symbols Number Forms Arrows U 2100 to U 24FF 8448 to 9471 Symbole 3 Symbols 3 Box Drawing Block Elements Geo metric Shapes U 2500 to U 25FF 9472 to 9727 Symbole 4 Symbols 4 Miscellaneous Symbols U 2600 to U 26FF 9728 to 9983 Mathematik 1 Mathemat ical 1 Dingbats Miscellaneous Mathe matical Symbols A Supplemental Arrows A U 2700 to U 27FF 9984 to 10239 Braille Muster Braille Pat terns Braille Patterns U 2800 to U 28FF 10240 to 10495 Symbole 5 Symbols 5 Supplemental Arrows B Miscella neous Mathematical Symbols B U 2900 to U 29FF 10496 to 10751 Mathematik 2 Mathemat Supplemental Mathematical Opera U 2A00 to U 2AFF 10752 to 11007 ical 2 tors Symbole 6 Symbols 6 Miscellaneous Symbols and Arrows U 2B00 to U 2BFF 11008 to
110. 02 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 17 Help StateHelp Status of status LED for help SysMessage System message number SysQuitMessage Acknowledge system messages StatusText Output message text StatusText21 Message text starting from 21st digit StatusText41 Message text starting from 41st digit StatusText61 Message text starting from 61st digit ActVarLimit Current limit value 3 4 17 1 StateHelp Function Displays the status of the help status LED Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Status LED OFF a 1 Status LED ON 2 Status LED FLASHING 3 4 17 2 SysMessage Function Displays the current terminal message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Initial state oc 1 to 29 Number of the terminal message Ike To prevent a terminal message from being issued you must delete the message text for the terminal message This means however that the terminal message will not appear in any display forms 3 103 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 17 3 SysQuitMessage Function Acknowledge the terminal message which is currently displayed Data type Numeric Represen
111. 09 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 22 2 InstructionPointer Function Displays the last value of the instruction pointer of a virtual machine This shows you exactly where the script was terminated or interrupted Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Script ended successfully 3 4 22 3 SkriptAktiv Function Turnes the script processing on or off Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Script processing is OFF Function Script processing is ON 3 5 Working with Libraries Libraries correspond to data bases where you can put in screen objects which fit to a certain operating device You put the objects into the library or from the library into the screen using drag and drop The context menu of libraries offers the following menu items New library Open library Save library Close library New library Generates a new library Open library Opens an already existing library Save library Saves the topical library Close library Closes the topical library See chapter Create Project Folder Template or Library Templates on page 2 3 See chapter Create Project Folder Template or Library Plac
112. 09 Serial message system 3 70 Set of curves graph area ee 3 108 A 4 S TRON Index arlabl s Word wcities scectsssicceonsiseevlertianciesteats T Variabl d 3 6 Table field 3 47 W IR WU E i WINS Seti anne 2 85 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner s es 2 32 i Working on older projects a se 3 197 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner interface l Working with parametrs ciiir a tiita 2 33 Control codes 3 149 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner scanner parameters wisiccciseccceccccnecscacedasosacsvanessnsdsacasateeds 2 33 Cycle poling AE FIGI Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner Unicode 2 34 Edit SCTEENS oo essesseeseesereeeeseeetnneeetnetnee 3 111 Function keys 3 158 Terminal area function keys 2 48 es TG e EA E E A E A 3 156 Terminal area identifier 2 48 LIDFAFISS 2 52 frs cranes 3 110 Terminal area memory amp message 2 47 Messages 3 123 Terminal area terminal messages 2 48 Terminal messages 2 60 password protection 3 145 Be he egy ee ee eee Program call parameters 3 1 Terminal messages memory 2 63 l Terminal messages parameters 000 2 63 Beet Ame dock m ihe operating ueich a Toa Terminal messages touch screen terminals 2 63 Recipes een 3 113 Terminal type 2 28 Running time meters 3 1
113. 1 N Protocol loop through operation 2 34 New application necessary 2 66 R New Message iii 2 64 Read coordination byte 3 165 No data set address 2 66 Real time clock Non Editable 3 53 Settings sets tement 3 156 Normal operating mode 3 188 Recipe Number invalid eee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 65 Structure ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeaes 3 115 O Working with 3 115 Recipe field 3 47 Optain IP address automatically 0 2 84 Recipe field parameters 3 47 Options Cee Cee eee ere er re rer errr rrr rer error e errr ee rrr err rrr 2 6 Recipe UNKNOWN cccccecececccceccceccccececcusececeuenees 2 66 Options global settings 2 9 RS CS veusctabeeeratanes 2 51 Options graphic editors n nesen 2 7 Recipes controller target address 2 55 Options list Xe 0 gt 2 8 Recipes data set sorting EAP ee Re ee RE 2 54 Options message editor 2 10 Recipes data set transfer from the terminal 2 52 A 3 S TRON Index Recipes data set transfer to the terminal 2 53 Recipes font 2 55 Recipes number 2 55 Recipes transfer active 2 52 Rename sine datent 3 178 Replace batte
114. 1 characters When you are allo cating the different passwords think of how you want to structure access authoriza tions Example Password for the manufacturer of the plant machine and so on Password for on site service Password for the person setting up the machine foreman overseer Password for the operator of the system 2 68 SUTRON Programming The passwords are stored in the operating device s Flash memory These passwords are the basic setting that is active when you first start up the system after each down load The passwords are also stored in the operating device s RAM You can reactivate the passwords stored in the Flash memory by writing to the sys tem variable FlashPasswd You can change all passwords from the operating device except for the master password first password in the list To do this write the password to be changed to the system variable MskchgPasswd You must then write the new password twice to the system variable ChangePasswd The new password is valid immediately provided you enter the same new password twice If this is not the case a corresponding terminal message is issued and the password is reset Passwords are stored and compared as 11 character strings Use the alphanumeric editor to enter the passwords in the operating device Program passwords globally and not on a language specific basis See chapter FlashPasswd on page 3 89 See ch
115. 10 7 1 Recipes Transfer Active Variable Specify the starting address of controller variable for the Write Coordination byte It contains the Data Set Download Release bit The controller releases data set trans fer with this bit Enter the size of the controller variable The size can vary depending on the operat ing device as this controller variable is often identical to that for the entire polling area Polling time Enter the value for the polling time in seconds The polling time is based on the total system load Note the cycle times for other vari ables See chapter Working with Recipes on page 3 113 See chapter Write Coordination Byte on page 3 168 See chapter Data Set Download Release on page 3 170 See chapter Size of the Polling Area on page 3 165 See chapter Polling Time on page 3 164 2 10 7 2 Recipes Data Set Transfer from the Terminal You can load the data sets from the terminal to the controller You can also load any changed data sets from the controller to the terminal In this context the data set transfer is always initiated by the terinal but only when the controller has activated the corresponding release DDR bit in the WCB 2 52 SUTRON Programming Before a transfer is performed the communication partner must be advised of the recipe number and data set number In the Transfer from Terminal area enter the name of the variable for the recipe and d
116. 11263 CJK Radicals CJK Radicals Supplement U 2C00 to 2EFF 11264 to 12031 KangXi Radicals KangXi Radicals Ideographic De scription Characters U 2F00 to 2FFF 12032 to 12287 CJK Symbole CJK Sym CJK Symbols and Punctuation U 3000 to 303F 12288 to 12351 bols Hiragana Hiragana U 3040 to 309F 12352 to 12447 Katakana Katakana U 30A0 to 30FF 12448 to 12543 Bopomofo Hangul Compatibility Jamo Kanbun Bopomofo Ex tended Katakana Phonetic Exten sions U 3100 to 31FF 12544 to 12799 CJK Zus tze CJK Extras Enclosed CJK Letters and Months CJK Compatibility CJK Unified Ideographs Extension A Yijing Hexagram Symbols U 3200 to 4DFF 12800 to 19967 CJK Ideogramme CJK Unified Ideographs U 4E00 to 9FFF 19968 to 40959 Yi Syllables Yi Radicals U A000 to ABFF 40960 to 44031 Koreanisch Hangul Hangul Syllables U AC00 to D7FF 44032 to 55xxx Spezial Special U D800 to U F8FF S TRON 2 75 Programming Table 2 12 Unicode subranges Name for Unicode sub Unicode chart name Unicode character code range taken range in software pro into account by the programming soft gram ware CJK Kompatibilit ts Ideo CJK Compatibility Ideographs U F900 to FAFF 63744 to 64255 gramme Sonderformen 1 Special Alphabetic Presentation Forms Ar U FBO00 to FDFF 64256 to 65023 forms 1 abic Presentation Forms A Sonderfor
117. 4 RTS CTS 7 5 CTS RTS 8 7 GND GND 5 Table 3 72 Cable operating de vice 9 pin to scanner DLL 6010 M1 Operating Device 9 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 RD TD 2 3 TD RD 3 5 GND GND 5 7 RTS CTS 7 8 CTS RTS 8 S TRON 3 175 Tutorial 3 16 6 Parameters for Scanner BB Snapshot ST from Percon The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters Table 3 73 Parameters for scanner BB Snapshot ST Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Parity Even Handshake No Handshake Default None Initializing None Data Prefix ASCII 02 Data Postfix ASCII 0D 0A These interface parameters must not be altered If you do so in error the connection to the operating device is interrupted You must then re initialize the scanner by means of bar codes Therefore scan the following bar codes one after the other Figure 3 36 START Figure 3 37 Access to port J1 preamble buffer Figure 3 38 STX Figure 3 39 END 3 176 SUTRON Tutorial 3 17 How do Configure the Contrast Brightness Setting
118. 47 Beer Shey ce ee Pee ee eee Screen objects eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 5 Terminal type change 2 28 SCT ENS rares aiceedue i 3 3 Terminal type color palette 2 29 SOPKCYS oe ceeeeeeeseeeceteeeeeaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeaes 3 158 Terminal type fonts 0 ee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaes 2 29 System variables 3 55 Terminal type memory size 2 28 Working with scanners 3 170 Terminal type terminal orientation 2 30 a Write coordination byte eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 168 Terminal type touch parameters 2 29 Txt ASIA nn ont anale 3 5 PE PI PNR ten oe Text lists un a nan 2 58 dai Leii e Text lists editng font 2 59 Z Text lists parameters 2 58 ZOOMING messages 14 Text lists selection 2 59 ai EEE ay Tools menu MOM A mme and 2 21 Translation support EDON Lane nn At lies 2 20 IMPOSER nu 2 21 Tools menu documentation 2 17 Tools menu translation support 2 19 FSDiagh 8 mminnr maths 2 17 TUIOHARSS RS a nan 3 1 U Underline ssssss s ins 3 52 Upper limit 3 51 Use fixed IP address 2 84 User management 2 68 User management parameters s s s 2 69 User management passwords s 2 68 V Value too large 2 63 3 51 Value too small 2 63 3 51 Variable St icsiccescssccciencssasicsegsnsetsacasaanichaeseesis 2 70 Variable Selection
119. 500 messages CPU in Operating Device Z80 32 Bit RISC Available Memory Space in Bytes About About 116000 for FW version 1 07 or lower 116000 About 147000 for FW version 1 08 or higher Memory Requirement per Message 24 x 500 32 x 500 16000 in Bytes 12000 Remaining Memory Capacity in 104000 About 100000 for FW version 1 07 or lower Bytes About 12 4000 for FW version 1 08 or higher Possible Number of Data Sets 104000 100000 22 44 1515 for FW version 1 07 or 22 33 lower 1890 1294000 22 44 1960 for FW version 1 08 or higher You can use the following formula to determine the exact message buffer size G gt M1 M3 20 G Size of message buffer B Size of parallel message system in bytes M1 Number of messages which require only 1 memory location are entered in the message editor and have message numbers smaller than B x 8 M3 Number of messages which require 3 memory locations are entered in the message editor and have message numbers smaller than B x 8 20 Minimum size of message buffer S 3 143 SUTRON Tutorial 3 8 8 2 Polling Time The polling time determines the intervals at which the variables for status messages are read again 3 8 8 3 Variables for Status Messages You must specify the memory address for the parallel message system as a symbolic variable in the system parameters for messages All variable types that the controller can a
120. 54 Controller address 3 7 Controller area activate messages 2 47 Controller area options 2 47 Creating a button 3 34 D Data set active 2 eceeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 2 65 Data set download 2 66 Data Set file error 2 65 Data set format 2 65 Data set memory full 2 65 Data set protected 2 65 Data set transfer 2 65 Data set unknown 2 65 Default gateway 2 84 Default help screen 2 42 Demomode 2 30 Direct call of the message screen 3 139 DNS server 2 84 Documentation parameters Global Settings 2 17 Help screens 2 18 Messages 2 19 Projeti S rive antenne 2 17 RECIPES areenan dernie latente 2 18 OCI BNS ronea rn A 2 18 Terminal messages 2 19 Documentation value 3 26 Download assistera miesnne ieunes 3 198 Cable 25 pitss cciatetcicatiedevtien nite 3 199 Dynamic attributes 3 51 E Edit screens ninoi 2 68 Edit screens background color 2 68 Edit screens Cancelling 2 68 Editing mode active 2 65 Encoding of alphanumerical strings 2 35 Erasing the message memory externally 3 142 Error message ADDRESS ERROR 3 128 AUTO
121. 60 kB Click OK to go back to main SNR 1023456789 Image_Grafikpanel_EP9307_ CE5 00_V1 00 Built Built Jan 17 2007 14 00 00 Flash Size 16 MB SRAM Size 512 kB PLC VISU RAM 0 460 kB Click OK to go back to main Figure 3 46 Settings Settings Contrast The operating mode setup main is displayed with default values for contrast and brightness to ensure reading also at faulty values If you change a value you have to confirm this in a dialog Selection of color depth for TFT displays Settings Date Time Set the date time and time zone Settings Password The password can be activated deactivated or redefined When the password is ac tivated all password protected dialog boxes can only be accessed if the password has been entered successfully This entry is password protected 3 194 nN 2 SUTRON Tutorial Settings Information The following information is output serial number image version image date built version flash size SRAM size and PLC Visu RAM size Start Batch The project bat file in the FlashDrv directory starts if available 3 22 2 1 3 Administration Operating Mode If you press the Cursor Down key during the strart up phase the Administration mode of operation starts You can use the Admin ini file to manage the device This file must exist in the root directory of the USB stick This file is used as a dongle to prevent users from changing the device d
122. 9999 The operating device uses the following formula to scale the output Controller Value x Factor Output Value of the Unit Summand Divisor Figure 3 7 Scaling of the output variables in the operating device Use the following formula to determine the operands Current Lower Limit Upper Limit Lower Limit Controller Value Controller Values Controller Values Controller Values Current _ Lower Limit T Upper Limit Lower Limit Terminal Value Output Values Output Values Output Values Figure 3 8 Scaling of the output variables The following example will help you determine the operands Example Range of values for output values Lower limit for output value 0 Upper limit for output value 100 Current value in operating device x Range of values for controller values Lower limit for controller values 4096 Upper limit for controller values 4096 Current controller value y 3 28 SUTRON Tutorial 1 Inserting the variable values y 4096 4096 4096 x 0 100 0 y 4096 4096 4096 Figure 3 9 Inserting the variable values in the formula 2 Solving the equation 100 y 409600 8192x Figure 3 10 Solving the equation 3 Solving the equation for x 100 409600 X y 8192 8192 Factor E Summand x y 50 8192 Divisor Figure 3 11 Solving the equation for x 3 3 3 9 Communication Type 3 3 3 9 1 PLC Handshake Select the attribute PLC Handshake t
123. Background Normal inverse display LedBackLight Dim background lighting TurnOnTemp Switch LCD display on if a specific temperature is reached OsLanguage Language switching IdentName Project ID name IdentVersion Project ID version number IdentDate Project ID date IdentTime Project ID time IdentCount Project ID counter IdentRandom Project ID random number ComErrorRetry Number of communication errors SerialNumber Serial number IPAddress IP address of the operating device BaseScreenDelay Delay for base screen BaseScreenActivate Activate base screen function 3 55 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 1 1 IntEraseEprom Function Deletes the project from the Flash memory and places the operating device into the download mode Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive pi 1 Deletes the project 3 4 1 2 MainVersion Function Displays the current firmware version Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric field length 8 Configurable val ues Format determined by the manufacturer IS The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 1 3 ComVersion Function Displays the ty
124. Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Hardware Handshake Default ASCII 0D Initializing ASCII EC1CF2EA0102EA110305EA1200 0D Data Prefix ASCII 02 Data Postfix ASCII 03 05 Table 3 65 Cable operating de vice 25 pin to scanner DL 910 Operating Device 25 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 TD RD 3 3 RD TD 2 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DTR 20 7 GND GND 7 RTS 4 Table 3 66 Cable operating device 9 pin to scanner DL 910 Operating Device 9 Pin Scanner 9 Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin 2 RD TD 2 3 TD RD 3 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS DTR 20 RTS 4 S SUTRON 3 173 Tutorial 3 16 4 The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters Table 3 67 Parameters for sca nner DLL 5012 M1 Parameters for Scanner DLL 5012 M1 from Data Logic Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Software Handshake Default ASCII 0D Initializing ASCII CPOCE2EA0102EA120305 0D Data Prefix ASCII 02 Data Postfix ASCII 03 05 These interface parameters must not be altered If you do so in error the connection to the operating device is interrupted You must then
125. CP this setting must be saved using Save Registry This entry is password protected Netword Settings FTP Settings Add new user You may enter a new user name You have to assign a password to the user name and to confirm it If at least one user name is added you cannot login to the FTP server as anonymous anymore Network Settings FTP Settings List all users All users are listet within a DOS box Network Settings FTP Settings Delete a user You may enter the user name you like to delete This entry is password protected Network Settings Device Name You can define a device name with up to 14 characters Via a FTP connection you can access the device with the device name instead of the IP address This entry is password protected 3 193 S TRON Tutorial Settings Settings Cr Date Time Date Time Cr Ce Contrast Contrast Brightness Contrast Brightness A A A A 15 A Cs H s E Ls 4 8pp O 16 bpp Date Time Current Time CK X 15 00 00 AM 7 Time Zone GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome ly OK l Cancel l Refresh EZ Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving Password Current Password Current Password 2 ame 2 SNR 1023456789 Image_Grafikpanel_EP9307_ CE5 00_V1 00 Built Built Jan 17 2007 14 00 00 Flash Size 16 MB SRAM Size 512 kB PLC VISU RAM 0 4
126. Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Default character set NORMAL or ZOOM used for display Character set name user created character sets used for display 3 4 15 Maintenance Service Useri to User5 Universal for users LCDADCInput Read AD converter LCDDACOutput Read DA converter Break Cancels the editor StartCalibrationTouch Calibrate touch sensor StateCalibrationTouch Display calibration status MaskStartupTime Screen buildup time ScreenStartupComCnt Number of communication requests ComMeantTime Transfer time KeyResponseTime Alteration time of variable 3 4 15 1 User1 to User5 Function For free use Data type Alphanumeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Any up to 16 bit 3 98 S TRON Tutorial IS The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 15 2 LCDADCInput Function Current input value of the AD converter for contrast control Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 255 3 4
127. Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 2 active 3 85 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 22 Key3 Function Simulates the key function of the key 3 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 3 active 3 4 9 23 Key4 Function Simulates the key function of the key 4 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 4 active 3 4 9 24 Key5 Function Simulates the key function of the key 5 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 5 active 3 4 9 25 Key6 Function Simulates the key function of the key 6 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 6 active
128. General parameters Specify a polling time that meets the requirements of real life situations Create a variable for the Read Coordination byte When you determine the timeout time in the controller remember to take the transfer times and polling times into account 3 15 8 5 Data Set Download Release The controller determines the start time of a data set transfer from the operating de vice to the controller by writing a logical 1 in the Data Set Download Release bit 3 15 8 6 Screensaver If the controller sets the BS bit of the write coordination byte WCB the display of the operating device is turned off immediately 3 16 Working with Scanners In the following chapters you will find further information on connecting scanners of the following types Laser scanner CLV410 from Sick Laser scanner DL 80 11 from Data Logic Laser scanner DL910 from DataLogic Laser scanner DLL 5012 M1 from Data Logic Laser scanner DLL 6010 M1 from Data Logic Laser scanner BB Snapshot ST from Percon 3 16 1 Parameters for Scanner CLV410 from Sick The data transmission between operating device and scanner is proceeded via the interface SER2 with the following parameters Table 3 56 Parameters for scanner CLV410 Parameter Value Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake No Handshake Default None Initializing None Data Prefix ASCII 02 Data Postfix ASCII
129. L error Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 99999 IS By inserting this system variable into the message text of a message the error code will be stored in the message memory in addition to the message E See chapter Serial Message System on page 3 141 3 63 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 2 11 ComErrorSubcode Function Displays the last error subcode low word issued for a COMMUNICA TION SYSTEM or FATAL error Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 99999 ics By inserting this system variable into the message text of a message the error code will be stored in the message memory in addition to the message E See chapter Serial Message System on page 3 141 3 4 3 Error Statistics SER1 ComParityCount Parity error counter ComOverrunCount Overrun error counter ComFrameCount Protocol frame error counter 3 4 3 1 ComParityCount Function Displays the number of parity errors for SER1 Is deleted at every down load Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to Number of p
130. Message 36 Script Error An error occurred when a script was being edited 2 10 10 3 Screen Reference Lists Screen reference lists allow you to assign values to the screen names of your choice This allows you to design a user interface that can be controlled by the controller The controller can do this by transferring a value to the operating device You must spec ify a transfer variable for Global control for this purpose If the operator presses a key that is linked with a screen reference list the value is read from the transfer variable and compared with the screen reference list Then the screen corresponding to the specified value is called up Screen reference lists enable different user interfaces in the case of machines with different versions for example 2 10 10 3 1 Screen Reference Lists Global Control In the Screen Reference List Control area enter the name of the transfer variable for global control of all screen reference lists The controller writes the screen number that should be displayed on the operating device to this variable If a screen reference list is linked with its own control variable global screen refer ence list control is not valid for this purpose 2 10 10 3 2 Screen Reference Lists Local Control In the Screen Reference List Control area enter the name of the transfer variable for control of the current screen reference list The controller writes the screen num ber that should be displayed on
131. NO FLASH EPROM creer 3 134 IAA dus 2 26 NO PROTOCOL DRIVER IN Netviewer 2 27 PROJECT FOUND irc 3 130 S tron HOMEPAGE cceeeeeceeesssteeeeees 2 27 NONE DEFAULT PARAMETERS ON Tip Of the day 2 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeetceeeeeeeeees 2 27 SERIAL PORT X2 USED 3 130 Help screen for input variable 3 157 PLC TYPE MISMATCH BETWEEN Help screen for message screens 3 157 TERMINAL AND PROJECT ceecccccccceeeeee 3 130 Help screen for screens 3 157 SUCONETK MODUL iii 3 133 Help screen background color 2 42 SYSTEM ERROR s 3 133 Help SCION oliin ia 2 41 TERMINAL TYP IS XXXX cccccccceccecceceee 3 134 Help Message lmport 2 44 TURN POWER OFF oasian 3 129 How do configure the contrast brightness UNEXPECTED INTERUPT n 3 133 setting for the operating device 3 177 WRONG S3 FILE issue 3 134 Error MESSAGES sn E Aaaa 3 127 Ethernet settings 0 c ccccsessessessessesesesessteaes 2 84 legal dat SOU eee 2 65 Preferred WINS server 2 85 Image External GSS as nn 3 136 Date and time 3 155 K yboard i haitis ses me 3 178 F Screen number 3 178 Fehlermeldung Status LEDS 00 c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 164 FIRMWARE NOT CONFORM n 3 135 User mode switch 3 178 Field type 3 25 Image lists 2 80 CCR nen 3 26 IMAGOS i eee 2 78 LeO or 3 25 Important files and
132. O FLASH EPROM NO FLASH EPROM This message is displayed to indicate that no Flash supported by the programming algorithm can be detected FLASH CHECKSUM ERROR FLASH CHECKSUM ERROR The application description stored in the FLASH contains errors This error may oc cur at the end of a transmission e g if the transmission was incomplete or after a device with a defective memory is switched on TERMINAL TYP IS XXXX TERMINAL TYP IS XXXX An attempt has been made to load a S3 file which was intended for another device type When this error occurs the correct type for this operating device is displayed where XXXX appears Recompile using this selection in the programming system 3 134 SUTRON Tutorial MEMORY IS FLASH XXXK MEMORY IS FLASH XXXK An attempt has been made to load a S3 file which was created for a larger application memory The amount of memory space requested by the S3 file and the memory available in the terminal do not match When this error occurs the memory size avail able in the device is specified in Kbytes where XXX appears This value must be specified in the programming system when compiling FATAL ERROR FATAL ERROR CODE XXXXX SUBCODE i XXXXX CALL HOTLINE An error message that should never occur but which exists nevertheless The termi nal s operating system generates this error if proper operation is no longer possib
133. R Error during transmission of the application description The error has either occurred during the serial transmission or the S3 file contains invalid lines or no valid S3 file has been transmitted Recompile the application description and attempt to retrans mit BYTECOUNT OVERFLOW BYTECOUNT OVERFLOW Error during transmission of the application description An error was detected in the S3 file of the application description More bytes were received in one of the trans mission lines than specified in the byte count 3 128 SUTRON Tutorial FORMAT ERROR FORMAT ERROR Transmission format of the application description contains errors The output file used has not been generated by this programming system The transmitted file did not contain SO S3 or S7 lines no S3 format was used TURN POWER OFF 1 TURN POWER OFF 2 RESET DIP SW 4 OTHERWISE ALL FLASH DATA WILL BE LOST The user mode switch S4 was at the on position when the supply voltage for the operating device was switched on The Flash data will be retained if the following in structions are complied with Switch the device off set S4 to off position switch de vice on data will be retained and the device will function as before If S4 is set to the off position while power is on data will be lost the device switches to the download mode DIFFERENT ID No BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PROJECT DIFFE
134. REBOOT Feriene 3 132 BYTECOUNT OVERFLOW 0 3 128 CHECKSUM ERROR sneen 3 128 COMMUNICATION ERROR 3 127 DATASET STORAGE FAILURE 3 135 DIFFERENT DRIV VERS oe 3 129 DIFFERENT ID No BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PROJECT 0065 3 129 S SUTRON Index DOWNLOAD 1 3 131 Field Length sisi est mins 3 50 DOWNLOAD 2 3 131 Fractional digits eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 50 ERASE FLASH EPROM 3 131 Positive values only 3 50 ERROR ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL Frames for buttons 3 41 PO UNIT Oise mme 3 132 Full page message output 3 141 FATAL ERRORJNN 3 135 Function keys FIRMWARE UPDATE SUCCESSFUL 3 133 Working with 3 158 FLASH CHECKSUM ERROR 3 134 Function of the AppStarter exe program 3 196 FLASH IS ERASED onsaassiiaaeninanneennn 3 131 Function of the TSvisLD exe program 3 196 FLASH MEMORY FAILURE 3 128 FLASH NOT ERASEABLE 3 134 G FORMAT ERROR ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeaeees 3 129 Global sr ne rs 3 52 HIGH VOLTAGE ccccccccccccscecececeeeseeeeees 3 132 Global function keys 2 42 IDENTIFY MEMORY TYP osea 3 132 H INITIALIZING 1 3 132 INITIALIZING MESSAGE BUFFER 3 131 Help MON aie sistema 2 26 KEYBOARD ERROR ice 3 130 AD OU aiieieo ea 2 26 KEYBOARD MODUL iii 3 133 BOWS Eteen a TA E 2 26 MEMORY IS FLASH XXXK nn 3 135 Contents 2 26
135. RENT ID No BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PROJECT TERMINAL ID No 8 0 PROJECT ID No 7 0 The version of the programming system and the operating system in the operating device are not compatible This error occurs if the wrong operating system version was selected for compilation of the application description The two program versions must match DIFFERENT DRIV VERS DIFFERENT DRIV VERS EPROM FLASH VERSION XXX XXX REVISION XXX XXX The protocol driver loaded via the programming system and the operating device s operating system do not match The two program versions must match 3 129 S TRON Tutorial NONE DEFAULT PARAMETERS ON SERIAL PORT X2 USED NONE DEFAULT PARA METERS ON SERIAL PORT X2 USED The parameters of the interface SER1 X2 were modified To achieve an operational connection both communication partners must be set to the new parameters This message is used for informational purposes if the connection to the communication partner can not be established NO PROTOCOL DRIVER IN PROJECT FOUND NO PROTOCOL DRIVER IN PROJECT FOUND The operating system can not find a protocol driver in the application description loaded Select a protocol recompile the application description and activate another download PLC TYPE MISMATCH BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PROJECT PLC TYPE MISMATCH BETWEEN TERMINAL AND PROJECT The protocol selected in the programming s
136. SCriPU ION iniii ania ei 2 67 E a E E 2 69 Scripts general 2 69 Selected elements AlN sure eee cee 3 54 Aligning to the grid n e 3 54 Serial message system 3 141 Set clock in operating device ceeeee 3 153 Set of curves Data logger Name and recorder type 3 43 Data recorder Address and data recording 3 44 Set of curves graph 3 43 Setup Main operating mode 3 188 Size in bytes parallel message system 3 142 Size of the message memory 3 137 SONMK CYS ne cei eet sr nm ne 3 159 Working with 3 158 Starting the operating devices 3 187 Static attributes 3 51 Statio tekt sus rene sandrine teens share sgeten ne siagnnn ess 3 5 Status LEDs of function keys 3 160 Status messages 3 142 Polling times immense 3 144 DOUMINGS issec chistes serrer ere 3 142 Variable for acknowledging 06 3 144 Variables ccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 3 144 Subnet Mask cccccccesseceesesceeeeeeseseeeeessaas 2 84 Subprint logs 2 58 SUDSCT ENS ssrsasree sre itteeumeenner 2 41 Supplementary functions 2 71 Supplementary functions Data input 2 77 Supplementary functions Date amp Time RECENO iiine aesan statut 2 72 Supplementary functions polling ar
137. a data set with the same number as the transferred data set is already stored in the RAM a parameter setting in the received data see Structure of Data Set File deter mines whether or not the existing data set is overwritten If it is not supposed to be overwritten and another data set with the same number already exists in the oper ating device the newly received data set is similarly rejected without any warning to the operator 3 7 3 6 Structure of a Data Set File The data sets transferred to the PC are generally stored in a file If this file is only used for backup purposes the operator does not necessarily be fa miliar with its structure In this case the file can merely be transferred back to the operating device unchanged when it is needed 3 120 SUTRON Tutorial If the data are to be processed further for example within the scope of production data acquisition the user should understand the structure of the file All of the data in the data set file are represented by a simple language specifically developed for this purpose The following are elements of this language Key words S two further letters They normally appear at the beginning of a line Example SDW or SFA Decimal number Any number of the digits 0 9 preceded by a negative sign when required Example 999 or 1234567 Hexadecimal number H any number of the digits 0 9 or letters A F or a f Example H999 or H123abCD4 Hexadec
138. able 2 2 Parameters for Modem Parameter Value Baud rate 19200 Baud Parity Odd Data bits 7 Stop bits 1 Handshake Software handshake Click the Start button to start the upload operation The upload function is primarily used for archiving purposes The S3 files can not be reloaded into the programming software to make changes to the project for exam ple The cable used for uploading is the same as that used for downloading The following modem connection requirements must be fulfilled The system parameters for the SER2 interface must match the above values The Enable automatic download or Enable automatic upload check box must be activated A modem transparent connection must be established before a download up load is carried out See chapter Download of Old Projects S3 Files on page 3 198 2 15 SUTRON Programming 2 4 7 Tools Menu Transmit Recipe Data Sets The data set transfer tool DSTT is a tool for exchanging recipe data sets It uses two tree views to represent the structure of the recipes and data sets The structure of the data sets in a file or on an operating device is displayed on the left side The right side shows the structure of the data sets in a file You can exchange the data sets between the files and the operating device Highlighted data sets can be copied or deleted You can change the write over iden tifier of data sets in
139. aces for display Both values are used to determine the entire field length There are a maximum of 32 bits for each variable There can be no more than 255 blank spaces between the bits The significance of the displayed digits can be displayed in ascending order from ei ther left to right or from right to left Example for displaying a binary number with or without blank spaces O 1 0 O Blanks 0 0 1 0 0 Blanks 1 0 1 0 0 Blanks 2 Table 3 12 Key functions for binary numbers Key Function 0 and 1 Enters the numbers 0 and 1 2to9 No function Decimal point No function Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Plus Enters the characters 0 and 1 Minus Enters the characters 0 and 1 Delete No function 3 20 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 3 10 Bars In the Field Type field define how the value is to be read Cyclically Once or Event controlled For the Expansion of the bar choose whe
140. act you have to select the device type for the selected project file and create a new INI file Check if the INI file should contain a subdirectory for the se lected project file To shorten the transmission you have the choice to suppress the transmission of the TSvisRT_CE runtime if this file has no changes FTP login Enter the User name and the password for FTP login If you don t need authorization check the log in as anonymous check box Status The status area indicates the current connection status and the currently used IP ad dress If you are connected to the operating devices FTP server is simultaneously indicated by a green respectively red radio button 2 83 S TRON Programming All data regarding the connections are logged in a file and displayed in a window To clear the log file click the corresponding button Click the Open log file button to open the log file with the Windows own editor Edit FTP server This area shows all directories and files the FTP server of the operating device offers Directories can be opened and closed by double clicking On file level you can perform open add delete rename create new directory copy to directory and refresh the view With add you can transmit several files at once to the operating device With copy to directory you can store several files respectively directories simulta neous on the local PC 2 15
141. active oe 1 Activates the interface parameters entered by the operator 2 Activates the interface parameters that were specified in the programming software 3 62 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 2 7 ComTimeout Function Sets the timeout watchdog time for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 No timeout watchdog Initial state 1 1 to Timeout watchdog time in ms 65535 3 4 2 8 ComRetryTimeout Function Sets the waiting time delay after which another connection setup is at tempted for SER1 This time period allows to span the time period required for the PLC specific power up phase thereby preventing error messages from being generated Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to Waiting time in ms ues 65535 3 4 2 9 ComSlaveNr Function Sets the slave number for an operating device connected to a network Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to Slave number ues 255 3 4 2 10 ComErrorCode Function Displays the last error code issued fora COMMUNICATION SYSTEM or FATA
142. additional items that are recognized at data read in time as not yet created are added to the text list provided they were selected The following options are available during an import process 1 You can determine whether to import sequential function texts or operand texts 2 You can determine whether to create only one item or whether to scan and gen erate the data from one specific file 3 For sequential function texts the number of items to be generated There are two fixed values and two automatically generated values for the number of items to be created The option From Directory Name Automatically creates 32 items provided the selected file is located in a subdirectory that identifies the controller type CL200 in accordance with the WINSPS convention Otherwise 64 items are generated With this option and the two fixed values this number of items is gen erated even if the scanned file contains fewer items In this case a blank is gen erated as a text The option From Data Automatically only generates the number of items contained in the scanned data 4 You can select a file or enter an address using the Bosch syntax and a descrip tion If you wish to read from a file you need an SXS file for sequential function texts The operand texts can only be generated from a cross reference list file that has been created using the WINSPS software version 2 11 Once the data are scanned all items are displayed in a list A leg
143. age beginning from the 61st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 17 8 ActVarLimit Function Displays current lower or upper limit value Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues IS This terminal variable is by default included in the terminal messages Value too large and Value too small and displays the respective limits 3 4 18 Print Logs SelectPrintLog Select print log StartPrintLog Print print log StatePrintLog Printer state PageNumber Print log page 3 4 18 1 SelectPrintLog Function Number of the currently selected print log Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 255 3 4 18 2 StartPrintLog Function Starts to print the currently selected print log Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Initial state ee 1 Start printing 2 Stop printing 3 105 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 18 3 StatePrintLog Function Status of the current print process Data type Numeric Re
144. age directly direct represen tation The message number also indicates its priority The lowest message num ber has the highest priority and the highest message number has the lowest priority All messages that have a higher priority than the message number specified here are handled using a special procedure in the operating device when they appear These messages are indicated by the status LED flashing in the direct selection key of the message screen or are signaled by a terminal message Using the Size of message buffer you define how many messages can be stored in the operating device Specify the maximum number of messages to be managed by the operating device 2 47 S TRON Programming 2 10 6 5 Terminal Area Function Keys Parallel message system Select a function key with which you wish to have the current message of the parallel message system displayed directly Serial message system Select a function key with which you wish to have the current message of the serial message system displayed directly 2 10 6 6 Terminal Area Identifier Status identifiers Status identifiers can be used to reflect the status of a message in the message sys tem Any character of the standard font can be used for status identification Status identifiers are only appended to messages stored in the serial message sys tem The history starts at the time the message arrives The Arrived appears status identifier is ap
145. ages S suTRON Tutorial 3 3 6 Set of Curves Graph You use sets of curves to graphically display the values that are recorded by one or more data loggers There are two wizards to help you program the representation of the sets of curves graph Axis scale wizard This wizard generates a set of curves with a single color back ground Bitmap loader wizard This wizard generates a set of curves with any background image of your choice Positionot the Extension of the graph element X axis graph element Maximum number of values Graph element Y axis scale marks Graph area Origin of the graph area Maximum value Extension of the graph element Y axis X axis distance X axis scale marks X axis direction Y axis direction Y axis distance Figure 3 27 Structure of a set of curves 3 3 6 1 Name and Recorder Type for Data Logger You can program four independent data loggers The data loggers record cyclical or event driven values between 0 and 254 from the controller These values are displayed graphically in a set of curves For each data logger you assign a name and a byte address in the controller You specify a recording type for each data logger Plotter continuous single values The plotter moves over the output area and in doing so outputs the values like an oscilloscope Plotter static single values The curve is drawn continuously from the left or right edge
146. ages in screens Content for image lists that represent variable values Icons for internal error messages Images for buttons A frame for buttons You can import images or insert them as objects OLE All images that you create are available in the programming software at the location where you can work with images If you insert an image as an embedded object OLE it is associated with the image creation program Double click the embedded object to open the application program that you used to create the object You can now edit the object directly The system enters the changes to the object into the programming software after you close the application Icons Icons are images with two colors and are available for touch screen operating de vices The advantage of using icons is that you can customize the foreground and back ground color If icons are used in buttons the colors of the icon are determined de pending on the color settings of the button for example you can program a button to change color when it is pressed In addition you can reuse icons conveniently since the color is determined by the button or the background 2 14 1 1 Inserting New Images Enter a name for the new image into the Image Name field Decide if you want to insert the image as an OLE object or insert the image from a file Images inserted as OLE objects can be edited in the server program by simply dou ble clicking the ima
147. alette You can change the color combination used in operating devices that can display grayscale or color The changed color combinations are then available throughout the project The list has two columns color 1 and color 2 Since an element is usually displayed with one color color 1 and color 2 are identical in this case If you have a flashing element you must use a color combination where color 1 is not the same as color 2 The color of the element then changes from one color to the other Use the numerical values for Red Green and Blue to combine new colors or edit ex isting colors The color combinations with the number 16 to 63 are supplied for flashing elements The default flashing frequency is 1 Hz 2 6 5 Terminal Type Fonts Any WINDOWS fonts can be used for programming purposes You must however specify the fonts in advance Each font specified is listed with its font size in points and font style bold or italic Text elements of the project are linked to the font name listed If you change the font or only an attribute of a font by clicking Edit font it affects all corresponding text ele ments of the project 2 29 S TRON Programming 2 6 6 Terminal Type Terminal Orientation Check the checkbox Twisted by 180 to represent the screens upside down This setting is only valid for operating devices with touch screen which have a display that allows twisting the representation by 180 2 7
148. aluations The message is assigned between the operating device and the controller by means of a message number The associated texts and variable specifications are stored in the operating device together with the application description The function of amessage and its contents are determined by the user when the application description is cre ated in the programming system All of the external messages are stored in the message memory in chronological or der or in order of priority You can optionally store parallel messages in the serial message memory to ensure that they are evaluated statistically as well If the mes sage contains a variable its value will be frozen in the message memory 3 8 5 1 Structure of an External Message An external message is made up of the following Message number from 1 to 9999 Date Time Message text with up to 255 characters The values of up to two variables from the time the message appears only if available When a new project is being created existing messages can be transferred individ ually or completely 3 8 5 2 Message Number For external messages the message number also determines the priority of the mes sage The message with the number 1 has the highest priority and the message with the number 9999 has the lowest priority You do not have to assign continuous mes sage numbers The assignment of the message numbers in the area for status messages always s
149. alue is still active You must first withdraw the data release before changing screens Input variables Activate the parameter Edit reverse if the element that you are currently editing is to be displayed using an inverse color assignment Use the parameter Change input variable with Enter key to ensure that the editor automatically changes to the next input variable of the screen after you have entered the data and pressed Enter or an equivalent key Table editor Choose whether the table editor is to advance row by row or column by column after you press Enter 2 13 10 Supplementary Functions Screensaver For operating devices that support the screensaver function enter the wait time If no operation has occurred by the time this period has expired the screensaver is ac tivated As an option you can choose whether you want to use a screensaver whether you only want to use the screensaver for screens without cyclical vari ables whether you want to allow the screensaver for screens with cyclical output vari ables 2 77 S TRON Programming 2 14 Resources Elements that you can reuse and apply to different projects are described as re sources These elements are not assigned to a language and should therefore if possible not contain any language specific parts e g a graphic should not contain any text 2 14 1 Images and Symbols Images You can use images as Background im
150. and section of the editor Controller The data set is controller specific You must therefore select the name of the control ler from a list Variable offset You must assign an offset to every variable in a data set This offset is used to store the data in the operating device memory Example You should specify offsets for 4 variables in a data set Variable 1 Byte variable Variable 2 Word variable Variable 3 Double word variable Variable 4 Byte variable 2 51 S TRON Programming The offsets are as follows Variable 1 Offset 0 Variable 2 Offset 1 Variable 3 Offset 3 Variable 4 Offset 7 Data set name In the Data Set Name column enter the names of all data sets that should be used for the current recipe Transfer to and from the controller is coordinated using this data set name Data set number In the Data Set Number column enter a unique number to be used to identify the data set Transfer to and from the controller is coordinated using this data set num ber Variable value In the left view first select the variable and then enter a value that this variable should have in the relevant data set Storage location For each data set you can specify whether it is stored in the operating device s Flash or RAM Flash data sets are protected against direct access while you can change data sets in RAM directly See chapter Working with Recipes on page 3 113 2
151. apter ScrchgPasswd on page 3 88 See chapter ChangePasswd on page 3 88 See chapter Working with Password Protection on page 3 145 2 11 2 User Management Parameters Activate the Deactivate password functionality in case of control screen change parameter if you want the controller to switch to password protected screens A change to a password protected screen would be preceded by a password query without the operator knowing what to expect next 2 12 Scripts Organize the script variables in a variable list and all created scripts Plan tasks which start the scripts See User Manual Scripting with TSwin net 2 12 1 Scripts General Newly created scripts are automatically numbered sequentially The Number field shows you the number of the current script 2 69 S TRON Programming 2 12 2 Variable List The script variable list is in tabular form In each line you can enter the name of a script variable its data type and also the length in the case of string variables All script variables that you enter into this table exist globally in all scripts and are stored retentively Permitted types are bool int uint double and string Table 2 11 Example of a script variable list Name Type Length 0 SkriptVar1 bool 1 SkriptVar2 int 2 SkriptVar3 uint 3 SkriptVar3 double 4 SkriptVar4 string 12 New gt gt 2 12 3 Planned Ta
152. arameter Value Baud rate 19200 Baud Parity Odd Data bits 7 Stop bits 1 Handshake Software handshake In the Interface area select the COM interface that you want to use to connect the operating device To check and if necessary edit the application ID settings click the App ID button The following modem connection requirements must be fulfilled The system parameters for the SER2 interface must match the above values The Enable automatic download or Enable automatic upload check box must be activated 2 14 SUTRON Programming A modem transparent connection must be established before a download up load is carried out 2 4 6 Tools Menu Transmit S3 File Upload With this function you can load the S3 file from an operating device to the PC To do so you can directly connect the PC with the operating device using a download cable or establish a connection using a modem In this case the operating device must also be connected with a modem Before uploading enter a name for the S3 file so that the file can be stored on the PC You can use the interface settings stored in the S3 file for the S3 file transfer or spec ify your own settings Click the Use modem parameters check box to establish a connection with a mo dem Click the Parameters button to configure the parameters of the serial interface or the connected modem The following values must be set as modem parameters T
153. area This area allows you to determine whether the length of texts entered in text lists is to be unlimited or limited If you do not want texts to exceed a specific length enter a maximum length in the Single character field 2 4 1 4 Options Global Settings The global settings options are divided into the following areas Representation Options for S3 file generation While starting Open editors When inserting from a library Representation area To display flashing elements in a screen in the strike through format select the Dis play Attribute Flashing check box Options for S3 File Generation area You only need this entry field if a project cannot be compiled without errors and you call on help from our hotline In this case you will get option codes with whose help you will find out further information about the compilation error While starting area Check the checkbox if the previous opened file should be loaded automatically Display only existing project files within the project files list by checking the corre sponding check box Open editors area Since now you had to open an editor by a double click onto the item of the project folder Now you only need to perform a single click as default To open the editors with an double click again uncheck the checkbox with single click When Inserting from a Library area Determine the steps the programming software should take if there is
154. ari able StartRestore is set to 1 The data sets can then be sent by the PC The operat ing device recognizes the end of the data set transfer automatically by analyzing the data it has received It then returns to its normal state To cancel the Ready to Receive state again without receiving data the value of the system variable StartRestore must be changed to 2 The system variable RestoreState indicates whether or not the terminal is ready to receive If a formatting error is detected in the received data a system message to this effect is output and the receive process is terminated The position of the formatting error can be located at least approximately with the aid of the system variable Restore LineNr This system variable contains the number of the last line to have been re ceived Data sets can only be stored in the operating device if their structure is still identical to the data set structure specified for the corresponding recipe in the application de scription This can be checked by the operating device on the basis of a version num ber see Structure of Data Set File If a data set which is found to be invalid is re ceived it is rejected and a system message to this effect is output The receive process is not terminated however If a data set with the same number as the transferred data set is already stored in the Flash Eprom the newly received data set is rejected without any warning to the op erator If
155. ariant buffer is read only once from the controller during the initialization phase of the operating device The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Select a text list whose texts are to be displayed with the variable You can choose to display a text instead of a numeric value To do this you must create a text list In the text list you assign numeric values to the corresponding texts The operating device reads the value of the variable from the controller replaces the numeric value with text and displays this text If a value is read from the controller and you have not defined a corresponding text for this value the system displays a number of question marks If the Selection Text type is used for an input variable you can choose to limit the field height to one or several lines 3 13 SUTRON Tutorial If you specify a field height of 1 the system always only displays one text from the text list If the field height is greater than 1 a correspondingly higher number of texts from the text list is displayed The active text is displayed inversely Table 3 7 Key functions for selection texts Key Function 0 9 No function Decimal point No function Plus Selection in ascending order after the final value in the text list is reached the value at top of the text list i
156. arity errors ues 65535 3 4 3 2 ComOverrunCount Function Displays the number of overrun errors Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 0 to Number of overrun errors 65535 3 64 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 3 3 ComFrameCount Function Displays the number of framing errors Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to Number of framing errors ues 65535 3 4 4 Communication SER2 ComDataLenB Number of data bits ComParityB Parity setting ComStopBitsB Number of stop bits ComBaudrateB Baud rate setting ComHandshakeB Handshake setting ComDefaultB Enter parameters 3 4 4 1 ComDataLenB Function Sets the number of data bits for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 5 Bit pay 1 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 3 8 Bit 3 4 4 2 ComParityB Function Sets the parity for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 No parity ae 1 Odd pa
157. assword with sufficient authorization 2 10 10 2 25 Terminal Message 22 Editing Mode Active You attempted to change to another screen while the operating device was in editing mode 2 10 10 2 26 Terminal Message 23 Data Set File Error The data set file loaded from the PC to the operating device contains a syntax error The error can be located by means of the line number system variable 2 10 10 2 27 Terminal Message 24 Data Set Format The size or internal version identifier of a data set loaded from the PC to the operating device and the corresponding values in the programming software do not match 2 10 10 2 28 Terminal Message 25 Number Invalid The bit pattern read from the controller is not valid for a floating point number The number is output as 0 0 2 10 10 2 29 Terminal Message 26 Loop through Active The selected action was not performed because the loop through operation is active 2 65 S TRON Programming 2 10 10 2 30 Terminal Message 27 No Data Set Address The addresses for the data set transfer did not exist at the time of the controller s re quest 2 10 10 2 31 Terminal Message 28 Recipe Unknown You attempted to select a recipe that does not exist in the operating device 2 10 10 2 32 Terminal Message 29 Data Set Download You initiated a data set transfer to the controller download but the Data Set Down load Release bit in the Write coordination byte bit 4 has not yet been set by th
158. ata set number To do this click the button beside the input box The operating device automatically enters the recipe number and data set number into this variable before data are transferred to the controller a Start Initiation of the transmission by the operator via the system variable DSDownload 1 transfer to recipe buffer 2 transfer to single addresses 4 Terminal initializes transfer variables transfer from the terminal with the values of the system variables SelectRezeptNr and SelectDSNr No Abort by operator via system variable DSDnloadBreak DDR bit in WCB 1 No WCB in the poll area Write Co ordination Byte free free free DDR LF DP RA EDR T Yes DDR bit in RCB is set by the terminal RCB l Ta gt Read Co ordination Byte free free free DoR LF DP RA EDR Start of data transmission Abort of data transmission by loss of voltage or abort of communication No DDR bit in the RCB is reset by the terminal Initialization of transfer variables transfer from the terminal by the terminal recipe no 0 data set no FF Y PLC resets the DDF bit in the WCB End wooo Figure 2 5 Data transfer to the controller operator controlled 2 10 7 3 Recipes Data Set Transfer to the Terminal Before a transfer is per
159. ata type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Inactive oe Function of the Acknowledge key active RS You must edit the value of this variable with a function key or a button You can not use any other input form 3 4 6 13 RepmanChgScreen Function Lets you jump to the screen which is linked with the selected message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Inactive ues ics You must edit the value of this variable with a function key or a button You can not use any other input form 3 4 6 14 RepoutQuitText Function Displays the most recent unacknowledged serial message The message is displayed in accordance with the specified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues RS If the operator acknowledges the displayed message the system automatically dis plays the next unacknowledged message 3 4 6 15 RepoutQuitText21 Function Displays the most recent unacknowledged serial message beginning from the 21st character The message is displayed in accordance with the spec ified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues
160. atabase on a secure data medium If a copy has not yet been created you can terminate the procedure with the No but ton Otherwise start the procedure with the Yes button The process can not be stopped If the computer crashes or becomes no longer op erable for some reason while the optimizing procedure is running the project data base will be damaged Enter the name of the project database to be optimized in the dialog displayed and confirm with OK 2 25 S TRON Programming 2 5 Help Menu The help for the programming software is context sensitive This means by pressing the F1 key a help topic related to the item hat has focus is invoked 2 5 1 Help Menu Contents This menu item allows you to display help for the programming software The Con tents tab appears on the left hand side On the Contents tab you can navigate through the help topics just as you would with any file browser Explorer Chapters are displayed as books and single topics are displayed as pages To display a topic simply click the corresponding page To print a chapter or a topic select it and click the Print button In the dialog that ap pears specify whether you want to print the selected topic or print the selected topic and all related subchapters 2 5 2 Help Menu Index This menu item allows you to display help for the programming software The Index tab appears on the left hand side Enter a keyword into the Index tab
161. ays written to the serial message channel with a 16 bit command As a result of asynchronous processing of some data transfer protocols evaluation of the message number may lead to problems if the message number has been en tered with single byte commands 3 8 6 1 Full Page Message Output The full page message is a combination of message processing and external screen selection For full page message screen output a screen and a message text must be pro grammed with the same number The controller calls up the external screen through the serial message channel When it is called up the screen is displayed and the associated message text is en tered into the message memory As you can choose the display content freely it is possible to implement a message screen full page error output or other content types To be able to return to the previous screen from here at least one screen parameter must be programmed with the function previous screen Message screens can con sist of several screens or complete structures for error recovery A separate full page help text can be configured for each full page message 3 8 6 2 Outputting Messages to a Logging Printer This function is available for all operating terminals with a SER2 serial interface When serial messages are logged directly the printer always runs synchronously Every new message arriving via the serial message channel is printed immediately and is transferr
162. be displayed on operating devices equipped with smaller sized dis plays 2 10 10 1 1 Text Lists Parameters As a parameter for a text list you can set the length of an individual text to be unlim ited or limited to a specific value You can only enter a length if you first select the Limited to option If you wish to limit the length of a text subsequently while existing texts will retain their full length new ones added will need to be of the specified length The Font area shows the font used to display the texts of the text list in the program ming software Click the button if the texts are to be displayed in a different font When using proportional fonts it is possible that more characters can be displayed in the selection text variable than the limit specified for the text length The value specified in the Options menu item of the Tools menu appears as the de fault value See chapter Options List Editors on page 2 8 2 58 SUTRON Programming 2 10 10 1 2 Text Lists Selection You can control the selection of texts from a text list with the contents of a variant buffer Each variant buffer bit represents the entry in a text list If the bit is set the text within the text list is enabled for selection in a selection text variable Enter the name of the variable for the variant buffer in the Variant buffer area In ad dition you need to specify the size of the buffer in bytes The maximum bu
163. being modified or if the external data release is canceled again before you press the Data Release key the buffer contents will likewise be discarded The modified data set is not transferred to the controller automatically An explicit command from you or the controller is necessary first See chapter Break on page 3 99 See chapter Transfer Single Data Set from Operating Device to Controller on page 3 151 3 7 3 Data Set Transfer to from Controller You can load the data sets from the terminal to the controller You can also load any changed data sets from the controller to the terminal In this context the data set transfer is always initiated by the terinal but only when the controller has activated the corresponding release DDR bit in the WCB Before a transfer is performed the communication partner must be advised of the recipe number and data set number In the Transfer from Terminal area enter the name of the variable for the recipe and data set number To do this click the button beside the input box The operating device automatically enters the recipe number and data set number into this variable before data are transferred to the controller 3 117 S TRON Tutorial 3 7 3 1 Transfer to the Controller Operator Controlled a Start y Initiation of the transmission by the operator via the system variable DSDownload 1 transfer to recipe buffer 2 transfer to single addresses 4
164. ble 3 19 Variable values for the Switch function Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 Pressed 1 Released 0 Enter a value from 1 to 255 for the access level and activate password protection for the button This ensures that the function associated with the button is only executed once you have entered the correct password Table 3 20 Access level Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 0 password protection inactive 3 3 5 3 3 Key Simulation The button takes over the function of a key You can simulate the following keys Otog AtoZ Special characters Control keys Keys with special functions 3 37 S TRON Tutorial Enter a value from 1 to 255 for the access level and activate password protection for the button This ensures that the function associated with the button is only executed once you have entered the correct password Table 3 21 Access level Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 0 password protection inactive 3 3 5 3 4 Static Text for Buttons In the Text box enter the text that should appear on the button Choose the font in which the text should be displayed in theFont section To save a new font in the list of fonts available for selection click the New fontbutton Various attributes are available for the text depending on the touch screen panel type Select any of the attribute check box
165. cally once or _event controlled For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired For the format you can specify the field length and height of the selection image The following access types are available normal access selective access In addition the following options are available for the DIN measurement protocol Article Administration Delete Article Administration Normal access All of the texts in the list can be selected To do so create a text list fill it with the required texts and then link it to the variable that you are just about to create Selective access Only texts whose corresponding bit is set to logical 1 in the variant buffer are dis played For this access type you need to create a variable for the variant buffer The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Select an image list whose images are to be displayed with the variable Selection image type variables function as follows You can choose to display images instead of numeric values in the same way as you can use text to represent numeric values In an image list first of all ass
166. capable of exchanging files with you You can see the screen contents of the support person In the start dialog enter a support person number which is given to you by telephone by the support person Next a dialog appears where you can grant revoke data transfer screen display and remote control rights 2 5 7 Help Menu Tip Of The Day This menu item opens the Tip of the day dialog This dialog presents you helpful tips on the software each time the programming software is started 2 27 S TRON Programming 2 6 Terminal Type A project is always created on the basis of a terminal type This means that param eters such as display size number of function keys and so on are predefined in ad vance However you can also port a project to another terminal type taking into account any restrictions due to the changed hardware conditions Based on the terminal type you can create a project by creating contents in the project tree branches and defining parameters Table 2 3 Project tree contents Branch Contents Communication Parameters for the interfaces on the PC and on the operating device Parameters for the protocols used by the oper ating device to communicate with controllers Controller variables Languages Screens function keys messages recipes print logs text lists User management Passwords Script management Scripts and script variables Supplementary functions Parameter
167. ccess bit by bit and the operating device can access byte by byte or word by word are permitted Table 3 38 Structure of variables for status messages with 2 bytes Word High Byte Low Byte Byte 2 1 Bit 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Message no 16 15 14 113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A bit set in a byte activates the corresponding status message in the operating de vice 3 8 8 4 Variable for Acknowledging Messages The variable for acknowledging messages has the same structure as the variable for the messages themselves Each bit set in a byte represents the acknowledgment of the corresponding mes sage 3 8 9 Memory Requirement for Messages and Data Sets Depending on the operating device different storage quantities are available which are also used differently for messages and data sets Table 3 39 Memory space memory requirement CPU in Operating Device Z80 32 Bit RISC Available Memory Space in Bytes About About 116000 for FW version 1 07 or lower 116000 About 147000 for FW version 1 08 or higher Memory Requirement per Message 24 Bytes 32 Bytes 1 Memory Location Memory Requirement per Data Set 33 Bytes 44 Bytes without User Data You must expect three times the memory requirement for the following message vari ants 1 Messages containing 2 variables 2 Messages with Appear Disappear 3 Messages with
168. ce the scanned value has been transferred activate the Terminal sends ACK signal following re ceipt Terminal sends ACK after receive data function To allow the terminal to recognize when a scanned value begins and ends enter the characters sent by the scanner beforehand and afterward as the data prefix and data postfix 2 33 S TRON Programming 2 9 3 3 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner Unicode For printer control the characters intended for output must be converted according to a conversion table Characters that are not contained in the conversion table are not printed Three recognized character tables are used worldwide European standard GB2312 80 GB18030 Choose the character table for your requirements by selecting the relevant radio but ton from the Printer standard area In the Language switching area you can enter a string in the Activation code area This string is sent to the printer in order to activate the correct character set be fore every print operation Refer to the printer s user guide for information on entering the correct activation code Example Switch to GB2312 80 character set FS amp Hex 1C 26 Switch to European standard FS Hex 1C 2E In China the built in standard code type is used The table below shows the differ ence between this character set and GB2312 80 Table 2 6 Conversion table for the built in standard character set
169. ces with a unique name in the list 2 10 8 2 Print Logs Format For the printer Page Settings you can specify the Lines in Page and Characters in Line For detailed information on defining the page size please refer to your printer man ual 2 10 8 3 Print Logs Controller A variable must be defined to be able to transfer the print log number from the con troller to the operating device If the controller transmits a command to print a print log the operating device uses the log number currently stored in this variable To initialize the print log from the controller the control code 7FF7h must be written to the polling area The operating device writes the status of the print process to the same controller ad dress This status is output as a signed decimal number Table 2 8 Parameters for print logs Value Status 0 Printing complete 1 Printer in use 2 Print log not found 3 Print log stopped 2 10 8 4 Print Logs Number Specify any number provided it is unique as an identifier for the current print log 2 10 8 5 Print Logs Escape Sequences Prefix escape sequence Select an escape sequence to be sent to the printer before the current print log is output Postfix escape sequence Select an escape sequence to be sent to the printer after the current print log is out put 2 56 S SUTRON Programming Page feed Select this parameter if a page feed should be executed b
170. ch D JO Suchen gt Ordner Adresse B ftp 192 168 100 107 Wechseln zu CDTSvisRT MappStarter exe gt Figure 2 7 Flash file system in the operating device example The browser shows the content of a FTP server likely as shown in the above figure If it s not you may change the settings under Tools Internet options tab Extended by checking the check box Activate folders for FTP sites The browser allows to copy and delete files on the FTP server operating device If this is not possible you may change the settings under Tools Internet options tab Extended by checking the check box Use passive FTP If problems occur while FTP transmission please check these possibilities first 1 Close the dialog and restart 2 Reboot the operating device 3 Check if the operating device has enough space of free memory 2 15 4 2 FTP Transfer Terminal parameters Enter a name for the operating device in the Station name field In the Description field you may enter a description for the station name Enter the IP address of the operating device to which the transfer should take place into the IP address field Click the arrow beside the input field to select an already existing IP address out of the list Project data In this area you may select other project files for transmission The CB and the INI files have to fit to each other Otherwise the project cannot be started Due to this f
171. cimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Help active 3 84 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 17 KeyDot Function Simulates the key function of the Decimal Point key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Decimal Point active 3 4 9 18 KeyClear Function Simulates the key function of the Clear key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Clear active 3 4 9 19 Key0 Function Simulates the key function of the key O Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 0 active 3 4 9 20 Key1 Function Simulates the key function of the key 1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function 1 active 3 4 9 21 Key2 Function Simulates the key function of the key 2
172. ct Management Communication Select a protocol that the operating device can use to communicate with the control ler gt copies the selected protocol into the active protocol list lt removes the selected protocol from the active protocol list 2 15 4 Project Management Terminal File For the terminal file the name of the current project is used automatically A terminal file is the result of the compilation process and has the extension CB Load this file into the terminal You can carry this out in different ways 2 81 SUTRON Programming by CompactFlash card by USB stick by ethernet Click on the Download button to open the dialog of the transmission 2 15 4 1 Create INI File And Transfer Files TSvisRT INI file settings Along with the terminal file CB also transfer the protocol driver DLL and the runtime EXE The storage location settings in the terminal is predefined but can be changed as required The default is for devices with ARM9 processor file FlashDrv TSvisRT Project name for devices with Xscale processor file StorageCard TSvisRT Project name For each further project a directory with the name of the project is set under TSvisRT Ifyou enter a file address file FlashDrv the files are stored in this folder and the operating device accesses the files in its own Flash memory Ifyou enter a URL address http MyServer NET the files
173. ct it A red flag beside the name indicates that it is correctly selected 2 57 S TRON Programming 2 10 9 Subprint Logs Subprint logs contain static texts and or variables that are to be used repeatedly in several print logs always in the same position and in the same form Print logs can be linked with any number of subprint logs There must be no overlap between elements of different subprint logs If overlapping occurs an error message is generated when the project is compiled 2 10 10 Language Resources All elements of a national language are considered language resources that you can use in various places within the current project 2 10 10 1 Text Lists A text list is an assignment of texts to numerical values It is used wherever a text is to be displayed in screens instead of a numerical value from the controller In the left column of this table enter the numerical value to which the text is assigned that will be entered into the right column To enable entry of hexadecimal numerical values select Options from the Tools menu and select the Display Values Hexadecimally check box in the List Editors tab The letter H must always precede hexadecimal numerical values The elements in a row are not entered into the system until you press the Enter key or use the Tab key to move to the next blank line The length of texts in the right column can be limited This allows you to ensure that texts can also
174. d 5 Confirm with OK The Open dialog closes and the selected project folder is opened In the Project folder window the project folder is entered as a single folder icon with the name of the terminal type PQ NE 2 2 2 File Menu New Project Folder Select the New project folder menu item to create a new project folder You can start by using an empty or predefined template Use predefined templates if you want to save time especially for programming oper ating devices equipped with touch screens When using these templates all you need to do is adapt the design and implement your own additions You can choose to create the new project folder as a project template or library Follow the steps below to create a new project folder 1 Select New project folder from the File menu The wizard used for creating a new project folder now opens and guides you through a series of dialogs Create project folder template or library templates Create project folder template or library place to store Create project folder template or library terminal type Create project folder or template protocol type Once the wizard has completed all steps the Project folder window contains the new project folder as at least one project icon with the name of the terminal type 2 2 2 1 Create Project Folder Template or Library Templates The Create project folder template or library templates dialog is the first dialo
175. d Protection Password protection prevents screens from being accessed and the data they con tain from being altered without proper authorization The protective function is avail able in every operating device It is achieved by assigning access levels to screens and by using passwords Unless otherwise specified by the programmer the access levels for all screens au tomatically default to the lowest level 0 That means no password is required to access screens with this access level Two authorization levels referred to as the edit level and view level are assigned to every password View level means that the next screen can be viewed after the password is entered but the values in it can not be edited Edit level means that the screen can be viewed after the password is entered and the values in it can be edited 3 145 S TRON Tutorial Master Password Example for using access levels Startup screen Setup screen The following rules apply to passwords Access is permitted if the view level and edit level values are greater than or equal to the values specified for the access level The edit level must be equal or less than the view level The higher the values for the view level and edit level the higher the degree of authorization The valid range of values for the view level and edit level is 0 to 255 The default setting for both is 0 The authorization levels are
176. d oriented 3 163 Lower limit 3 51 Polling Mesecne 3 164 Preferred DNS server 2 84 M Print log invalid 2 64 Memory media used 3 196 PACIOS ee nus Aaa 2 55 Memory requirement for messages and Print logs adjust printer 2 56 data SOUS sirere deiei ceninin 3 144 Print logs controller cece cece eeeeeeeeeee 2 56 Message buffer full 2 64 Print logs escape SEQUENCES ceeeeeees 2 56 Message field 3 48 Print logs format 2 56 Message field parameters 3 48 Print logs number 2 56 Message number 3 136 Print logs subprint logs 2 57 Message output formats 3 139 Print protocol unknown 2 66 Message overflow 2 64 Printing the message memory cceeees 3 138 Message priority for direct display 3 138 Project management 2 81 Message sorting 3 138 Project management activating a project 2 81 Message system 2 43 Project management communication 2 81 Message text 1524 2 43 Project management languages 008 2 81 Message text and variable s11s1se11e1 3 137 Project management terminal file 2 81 Messages 2 43 Protocol selection 2 3
177. d value is automatically used again after a power failure ics The function of the Running Time Meter is dependent on other parameters E See chapter Working with Running Time Meters on page 3 147 3 4 13 Loop through Operation Pg2Sps Enable loop through operation Pg2SpsState Status of loop through operation 3 4 13 1 Pg2Sps Function Enables disables the loop through operation The loop through operation is alternately activated deactivated by the rising edge from 0 to 1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive oe 1 Enable loop through operation ics Provisions must be made to be able to use the loop through operation with the PG protocol 3 97 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 13 2 Pg2SpsState Function Displays the status of the upload process of the loop through operation Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Request loop through operation Loop through operation is possible Loop through operation active 3 4 14 Loadable Character Set ChrsetName Current character set name 3 4 14 1 ChrsetName Function Displays the name of the current character set
178. d via interface X3 A new project can now be loaded or new interface param eters for the transfer can be exchanged DOWNLOAD 2 DOWNLOAD 2 The operating device indicates that it is ready for a download with the new interface parameters If no data are received within 20 s the operating device will return to the DOWNLOAD 1 state 3 131 S TRON Tutorial AUTO REBOOT1 AUTO REBOOT1 The operating device will reboot after a few seconds INITIALIZING 1 INITIALIZING 1 CPU XX MHz Flash XXX KBYTE XXXXXXXX YYYYYYYY The operating device reports its parameters during the startup process CPU frequency in MHz Size of Flash memory in Kbytes Version number XXXXXXXX Loaded PLC driver YYYYYYYY IDENTIFY MEMORY TYP IDENTIFY MEMORY TYP The Flash memory type used is being identified HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the operating device is too high This message will not disap pear until the specified supply voltage has been reached ERROR ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL I O UNIT 0 ERROR ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL I O UNIT 0 Initialization of the serial interface unit O or unit 1 failed 3 132 SUTRON Tutorial SUCONETK MODUL SUCONETK MODUL HARDWARE VERSION NOT CONFORM TO DRIVER VERSION The program release of the SUCOnet K card and the current protocol driver are not compatible R
179. dDSNr 2 Loads variables as a block from the recipe buffer to the destination indi cated in UploadDestNr 3 Loads one variable at a time and saves them automatically to a free data set Terminal message 18 is displayed if no free data set is available 4 Loads variable as a block from the recipe buffer and saves them automat ically to a free data set Terminal message 18 is displayed if no free data set is available 3 4 11 25 UploadDSNr Function Number of the destination data set for the upload Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 1 to ues 250 3 4 11 26 UploadState Function Displays the status of the data set upload Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ues 1 Upload active 3 96 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 12 Running Time Meters Counter1 to Counter8 Status of running time meter 3 4 12 1 Counter1 to Counter8 Function Running time meter 1 to 8 The counter is incremented when the bit is set Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to 4 294 967 295 ues The value of the variable is stored retentively The store
180. data set read process 3 4 11 1 SelectDSNr Function Number of the current data set Data type Numeric Representation Selection text decimal number Configurable val ues 0 to 250 3 4 11 2 SelectDSName Function Name of the current data set Data type Alphanumeric Representation Selection Text Configurable val ues 30 characters 3 90 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 11 3 DestDSNr Function Number of the destination data set Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 1 to ues 250 3 4 11 4 DSCopy Function Copies the current data set to the destination indicated in DestDSNr Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ues lt a 1 Copy to destination in DestDSNr 2 Automatically copy and search a free data set 3 Copy to destination in DestDSNr and overwrite any data set existing 3 4 11 5 DSDelete Function Deletes the current data set Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive aan 1 Deletes the active data set and acti
181. date format for the message output Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Europe DD MM YY B 1 USA MM DD YY 2 Japan YY MM DD 3 4 5 9 RtcYear2000 Function Sets a 4 digit year of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 9999 3 69 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 6 Serial Message System RepmanSortCrit Set sorting criterion ClearRepBuf Clear message buffer RepmanRepPrint Output to a printer RepoutNr Output message number RepoutDate Output message date RepoutTime Output message time RepoutAnzYear Display year RepoutRepText Output message RepoutRepText21 Output message starting from 21st digit RepoutRepText41 Output message starting from 41st digit RepoutRepText61 Output message starting from 61st digit RepmanQuitKey Acknowledge message RepmanChgMask Screen change from message field RepoutQuitText Output current message acknowledgment RepoutQuitText21 Output message acknowledgment starting from 21st digit RepoutQuitText41 Output message acknowledgment starting from 41st digit RepoutQuitText61 Output message acknowledgment starting from 61st digit RepoutQuitAnz Number of unacknowledged messages RepoutMarker Position of
182. decimal point 2 The number of fractional digits that is the places that should be displayed after the decimal point for example two places for currencies 3 The restriction to permit positive values only 4 The option of filling digits that can not be used up by a low value with few digits with zeros In case of input variables you can enter upper and lower limit values for the range monitoring area supervision which are not to be exceeded Assign a color to every limit value to indicate that the upper or the lower value has been exceeded The Scaling function allows you to adjust the input value to meet specific conditions Factor Divisor Addend In the Variable type area you define how the variable value is interpreted Standard type Timer Counter or BCD Number Select an Editor that is to be used to enter the values of an input variable By using the numeric keys standard editor or Using the PLUS and MINUS keys only Increment editor or Using both variants Mix mode editor For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the
183. directories 3 197 OU PU SR 3 25 Important notes aassssseessssseeeerrreessrnneseerrnnernnneneeen 1 1 RETSIN 011o creer 3 25 Input variables 3 51 File menu new project folder 2 3 Input output screen 3 4 File menu open a project folder 2 3 Intended use 1 1 Flash card information 2 66 Interface in use 2 64 FASO nd ones 3 52 Internal messages 3 124 ER SO ne 3 53 Invalid message no 2 64 Foreground 3 53 Invalid password 2 64 FOIE Se ee onu 3 26 Invalid screen number 2 64 Display leading Z fOS eeeeceeneumeneeaeeeeee 3 26 LACIES ee eeeesenuee essences 3 52 Field length o s 3 26 MSDE naa 3 52 Fractional digits c ccccsccecccsseeeseseeees 3 26 IP aAddr ss sistema 2 84 Only positive a an ereere 3 26 K Format error time ple 2 67 Formatted output Keyboard image Display leading zeros 3 50 BT OSAM sce ser scntceetetarcecetesvsreezetevare 3 179 A 2 SUTRON BTOSAM sense an 3 181 Options print log editors cceeeeeeteeeees 2 10 BTO TAM inner 3 183 Options project management 2 6 BT2TAME naar 3 185 Options translation support 2 11 Output format printer 2 51 L Output format recording seese 2 50 Language change error 2 66 Output format status 2 49 Language resources
184. displays all importable symbols in a list A symbol is displayed to the right of each entry in the list box The symbols indicate the status of the entry Use the space bar to select or deselect toggle function the highlighted entry for the import procedure Complete the procedure with Finish To return to the previous step click lt Back The data in the list are compared in one direction only This comparison direction is always import data gt gt text list data For this reason the status always refers to the text list entry 2 4 12 Tools Menu Export Copy an image of the current window to the clipboard 2 4 12 1 Export Exporting the Window Contents You can use the Export window contents function to copy an image of the current window contents to the clipboard The data copied to the clipboard can then be used as required for example the ob tained images can be inserted into a document This function can not be used to create a copy from an image because the data cop ied to the clipboard are in a bitmap format For this purpose use the function Copy Cut Paste instead 2 4 13 Tools Menu Optimizing a Database Frequent changes made to a project can result in unnecessary expansion of the project database However it is possible to optimize a database that has been extensively fragmented in this way Before doing so ensure no project is open Before optimizing a database you may want to create a backup of the d
185. dow appears Any problems that have occurred during the export are displayed here You can edit the ASCII file using any editor Make sure that the formatting is not damaged and that the first two lines and object IDs are not changed Structure of the ASCII file Column 1 Object ID for the language Column 2 Membership Column 3 Horizontal position Column 4 Vertical position Column 5 Length Column 6 Font Column 7 Text Each time an export file is created a new identification code is created and also stored in the database A message is displayed to the user if the entries do not match when the file is imported the user can then either terminate or continue the import process 2 20 S TRON Programming The following applies to the maximum length of the individual text types Static texts Unlimited lt 4096 Message texts Constant defined for message texts currently 255 Texts in text lists Unlimited lt 4096 2 4 10 2 Translation Support Import Use this function to import texts that you have first exported and then translated Follow the steps below to start the translation support tool import function 1 Select a language in the project tree 2 Fromthe Tools menu select Translation support Import texts The Import text elements of the language from a file dialog appears The same path and file used for the export are proposed 3 Confirm with OK 2 4 11 Tools Menu
186. e Valid hexadecimal values for the language number are 7FEOh to 7FEFh Valid decimal values for the language number in the Language Parameters dialog are 1 to 16 7FExh You want to load the language with the number 4 Write the hexadecimal number 7FE3 to the address of the serial message channel You want to load the language with the number 12 Write the hexadecimal number 7FEB to the address of the serial message channel 3 11 5 Activating Recipe and Data Sets from the Controller You can use the following control codes from the controller to instruct the operating device to read the values for the recipe number and data set number from the con troller to make the recipe and the data set from its own memory available and to ac tivate them 7FF1h 3 11 6 Automatic Data Release for Scanner Module You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice automatically read in the values from the connected scanner 7FF2h 3 11 7 Reload Event Controlled Variable Values You can use the following control code from the controller to instruct the operating device to read all variable values from the controller again that are currently dis played in a screen and have the property Event Controlled 7FF3h 3 11 8 Transfer Single Data Set from Operating Device to Con troller You can use the following control code from the controller to have a single data set transferred from the operating dev
187. e Editor function can be represented transparency Thanks to this you have the possibility of showing a background image through the button Signal tone Choose the action or state that should trigger a beep tone Also specify the duration of the beep tone You can manually enter the value in the input box or use the arrow keys to change the value in steps The unit used to specify how long the tone should sound is seconds Dynamic attributes Click the Dynamic attributesbutton to assign various attributes to the button de pending on particular values Alignment of the variable To align the variable inside the button field check the apropriate checkboxes for hor izontal and vertical alignment 3 35 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 5 3 Functions of Buttons A button can trigger the following functions 3 Open another screen Write a value byte to a PLC or system variable when you press the button Write a value byte to a PLC or system variable when you release the button Simulate any key Generate a free tone Activate or open the Editor for an input variable No action 3 5 3 1 Pushbuttons As a pushbutton the button can initiate a screen change or influence the value of a variable Table 3 16 Pushbutton functions for button Symbol Bedeutung _ Select the name for the screen to be used for a screen change Enter the value of the variable when the button is pressed and type in the name of
188. e a 3 67 Serial Message System 3 70 Parallel Message System 3 76 Printer Control ess aeropsia aiaa t 3 79 Menu Gontrol Keys 22h haiei eaea 3 80 PASSW nee Mine NE E EE a Aymne sata teinte 3 88 RECIPES errari AE tenus trente tre einen 3 90 Running Time M ters 5 1442uersemre num unte under 3 97 S TRON Overall Table of Contents 3 4 13 Loop through Operation nenn nnennnennnnnnnn ee 3 97 3 4 14 Loadable Character Set 3 98 3 4 15 Maintenance Service 3 98 3 4 16 GItOrS sn M Me nn nn 3 101 oa a peepee eee ere E certe test tes errr 3 103 3 4 18 Print LOQSivc a ahi Amite eRe 3 105 3 4 19 Compact Flash Cardin an msn 3 106 3 4 20 Set of Curves Graphs 3 108 3 4 21 Image Parameters lt iicici tienes eet oes 3 109 3 422 Script PROCESSING 25848 rendre ans dem relate aa aaaea 3 109 3 5 Working with Libraries 3 110 3 6 Working with Edit Screens ceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeessnees 3 111 3 7 Working with Recipes 3 113 3 7 1 Structure of a Recipe 00 0 eee cece eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeees 3 115 3 7 2 Working with Recipes and Data Sets 3 115 3 7 3 Data Set Transfer to from Controller 3 117 3 8 Working with Messages sssrinin nia RA 3 123 3 8 1 Internal Messages 3 124 3 8 2 System ICON punina aadi a aan hate 3 124 3 8 3 Suppressing the Display of Terminal Messages 3 127 3 8 4 Error Ne Sago S ean
189. e con troller 2 10 10 2 33 Terminal Message 30 Scanner Error Three different types of errors may have occurred 1 A value was scanned but the editor required was not open yet 2 The scanner does not support this variable type 3 The parameter settings for the scanner prefix and postfix are not correct 2 10 10 2 34 Terminal Message 31 Print Log Unknown You selected a print log that does not exist 2 10 10 2 35 Terminal Message 32 Language Change Error Changing the language is not possible during other running processes 2 10 10 2 36 Terminal Message 33 Flash Card Information The following errors may have occurred Data error while downloading a project from the Compact Flash card You inserted the Compact Flash card into the operating device You removed the Compact Flash card from the operating device You can use the CFCardError system variable to display the type of error E See chapter CFCardError on page 3 108 2 10 10 2 37 Terminal Message 34 New Application Necessary The project in the operating device or the project in the controller has been modified and the operating device is trying to access variables that meanwhile have been modified 2 66 S SUTRON Programming 2 10 10 2 38 Terminal Message 35 Format Error Time PLC The controller transmits an incorrect format for time and date See chapter Date and Time Image on page 3 155 2 10 10 2 39 Terminal
190. e current screen of the operating device written to a controller variable or script variable The controller variable must be a 16 bit variable Only the first 16 bits are transferred at scriptvariables 32 bits The following 16 bits are not changed and may not be evaluated For each screen change the operating device writes the current screen number in this variable This means that you can access the user interface from the controller 3 21 Image of the Keyboard In a chain of bytes there is one bit that displays the status of each key of an operating device If the bit for a key is set to logical 1 this means that the key is pressed Once the key is released the bit is set to logical 0 again To enable the keyboard image to be read request code 7FFCh must first be written into the cyclical polling area The operating device then writes the current keyboard image into the agreed variable in the controller Each operating device can have a specific number of keys and therefore has its own keyboard image 3 178 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 21 1 Keyboard Image for the BTO3AM The keyboard image consists of eight bytes that must be stored contiguously in the controller Table 3 74 Arrangement of the keyboard image in the controller Address Byte number 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IN BB wy D Table 3 75 BTO3AM keyboard image
191. e for data exchange Transfer of Select the elements to be transferred If no element is selected no data transfer will take place For the date choose whether you want the year to be transmitted as a 2 or 4 digit value See chapter Working with a Real Time Clock in the Operating Device on page 3 155 See chapter Set Clock in Operating Device on page 3 153 See chapter Date and Time Image on page 3 155 See chapter Setting the Real Time Clock from the Controller on page 3 156 See chapter Transferring the Real Time to the Controller on page 3 156 2 13 4 Supplementary Functions Receive Date amp Time Receive from control Here you can specify the name of the variable used for the data associated with the date time and day of the week in the controller See chapter Working with a Real Time Clock in the Operating Device on page 3 155 See chapter Set Clock in Operating Device on page 3 153 See chapter Date and Time Image on page 3 155 See chapter Setting the Real Time Clock from the Controller on page 3 156 See chapter Transferring the Real Time to the Controller on page 3 156 2 13 5 Supplementary Functions Reset Running Time Meters Eight running time meters are available in the operating device For the Start stop variable control byte enter the variable name which constitutes the address where the controller can influence the running time meters in
192. e is displayed if you press the Help key or press a corresponding button or press on a free area of the display background For key operated devices the terminal message is displayed for the length of time the key is pressed For operating devices with a touch screen you can program an input output screen specifically for displaying terminal messages The button in which the StateHelp system variable is configured can be used to change to this screen at the same time If several terminal messages are pending at the same time they will be displayed in the order of their numbers The terminal message number 1 represents the highest priority You can change the text of the terminal messages to suit your needs The size of one screen is available for each terminal message text The terminal message text can be freely designed using the terminal specific fonts Additional character attributes or graphics are not possible Icons are available for terminal message display on operating devices equipped with a touch screen This allows terminal messages to be displayed graphically Output of the texts is language specific i e if the user interface is multilingual the terminal messages are displayed in accordance with the selected language The ter minal messages are assigned by means of terminal message numbers The terminal message number stands for a predefined event A brief description consisting of 20 characters is used
193. e keyboard image in the controller Address Byte number 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IN BB wy D Table 3 77 BTO5AM keyboard image Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 1 0 Data release 2 0 Cursor left 1 Enter 1 Cursor right 2 Delete 2 Cursor up 3 Help 3 Cursor down 4 Cursor home 4 Decimal point 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 0 0 4 0 5 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 7 3 3 3 8 4 4 4 9 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned S SUTRON 3 181 Tutorial Table 3 77 BTO5AM keyboard image Byte number Bit Key Byte number Bit Key 5 0 Plus 6 0 F4 1 Minus 1 1 F5 2 F1 2 2 F6 3 F2 3 3 Not assigned 4 F3 4 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 5 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 7 Not assigned 7 0 Not assigned 8 0 Not assigned 1 Not assigned 1 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 3 Page down 4 Not assigned 4 Print 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 182 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 21 3 Keyboard Image for the BTO7AM The keyboard image consist
194. e logs do not necessarily have to be output to a printer The data sent can also be read in by a higher level system host computer and processed further in any way A prefix and a postfix can be selected for each individual print log Prefixes and postfixes are escape sequences that are transferred before and after the actual print log The sequences are stored in a list To ensure that print logs have a uniform layout and to simplify the input of elements that are always the same you can create subprint logs and link them with the print log You can use the following options to select default settings in the programming soft ware for the print log editor Font Grid grid color Color of non printable elements Color of output variables Zoom factor when opening the log editor To customize the print log to your own requirements adjust settings in the following categories for each parameter Adjust printer Format Controller 2 55 S TRON Programming 2 10 8 1 Print Logs Adjust Printer You can have one or several escape sequences sent to the printer before prefix and or after postfix each print log You can use these to Generate a line feed Generate a page feed Change font Change font size Change font style See the printer documentation for more information on the escape sequences you can define for your logging printer Enter the escape sequen
195. e of Status LEDs The LED image enables the controller to control the status LEDs of the function keys of the connected operating device The functions ON OFF or FLASHING can be set for each status LED As soon as the controller sets a bit the assigned LED on the operating device is influenced accordingly In this context it is important that the length of the polling area and the polling time were also set correctly If these additional parameters were not set correctly prob lems may occur during the LED control For a function key that leads directly to the message screen the status LED is influ enced by the message system In this way the message system indicates that a new message has been received and has not yet been acknowledged To influence the status LED of this function key from the controller you must set the message priority to 0 zero Table 3 53 Truth table for a status LED Bit 1 Bit 2 Status of the LED 0 0 OFF 0 1 OFF FLASHING is preset 1 0 ON 1 1 FLASHING 3 15 5 Polling Time The polling time specifies the intervals the operating device will use to read the vari able for the cyclical polling area The polling of this variable also covers the Write Co ordination byte the serial message channel and the image of the status LEDs Settings in or around a half a second have proven useful in most protocols If the cy cle time set is too low the interface protocol can no longer
196. e red bound ary lines to the corresponding positions The edit screen will always appear at this position Make sure that buttons located in edit screens do not contain input variables since this would result in an editor again The lists below contain the key functions you should insert into the corresponding ed itor screen at minimum Decimal Cursor Left Cursor Right Plus Minus Decimal point Home Help Clear Otog Hexadecimal Cursor Left Cursor Right Plus Minus Home Help Clear Oto9 3 111 S TRON Tutorial AtoF Binary Cursor Left Cursor Right Plus Minus Home Help Clear Oand1 Increment Cursor Left Cursor Right Home Help Clear Alphanumeric Cursor Left Cursor Right Plus Minus Decimal point Home Help Shift Clear Otog atoz If you configure a Shift button the following numbers are superimposed Owith 1with 2with 3 with 4with 5with 6with amp 7 With 8 with 9with 3 112 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 7 Working with Recipes Various logically related variables can be organized into units known as recipes Un like screen variables recipe variables are not transferred to the
197. e to Store on page 2 aN See chapter Create Project Folder Template or Library Terminal Type on page 2 4 See chapter Create Project Folder or Template Protocol Type on page 2 5 3 110 SUTRON Tutorial 3 6 Working with Edit Screens When you are configuring touch screen terminals a specific editor is available for ev ery input variable You can launch the editor by pressing the input variable Five dif ferent types of edit screens are available depending on the variable type Decimal to edit decimal number variables Hexadecimal to edit hexadecimal number variables Binary to edit binary variables Increment Alphanumerical to edit alphanumerical variables For each variable the appropriate editor is automatically used When a free display area in the edit screen is pressed the editor is closed and the previous screen is displayed again However the data is not adopted in this case You can adopt the data by clicking the output area of the variable editor display The editor is then also closed To simplify the configuration process you can use the editors provided as a tem plate In your edit screen you should include one button for each key to simulate and one button to display the variable value Note To save memory space only around 70 of the screen surface should be used up by edit screens You can position the edit screen by dragging th
198. e upper limit is defined in the user interface If you delete the terminal message text from the user interface no terminal message will be issued but the maximum permitted value will be entered instead 2 10 10 2 6 Terminal Message 3 Value Too Small You are attempting to enter a value into a variable field of the editor that is below the variable s lower limit The lower limit is defined in the user interface If you delete the terminal message text from the user interface no terminal message will be issued but the minimum permitted value will be entered instead 2 63 S TRON Programming 2 10 10 2 7 Terminal Message 4 Replace Battery A test performed on the battery indicated that its capacity has fallen below the limit value This test is repeated every 60 minutes To avoid loss of data when replacing the battery the information in the respective operating device s user manual must be complied with The same message appears when you remove the battery switching the device off at this point will however result in the battery backed data being lost 2 10 10 2 8 Terminal Message 5 Message Overflow Indicates that the system is unable to process the external messages quickly enough On display of this message one message has already been lost 2 10 10 2 9 Terminal Message 6 New Message This text is displayed when the operating device has received a new external mes sage whose priority exceeds the programmed th
199. e value is just displayed For password entry you can specify the field type in more detail 3 3 3 4 1 Input Select the field type Input to enable operators to change the value of a variable on the operating device The value of the variables is loaded from the controller when the screen is accessed If you select the attribute Cyclical the system constantly updates the value of the variables based on the interval specified in the polling time Before input the operator must press the Data Release key The operator can only change the value of the variables once the status LED for the data release is lit Use the Enter key to write the value to the controller The operator must then press the Data Release key The status LED for the data release switches off 3 3 3 4 2 Output Select the field type Output to only display the value of the variables but not allow the operator to change the value The value of the variables is loaded from the controller when the screen is accessed If you select the attribute Cyclical the system constantly updates the value of the variables based on the interval specified in the polling time 3 3 3 4 3 Password You can use the additional attribute Password to determine for an alphanumeric vari able that the password is not visible on the operating device when it is entered Instead of displaying the values entered the system displays the operator a string of X when the password is entered
200. ea 2 71 Supplementary functions polling times 2 71 Supplementary functions Reset Running Time Meters sssssssssti ramener 2 72 Supplementary functions screensaver 2 77 Supplementary functions Set Running Time Metes usines tin aeann iiaa aonais 2 73 LME 222 en hate R 2 72 Supplementary functions Unicode 2 73 Suppressing the display of terminal MESSAGES ansia neoads 3 127 Symbolic NAMES 3 7 SYMBOLS sesinin osai oaaae 1 1 2 78 System defaults 2 35 System defaults base screens 2 36 System defaults identifier 2 35 System defaults reference screen 2 37 System defaults standard format 2 37 System icon 3 124 System screens 3 3 System variables Basic functions 3 55 Communication SER1 cssceeeeeseees 3 60 Communication SER2 3 65 EAO FRERE ER RE 3 101 Help miennes 3 103 Image parameters 3 109 Loadable character set 3 98 Loop through operation 3 97 Maintenance service 3 98 Menu control Keys 3 80 Parallel message system 3 76 Password 3 88 Print lOQS 55h neue ins 3 105 Printer control 3 79 Real time clock 3 67 FROCIDOS rares menant 3 90 Script processing 3 1
201. each screen you can program specific softkeys or function keys to allow you to jump to other screens You can also program cursor keys to open other screens Furthermore you can use the function keys to change variable values If you use the same screen names in all languages you can use global screen ele ments to design similar screens Global screen elements for example global vari ables appear in each screen with the same name 2 10 2 1 Screen General The general parameters for a screen are divided into the following areas Number Value of the ScreenOffset system variable Options Number Each screen of a project has a unique number If you do not enter a number the next consecutive number is automatically assigned You can use the screen number to carry out the following for screens Enter screens in a text list and display as a screen menu Switch screens over from the controller Write documentation for screens 2 37 S TRON Programming Value of the ScreenOffset variable Enter a value to be used to multiplex controller variables If a screen is called up with screen offset the offset value is entered in the ScreenOffset system variable At run time the offset value is added to the address of a controller variable in this screen that is multiplexed with the ScreenOffset sys tem variable Example If the screen offset is 20 and the basic address of the controller variable
202. ed digits increases from right to left There are no blanks between the digits Significance 103 102 10 10 107 102 Displayed 123 45D 0 1 2 3 4 5 3 3 3 11 2 BCD Number A BCD number must be saved in the controller in BCD format The operating device can interpret and display up to eight digits The significance of the displayed digits increases from right to left There are no blanks between the digits The value can be displayed with leading zeros Significance 104 108 10 10 10 Displayed 1234D 0 1 2 3 4 3 3 4 Background Image Background images are screen elements that are overlaid by every other element contained in the screen You can display as many background images as you wish in a screen Select an image that has already been created using the Images function as a back ground image and assign another name and different attributes to the image for this function If background images are superimposed over one another you can define the link principle by which the pixels are to be overlaid You can use the SET OR and XOR link options depending on the terminal type With SET the rear image is overlaid by the front image in such a way that the over laid part of the lower image is no longer visible hinten at the back Figure 8 14 Background image SET linked Using OR a link is created between the pixels where the logic is gt inclusive
203. ed format on operating devices equipped with a LC display Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Not inverted Inverted 3 4 1 8 LedBackLight Function Brightness of the backlighting of LC displays Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Depends on the operating device type gt IS The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure Adhere to the values for the upper and lower limits as specified in the user manual for the relevant operating device 3 4 1 9 TurnOnTemp Function Temperature value at which the display is automatically switched on Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Display OFF Display ON 3 57 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 1 10 OsLanguage Function For multilingual projects this variable is used for online language selection Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number
204. ed to the message memory in parallel Here attention must be paid that the printer can only process one print job at one time Every print request must be ended before any further print request is started by the system You can influence message output to a printer with the system variable Repman RepPrint The settings that apply when the formatted type of printout is selected are the same as those selected for the display of messages in the message screen 3 141 S TRON Tutorial The settings for the printout can be changed during operation on the operating de vice As the output consists of a pure text file the message can also be read by a host computer or a PC With a further system variable PrintAllRepLong the full length of the message can be output 3 8 6 3 Erasing the Message Memory Externally The internal message memory of the serial message system can be erased exter nally that is from the controller To do this a symbolic variable name for the delete variable must be specified in the Message System option of the system parameters in the programming software Two bytes are needed in the controller for the variable The operating device always checks the delete variable in the controller once it has received the delete sequence write the control code 7FFE to the serial message channel The internal message memory is erased when the delete variable contains the bit pattern E216 The delete variable inc
205. eeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseenees 3 152 STAT Printing amp Print Log 428 asinautee denies 3 152 3 11 12 Printing a Data Set 3 153 SUTRON Overall Table of Contents 3 11 13 Set Clock in Operating Device 3 153 3 11 14 Data Set Transfer from Controller to Operating Device Block Mode une nn nn 3 153 3 11 15 Data Set Transfer from Operating Device to Controller 3 153 3 11 16 Send Keyboard Image to Controller 0 ceccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 154 3 11 17 Data Set Transfer from Controller to Operating Device Single MOG seisccsshcccdecs ceteeaiehtabedevin epee sedeeesectessaeeeaveedbessdeceeuthazansertee 3 154 3 11 18 Erase Serial Message Memory 3 154 3 11 19 Refresh Message System 3 154 3 12 Working with a Real Time Clock in the Operating Device 3 155 3 12 1 Date and Time Image assassins aiesanetisnunne nid 3 155 3 12 2 Setting the Real Time Clock from the Controller n 3 156 3 12 3 Transferring the Real Time to the Controller 3 156 3 13 Working with the Help Function eee eeeecaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaea 3 156 3 13 1 Help Screen for Screens 3 157 3 13 2 Help Screen for Input Variable 3 157 3 13 3 Help Screen for Message Screens 3 157 3 14 Working with Function Keys Softkey Functions eeeeeeeeeee 3 158 3 14 1 Direct Selector Keys cceecccescseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeenaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaes 3 158 3 14 2 Function Keys in the Controller
206. eens are located at nodes of the network These screens contain a selection field from which you can choose the names of other screens In each input output screen you can use control keys function keys and buttons to access all other screens You can select different system screens for each language of a project 3 2 2 System Screens System screens are based on the input output screen type Some restrictions apply due to the compulsory initialization phase and the fact that no communication has yet taken place with the controller System screens facilitate programming and allow the system to become directly op erable In this way the initialization phase becomes a fixed component of the project You can select any screen as the system screen As all screens are created on a language specific basis you can define other screens as system screens for each language As no communication has yet been established with the controller during the initial ization phase the following restrictions apply to system screens The setup screen and startup screen can not be accessed by selecting a screen externally Nocontroller variables can be displayed on the setup screen and startup screen 3 2 2 1 Setup Screen You can only access the setup screen if you select the Enter key or the Setup button during the initialization phase the startup screen is displayed for five seconds On the setup screen it may be useful to include t
207. efore the current print log is printed 2 10 8 6 Print Logs Subprint Logs To link a print log with one or more subprint logs select the desired subprint logs from the left list box Available Subprint Logs You use the gt button to transfer the selected entries to the right list box Linked Sub print Logs Using the gt gt button will transfer all of the entries to the right list box To remove entries from the right list box mark them and use the lt button You use the lt lt button to remove all entries from the right list box 2 10 8 7 Print Log Text Text You can use static text both for printable and non printable comments in a print log Select the Non printable element check box if you only wish to display and not print the static text 2 10 8 8 Print Log Representation Representation You can use attributes to influence how print log elements are displayed From the Prefix and Postfix fields select escape sequences if you do not wish to have an element output in the standard way You can only select escape sequences already defined You can select deselect standard attributes using the check box in the Output at tributes field 2 10 8 9 Print Log Variable Type Select a representation type for the variable Click the Edit type button if you wish to define its representation more specifically 2 10 8 10 Print Log Variable Reference Double click the name of a variable in the tree structure to sele
208. elow to export the text items of a language 1 Select the language in the left column project languages 2 From the Edit menu select the menu item Export texts 3 Enter a storage location and a file name in the dialog that next appears and con firm with Save An output window displaying the current export status appears Once the export is complete the directory path and file name of the export file are shown in the Export file path names column of the Translation support window The display of the directories and file names indicates whether a language has al ready been translated The export file can be translated into another language using any text editor Make sure not to edit the first two lines in the file Translation support import Translation support export Managing multilingual applications Structure of the export import file 2 4 10 1 Translation Support Export Use this function to export all of the project text elements and translate them exter nally Follow the steps below to start the translation support tool export function 1 Select a language in the project tree 2 From the Tools menu select Translation support Export texts The Save text elements of the language to a file dialog appears You can change the predefined path which is saved for each specific language to the database The same path is proposed if you want to import the texts at a later stage 3 Confirm with OK The output win
209. en EXPO enirn annaa aia i 2 25 2 413 Tools Menu Optimizing a Database 2 25 2 0 JH IDM NU 888 hommes mhstteiin Mental 2 26 2 5 1 Help Menu Contents 2 26 2 5 2 Help Menu Index en aaa aana aaa a 2 26 2 5 3 Help Menu Browse 2 cc eeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaanaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesnnaneaees 2 26 2 5 4 Help Menu About 2 26 2 5 5 Help Menu S tron Homepage cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeseeeeeeenaeeseaes 2 27 2 5 6 Help Menu Netviewer ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesnnaeens 2 27 2 5 7 Help Menu Tip Of The Day 2 27 2 6 Terminal Ty p isi scsi enivns cies a ieee ee 2 28 2 6 1 Terminal Type Change cccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeees 2 28 2 6 2 Terminal Type Memory Size 2 28 i S TRON Overall Table of Contents 2 6 3 Terminal Type Touch Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 29 2 6 4 Terminal Type Color Palette cccccceeesceeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeesesaeeteneeeees 2 29 2 6 5 Terminal Type Fonts 2ii c2008 acai dites cence ieee 2 29 2 6 6 Terminal Type Terminal Orientation cccccceceseeeeereeeetteeeeeneeees 2 30 27 COMMEN iy han landes adiaui ninen aaa aaa iaaa 2 30 28 D moOoMoOod ss Rs ans annee ser desde den tr rrrer 2 30 29 COMMUNICATION decree etiseetelcislbavned dient einen eat dt 2 31 2 9 1 Protocol Selection 2 31 2 9 2 PC gt gt Terminaler ioniese a aa 2 31 2 9
210. end below the list indicates whether the items are unchanged new or modified An arrow pointing up wards in the icon center indicates the items to be imported Press the space bar to highlight and select any items you do not want to import The import arrow will disap pear If the space bar is pressed again the import arrow will reappear Two additional items with the values 0 and 8224 are created when operand texts are generated In this case the text consists of a blank 2 23 S TRON Programming 2 4 11 6 Import Importing into a Text List Step 1 During step 1 of the import process you should specify whether to import Sequential function texts for diagnosis purposes in screens showing the sequen tial function status or Operand texts for diagnostic purposes in screens showing sequential function di agnostic information The Number of Entries To Create area allows you to choose whether you want to cre ate 32 entries 2 64 entries 3 32 entries automatically from the directory For directories with fewer than 32 en tries the remaining entries are represented by blanks 4 as many entries as possible automatically from the data In addition you can decide to import the entire contents of a file or one line only Click Next gt to continue this procedure 2 4 11 7 Import Importing into a Text List Step 2 Importing from one line Enter the information using the Bosch syntax into the inpu
211. es i Terminal sets the Editing Status Bit in CBR t Operator presses the enter key i Operator enters a variable value t Operator presses the data release key t Status LED Data Release is ON Operator presses the enter key Y Terminal inactivates the data release internally Status LED Data Release switches OFF AA Terminal sets the Refresh Request Bit in CBR to 1 Terminal sets the Editing Status Bit in CBR to 0 Y AA Terminal inactivates the data release internally Status LED Data Release flashes Terminal sets the Editing Request Bit in CBR to 0 t Controller refreshes the relevant variables with current values Controller sets the External Data Release Bit in CBW to 0 not mandatorily required Figure 3 12 Flow diagram for PLC handshake 3 3 3 9 2 With Enter The operator must press the Enter key to transfer the value of the variables from the operating device to the controller 3 30 nN 2 SUTRON Tutorial gt 3 3 3 9 3 With or Enter Each time the operator presses the Plus and Minus keys he transfers the incre mented or decremented value to the controller If the operator uses the 0 to 9 keys to enter the value he must then press the Enter key 3 3 3 9 4 For Each Change Upon any modificat
212. es to combine them as desired 3 3 5 3 5 Text Field Properties In the Text input box enter the text you would like to have displayed on the button The text will be automatically wrapped to the next line when you reach the right hand frame of the button A word is not split in this case but moved to the next line entirely instead If words are too long they must be split manually Blue arrows beside the input box indicate that the vertical expansion of the button is insufficient for displaying the entire text You can check how it will appear in the Preview box For this purpose select the Dis play preview check box Align orientation the text as follows Left align Center Right align Select the Underline check box to underline the text fully Select a font in the Font area Proceed as follows 1 Click the button 2 Highlight a font in the list To add a new font to the list of fonts click the New font button 3 3 5 3 6 Screen Variables for Buttons In the Representation Type area select how the variable values should be dis played To configure the type more in more detail click the Edit Type button If you have selected numerical or textual representation you can choose a font under the Representation area To add a new font to the list of fonts click the New font button Select the Underline check box to have the variable value or text fully underlined Select an existing help screen from the Hel
213. ess LED5 LED5 LED6 LED6 LED7 LED7 LED8 LED8 4 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash Byte Address LED9 LED9 LED10 LED10 LED11 LED11 LED12 LED12 5 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED13 LED13 LED14 LED14 LED15 LED15 LED16 LED16 6 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED17 LED17 LED18 LED18 LED19 LED19 LED20 LED20 7 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED21 LED21 LED22 LED22 LED23 LED23 LED24 LED24 8 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED25 LED25 LED26 LED26 LED27 LED27 LED28 LED28 9 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED29 LED29 LED30 LED30 LED31 LED31 LED32 LED32 10 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash Byte Address LED33 LED33 LED34 LED34 LED35 LED35 LED36 LED36 11 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED37 LED37 LED38 LED38 LED39 LED39 LED40 LED40 12 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED41 LED41 LED42 LED42 LED43 LED43 LED44 LED44 13 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash ByteAddress LED45 LED45 LED46 LED46 LED47 LED47 LED48 LED48 14 On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash On Off Flash See chapter Write Coordination Byte on page 3 168 E See chapter Serial Message Channel on page 3 164 3 162 S SUTRON Tutorial Word Oriented Polling Area 3 15 2 The word
214. estDSNr Positive Decimal Number Destination Data Set Number for Copy Process DSCopy Softkey Selection Text Variable Activate Copy Data Set DSDelete Softkey Selection Text Variable Delete Data Set DSDownload Softkey Selection Text Variable Load Data Set in Controller DSDnloadBreak Softkey Selection Text Variable Stop Data Set Transfer DSDnloadState Selection Text Variable Display Transfer Status ActDSName Alphanumeric Variable Enter Name for RAM Data Set SelectRezeptNr Selection Text Decimal Number Display Select Recipe Number TabPgUp Softkey Page Up TabPgDn Softkey Page Down Break Softkey Cancel Input LoadDSName Selection Text Variable Display Name of Last Data Set Transferred StartSave Softkey Selection Text Variable Data Set Transfer from Operating Device to PC SaveState Selection Text Variable Display Transfer Status StartRestore Softkey Selection Text Variable Data Set Transfer from PC to Operating Device RestoreState Selection Text Variable Display Transfer Status RestoreLineNr Positive Decimal Number Display Current Transfer Line StartRezPrint Softkey Selection Text Variable Print Active Data Set RezPrintState Selection Text Variable Display Printer Status StartUpload Softkey Selection Text Variable Data Set Transfer from Controller to Operating Device UploadDSNr Positive Decimal Number Destination Data Set Number for Upload UploadState Selection Text Variable Display T
215. ete output the interface is used temporarily The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure If you use the interface permanently for message output it will not be possible to send any other print jobs to the printer If you use the interface temporarily for message output messages will not be printed while other print jobs are being printed 3 4 6 4 RepoutNr Function Allows you to output a message number along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 OFF Hi 1 ON 3 4 6 5 RepoutDate Function Allows you to output the date along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 OFF pi 1 ON 3 4 6 6 RepoutTime Function Allows you to output the time along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 OFF 1 ON 3 71 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 6 7 RepoutAnzYear Function Specifies how the date appears when the message is output Data type Numeric Representation Po
216. etrofit the operating device or use the appropriate driver version The subcode specifies the level of the SUCOnet K card KEYBOARD MODUL KEYBOARD MODUL HARDWARE VERSION NOT CONFORM TO DRIVER VERSION The program level of the keyboard card and the current firmware are not compatible Retrofit the operating device The subcode specifies the level of the keyboard card FIRMWARE UPDATE SUCCESSFUL FIRMWARE UPDATE SUCCESSFUL AUTO REBOOT Indicates a successful update operation The operating device reboots automatically SYSTEM ERROR SYSTEM ERROR CODE SUBCODE RETRIES A fatal error has been encountered If this error message is displayed contact the S tron electronic hotline Before calling make a note of the firmware and hardware version UNEXPECTED INTERUPT UNEXPECTED INTERUPT NR IP CALL HOTLINE An unexpected interrupt has occurred Contact the S tron electronic hotline Before calling make a note of the interrupt number NR and the program counter number IP 3 133 S TRON Tutorial FLASH NOT ERASEABLE FLASH NOT ERASEABLE Is displayed after the device has been switched on or prior to a download to indicate that the Flash Eprom can not be erased WRONG S3 FILE WRONG S3 FILE Is displayed at the beginning of a download to indicate that the S3 file is not the cor rect type for the operating device being used N
217. evice is switched off and back on again The wrong password is entered A logical 1 is written to the PR bit of the Write coordination byte The system variable ScrchgResPasswd is activated The option Reset Password is selected in the screen parameters of the pass word protected screen 3 9 2 Password Screen and Password Functions You can create a password query screen This screen will then appear when you try to go to a password protected screen and you have not already entered a password with sufficient authorization As soon as you enter a password with sufficient authorization in the password query screen and select the Enter key the system opens the screen previously selected No restrictions apply to the other content for example texts other variables and softkeys in the screen For each screen of the user interface you can specify whether password protection will be activated after you exit the screen If the operator has not entered a valid password it must be possible to exit the screen You can program the cursor key Home to do this for example If you do not create a password query screen the operator must enter a password in screens specifically provided for this purpose You can deactivate password protection entirely by writing the value 1 to the system variable Passwdinactive The operating device then behaves as if each screen were created with an edit and view level of 0 The system var
218. example has a precision of 6 minutes 3 11 Working with Control Codes You can use hexadecimal control codes to control special functions on the operating device The control codes are transferred to the operating device using the polling area The operating device interprets the control code and subsequently triggers the corresponding function The following functions can be requested by the controller Table 3 43 Control Codes Code Function 7FC7 Delete data logger 1 7FC8 Delete data logger 2 7FC9 Delete data logger 3 7FCA Delete data logger 4 7FCB Trigger data logger 1 7FCC Trigger data logger 2 7FCD Trigger data logger 3 7FCE Trigger data logger 4 7FCF Write values of the running time meters to the controller 7FEX Switch to another language x language number 7FF2 Automatic data release for scanner module 7FF3 Reload event controlled variable values 7FF4 Transfer single data set from the controller 7FF5 Delete acknowledged messages from serial message memory 7FF6 Cancel printing the print log S TRON 3 149 Tutorial Table 3 43 Control Codes Code Function 7FF7 Printing a print log 7FF8 Printing a data set 7FF9 Set clock in operating device 7FFA Data set transfer from controller to operating device block mode 7FFB Data set transfer from operating device to controller 7FFC Send keyb
219. f the following options you want to apply to the horizontal direction of the selected elements Retain current position Left justification Centering or Right justification 3 54 S SUTRON Tutorial Vertical Select which of the following options you want to apply to the vertical direction of the selected elements Retain current position Top justification Centering or Bottom justification 3 4 Working with System Variables You can use system variables to control the operating device s internal functions You can display and change the value of system variables either in a screen or using any suitable representation type function or softkey When you link a system variable with a function key or softkey the following rules apply Do not use the same key to link a screen change and a system variable You do not have to link Set 1 and Reset 0 with the same key except if you are setting up a jogging mode Do not add the names of system variables to the variable list In the same way as you use the name of a system variable for a controller variable the function is lost for the operating device 3 4 1 Basic Functions IntEraseEprom Delete Flash memory MainVersion Display firmware version ComVersion Display protocol version UserVersion Display project version Boot Trigger reboot LcdContrast Contrast setting display Lced
220. fers only to the display of messages in the operating device s mes sage field The same options are available for outputting messages to the logging printer You can choose from four variants for outputting to the printer 3 123 S TRON Tutorial Serial Message Sys tem Parallel Message System 1 Printthe entire message SER2 reserved exclusively for message output 2 Formatted printout SER2 reserved exclusively for message output 3 Print the complete message SER2 reserved only temporarily for message out put 4 Formatted printout SER2 reserved only temporarily for message output From the controller you can erase all acknowledged messages if you write the bit pattern E216h to the controller address Delete Messages and write the control code 7FF5h to the serial message channel If you want to delete all messages you need to write the control code 7FFEh to the serial message channel If you want to use this function of the operating device you must assign a variable for deleting messages For the parallel message system you must enter a Variable for Status Messages as the start address of the data area where the messages are stored in the controller in bit coded form You can also specify a name for a Variable for Acknowledging Status Messages of the same size You also define the number of bytes to define the Size in Bytes of the area for the status messages in the controller You can define a maximum
221. ffer size is 32 bytes Example The size of the variant buffer is 1 byte The bit pattern is as follows LSB to MSB 11110011 The text list is as follows Table 2 9 Sample text list Number Value Text 0 0 Blue 1 10 Green 2 20 Red 3 30 White 4 40 Black 5 50 Orange 6 60 Yellow 7 70 Brown The selection text variable in a screen can thus display the following texts Blue Green Red White Yellow Brown 2 10 10 1 3 Text Lists Editing Font Select the font you wish to use to edit the text lists in the programming software 2 10 10 1 4 Text Attributes of the Text List You can select the foreground and background colors as text attributes of the text list You can also select the attributes Underline Flashing and Inverse attributes using the check boxes The available text attributes depend on the selected operating device type The Attributes are valid check box is used to activate the selected attributes 2 59 S TRON Programming 2 10 10 2 Terminal Messages Terminal messages are generated by the operating system as a result of internal plausibility checks It is activated immediately after the corresponding event has oc curred Pending terminal messages are signaled to the operator bya flashing Help key status LED and setting the StateHelp system variable to the logical value 1 The text of the terminal messag
222. field it is entered repeatedly 3 8 SUTRON Tutorial If you want to start a script after entering the variable value select the name of a script from the Post editing script field 3 3 3 3 2 Standard The significance of the displayed digits increases from right to left You can display places either with leading zeros and or a decimal point The representation refers to the data types bit byte word and Lword The maximum length depends on the data type There are no blanks between the characters The variable appears in the con troller either in binary format or in special timer or counter formats Example A decimal number with two decimal places 108 102 10 10 107 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 Significance Displayed 123 45 Table 3 4 Key functions for decimal numbers of the type Standard Key Function Oto9 Enters the numbers 0 to 9 Decimal point Enters the decimal point Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Oto9 Enters the numbers 0 to 9 Decimal point Enters the decimal point Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the ne
223. follow requests and re action performance deteriorates There is no universal recipe however 3 164 S TRON Tutorial The options available primarily depend on the individual project However atthe very least times greater than 100 ms should be preselected For further information please contact our support hotline 3 15 6 Size of the Polling Area Depending on the data type and operating device the polling area has a length of up to 23 bytes The entry allows adjustment to suit the area actually used if you can avoid using the image of the status LED or part of this The basic setting for all oper ating devices is a length of 12 bytes 3 15 7 Read Coordination Byte The Read Coordination byte is used for handshake and data coordination with the controller If necessary the controller reads the Read Coordination byte and evaluates the in dividual bits Table 3 54 Structure of the Read coordination byte Bit Abbrevia Function tion 0 EA Editing Request 1 EZ Editing Status 2 RA Refresh Request 3 LM Liveness Flag 4 DDA Data Set Download Active 5 Not used 6 7 The Read Coordination byte only works together with the Write Coordination byte 3 15 7 1 Editing Request The operating device uses the Editing Request bit to indicate to the controller that the value of a variable will be changed For this purpose the operating device writes a logical 1 to the Editing
224. formed the communication partner must be advised of the recipe number and data set number 2 53 S SUTRON Programming In the Transfer from Controller area enter the name of the variable for the recipe and data set number To do this click the button The controller must write the recipe number and data set number to this variable before data is transferred to the operat ing device Specify whether the data sets should be requested by the number or name If they are to be requested by the name enter the maximum length of the name Recipe buffer Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 4 by the operator new data set Upload from C Start PLC single address Upload to Recipe buffer existing data set Upload from Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 3 by the operator Input of the destination data set number via the system variable UploadDSNr PLC single address Input of the destination data set number via the system variable UploadDSNr Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 2 by the operator Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 1 by the operator Not enough memory or Not enough memory Yes Yes data set is protected
225. g that the wizard shows you to create a new project folder 1 Select an empty template or a predefined template 2 Select Project or Template or Library 3 Click Next 2 3 S TRON Programming 2 2 2 2 Create Project Folder Template or Library Place to Store The Create project folder template or library place to store dialog is the second dialog that the wizard shows you to create a new project folder Select the directory where you want to save the new project folder If you do not se lect a directory the programming software s root directory is automatically used The storage location last entered is automatically offered again A list with the last 8 project folders is shown beneath the input field Follow the steps below variant 1 1 Enter a name for the new project folder into the input field overwrite existing en try if necessary Make sure the file extension is correct Template File name tst Project File name tsw Library File name tsb 2 Click the Next gt button Follow the steps below variant 2 1 Click Select 2 Select a directory in the dialog window that appears 3 Enter a name for the new project folder in the File name field Make sure the file extension is correct Template File name tst Project File name tsw Library File name tsb 4 Confirm your actions by clicking the Save button 5 Click the Next gt button Follow the steps below variant 3
226. ge If the image is inserted from a file the link to the original image is lost The program ming software saves a copy of the image which you can not edit 2 78 SUTRON Programming Follow the steps below to insert an image from an existing file 1 Enter a name for the image into the Image name column 2 Complete the entry with Enter 3 Inthe Insert new image dialog box select the Insert image from a file button The Open dialog appears 4 Navigate to the desired file 5 Click the file to select it 6 Click Open to confirm your selection On the right side of the window the image is now displayed in original size You can use the sizing handles to resize the image The new numeric values for height and width are automatically entered in the table on the left You can also enter values in the table and view the resulting image displayed on the right The image is completed and you can now insert another image into the table Follow the steps below to use another program to insert a new image OLE The image file already exists 1 Enter a name for the image into the Image name column 2 Complete the entry with Enter 3 Inthe Insert new image dialog box select the Insert image as OLE object but ton The Insert object dialog appears 4 Select the radio button Create from File 5 Click Browse The Browse dialog appears 6 Navigate to the desired file 7 Click the file to select it 8
227. graphic The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Bar type variables function as follows You can use the representation type Bars only to output variable values The variable values are refreshed either cyclically or one time when the screen is opened You use the height and width values to determine whether the bars run horizontally or vertically From a particular reference point the dimension of a bar can be inapositive direction in a negative direction in both directions Specify the width and height in the unit Character The entire bar can only ever ac cept the size of a multiple of a character When the controller values are output how ever the bar changes its dimension by pixel size Use two limit values to define the range of values that a bar will display Use the first limit value to determine the value of the bar at the left or lower end Use the second limit value to determine the value of the bar at the right or upper end DE Figure 3 1 Horizontal bars 3 22 S TRON Tutorial Bi Figure 3 2 Vertical bars The range of values is limited to values from 32768 to 32767 To display several bars in a screen ensure that the controller addresses are consec utive and contiguous This will speed up data transfer You can use four fil
228. gt gt Printer amp Scanner Interface Parameters The operating device is equipped with an RS232 interface This interface is used to connect the device with a logging printer or a scanner The interface uses default values when the programming system is started for the first time Table 2 5 Default settings for the RS232 interface Parameter Value Baud rate 19200 Baud Parity Odd Data bits 7 Stop bits 1 Handshake Software handshake 2 9 3 2 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner Scanner Parameters Scanner extension To run a scanner on the SER2 interface of the operating device you must first acti vate the use option for scanner parameters Scanner parameters Enter the default and initialization parameters These parameters initialize the scan ner and define the specific data transfer information In the Default field enter an ASCII string that activates the scanner In the Initialization field enter an ASCII string that configures the scanner The parameters entered can not be validated since you can not select a specific scanner type You can connect any scanner with an RS232 interface that transmits ASCII characters Scanner lt gt Terminal protocol Press Transfer data with ENTER key Data take over with ENTER key if you want to press the Enter key every time a bar code is scanned in order to enter the data If you are using a scanner that requires confirmation of receipt on
229. h a which is used as a help key to switch to the terminal message screen Note When working with system icons configure one icon for each terminal message In addition define a default image for the system icon To do this go to the Touch pa rameters of the operating device properties Repeat the following steps for each terminal message or use a project template Select a terminal message Click Touch terminalsin the properties window There enter the system icon Table 3 34 Terminal messages and icons Number Brief Descriptions System icon 1 Wrong format eo 2 Value too large 3 Value too small 4 Replace battery 7 X 5 Message overflow 6 New message New 7 Message buffer full 8 Invalid screen no 9 Invalid message no 1 10 Print log invalid 11 Interface in use Lt 4 12 Invalid password Va 13 Password unchanged f3 EL 14 Overvoltage pz 15 Data set protected 3 125 S SUTRON Tutorial Table 3 34 Terminal messages and icons Number Brief Descriptions System icon 16 Illegal data set 17 Data set unknown 18 Data set memory full 19 Data set active 20 Data set transfer 21 Password missing 22 Editing mode active 23 Data set file error 24 Data set format 25 Number invalid 26 Loop through active 27 No data set addre
230. he fields require the Cursor Up Page Up Cursor Down and Page Down navigation buttons For message fields you additionally need the Enter and Clear buttons Under Image Symbol for Keys select the relevant images or symbols acting as but ton contents for the relevant buttons 3 3 12 Output Variables Output variables are numeric or alphanumeric memory content from the connected controller The variable values are requested from the controller if required and dis played at the program location using the corresponding representation type 3 3 12 1 Once Off and Cyclic Output Variables Pure output variables are transferred once from the controller when the screen is be ing called up and are displayed in the screen Outputting the variable only once helps improve communication performance and can be used for all variables such as setpoint values constants and parameters that rarely or never change All output variables can be displayed as scaled or formatted Cyclical output variables are used to display actual values and values that continu ously change while a screen is being output 3 49 S TRON Tutorial CIE You specify the cycle time with the polling time This means that you know at this stage how often the display of the actual values will be refreshed The scaling and formatting of cyclical output variables in particular of decimal num bers as floating point numbers requires a corresponding computing t
231. he following functions Activate deactivate download function Set protocol parameters Set date and time Display firmware level of the operating device If you program these functions using system variables the operator can select the corresponding parameter from text lists 3 3 SUTRON Tutorial 3 2 2 1 1 Password Protection for Setup Screen A special procedure applies to password protection on the setup screen If you set the system variable SerchgPasswd as the first editable variable on the setup screen you can enter the password independently of the access level excep tion 255 This also allows you to set password protection for the setup screen For the setup screen the access level only impacts at the edit level meaning the content is always visible to the operator 3 2 2 1 2 Suppressing the Setup Screen You can choose to hide the setup screen if you do not need to display it To do this set the access level for this screen to the value 255 The setup screen can then not be accessed from the startup screen using the Enter key or the Enter but ton 3 2 2 2 Startup Screen The startup screen appears for about five seconds after you switch on the operating device This time is fixed and this can not be changed On the startup screen you can only display static texts and system variables Due to the time sequence used it is not possible to enter variables here When the startup screen
232. he lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Delete No function 3 3 3 3 7 Floating Point Number In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or event controlled In case of input variables you can enter upper and lower limit values for the range monitoring area supervision which are not to be exceeded Assign a color to every limit value to indicate that the upper or the lower value has been exceeded Enter the field length for the display format The field length comprises the Sign Decimal Point Signs in front of the decimal point and Signs after the decimal point fractional digits There are a number of options to display the variable value with fractional digits Absolute Displays the value with a fixed number of fractional digits 3 16 SUTRON Tutorial Global units offset Displays the value with a variable number of fractional digits The number of digits stored in a variable is subtracted from the specified number of fractional digits Enter the variable into the status information of the Fractional digit control field Global units offset Display
233. he protocol type 1 Select a protocol type from the list 2 Clickthe Finish button You can also return to the previous page To do so click the Back lt button 2 2 3 File Menu Save Project Folder Select the Save project folder menu item to save the current project folder This ac tion overwrites the existing file rather than creating a new one 2 2 4 File Menu Close Project Folder Use Close project folder from the menu to complete processing of the current project folder If you have made additional changes to the project folder since the last time you saved the system asks you whether you want to save the project folder before clos ing 2 2 5 File Menu Exit To quit the programming software use the Exit menu item If a project folder is still open this is closed first If you have made changes to the current project folder before closing the system asks you whether you want to save the project folder 2 3 View Menu The view menu offers the following menu items Zoom out Zoomin Restore workspace Close all windows Project folder Properties Tools Output Zoom in If an editor is open i e screen editor the view on the screen is zoomed out by one step each per click on the menu item 2 5 SUTRON Programming Zoom out If an editor is open i e screen editor the view on the screen is zoomed in by one step each per click on the menu item Rest
234. he space bar to select or deselect the highlighted entry for the import process This is a toggle function Complete the procedure with Finish To return to the previous step click Back The data in the list are compared in one direction only The comparison is always re stricted to import data gt gt variable list data For this reason the status always refers to the variable list entry 2 22 S TRON Programming 2 4 11 5 Import Text List Items from File The programming software provides a function for generating text list items from Bosch SXS files WINSPS 2 11 or higher This option is available in conjunction with the BUEP19E and PROFIBUS DP protocols To use the import function you require a controller that supports the formats listed above First activate this controller then open the text list editor containing the text list into which the import will take place Follow the steps below 1 If necessary create a new controller that supports the required format Now ac tivate this controller 2 Edit the text list to be imported into or create a new text list 3 The Tools Import Text List Items from File menu item is now enabled activate it You can use the import procedure to Fill an empty text list Compare existing text list items with the import file This requires you to select the text list items entries to be compared Only selected lines are included in the comparison process Any
235. hine Settings for Products The variables Feedrate Setpoint Value Axis 1 and Setpoint Value Axis 2 are defined as floating point numbers or fixed point numbers The variable Cutting Angle is de fined as an integer and the variable Material as a selection text coded text The values for manufacturing the products Clamp and Shaft must be stored as data sets Whenever another product is to be manufactured the data set of the product to be manufactured next can be loaded into the controller The following check list contains all of the elements that are required and useful for creating and handling a recipe with data sets 3 113 S TRON Tutorial The recipe itself texts and variables Data sets with data set number data set name and variable offset lO screens for the recipe Recipe field in the screen Recipe buffer address for the data area in the controller Variable Data Set Number for Transfer from operating device Variable Recipe Number for Transfer from operating device Variable Data Set Number for Request from controller Variable Recipe Number for Request from controller System variables Table 3 28 System variables for recipes System Vari Linked to Description able SelectDSNr Selection Text Decimal Number Display Select Data Set Number SelectDSName Selection Text Variable Display Select Data Set Names D
236. iable is battery backed that is the deactivation still has an impact after you switch on the operating device again See chapter Passwdlnactive on page 3 89 3 10 Working with Running Time Meters Each operating device has 8 running time meters Each running time meter is assigned a bit in the control byte Using the control byte the controller can influence the running time meters in the operating device 3 147 SUTRON Tutorial Reset Byte Polling Time Transferring counter value If bit X is set in the control byte when polling is carried out the running time meter X is incremented In each case the value of the running time meter is stored in the sys tem variable CounterX Table 3 41 Control byte of the running time meter Bit Counter System Variable 0 1 Counter1 1 2 Counter2 2 3 Counter3 3 4 Counter4 4 5 Counter5 5 6 Counter6 6 7 Counter7 7 8 Counter8 Each running time meter is assigned a bit in the reset byte Using the reset byte the controller can reset the running time meters in the operating device If bit X is set in the reset byte when polling is carried out the running time meter X is reset to 0 Table 3 42 Reset byte of the running time meter Bit Counter System Variable 0 1 Counter1 1 2 Counter2 2 3 Counter3 3 4 Counter4 4 5 Counter5 5 6 Counter6 6 7 Counter7 7 8 Counter8 You use the po
237. iables Various editors or function keys softkeys are suitable for this purpose The acknowl edgment enables the controller to delete the message and initiate another verifica tion 3 140 SUTRON Tutorial 3 8 6 Serial Message System Two bytes are reserved in the cyclical polling area for the transfer of serial messages These two bytes are referred to as the serial message channel The byte order de pends on the selected data type of the polling area see Polling Area The controller writes a 16 bit message number in this message channel The operating device polls the entire polling area of the controller at cyclical intervals and transfers the serial message in the process Upon detecting a message message number gt 0 the operating device stores this message in the internal message memory and resets the serial message channel in the controller to zero 0 The value 0 indicates to the controller that the message has been picked up by the operating device The polling time for the serial message channel is configurable The same procedure is used to address external screens and message screens Whenever the number transmitted corresponds to a screen number this screen is displayed If ascreen and a message text exist for this number the screen message screen full page fault message text is displayed and the associated message text is entered into the message memory Make sure that the message number is alw
238. ice boot Starting the Operating Devices procedure starts The boot procedure also includes additional load procedures which are used to load the operating system the terminal file project and the visu alization runtime 3 22 1 Boot Process The following components are started during the boot process Table 3 82 Boot Process Component Task User Bootloader Initializes the hardware Output of the bootloader version Copies the operating system from the Flash into the SDRAM A progress bar indicates the loading progress Starts the operating system Not visible Operating system Windows CE 5 0 Operating system initializes all driv ers and starts the Launch exe Not visible Launch exe Information on device detailsUpdate of ap plication bootloader operating system The user can stop the boot process with the push of a button Device administration To automatically launch the Not visible AppStarter exe AppStarter exe To launch the TSvisRT_LD exe Not visible TSvisRT_LD exe Copies User application Protocol driver TSvisRT firmware in accordance with the instructions in the TSvisRT_CE INI file into the memory of the operating system Visible only if error messages are issued Unpacks the compressed applica Not visible tion file CB Starts the runtime component Not visible TSvisRT_CE exe TSvisRT_CE exe Visualiza
239. ice to the controller You must write the number of the data set to the variable defined for this purpose In addition you need to define the corresponding variables for the transfer buffers 7FF4h 3 151 S TRON Tutorial Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code 3 11 9 Delete Acknowledged Messages from Serial Message Memory You can use the following control code from the controller to have all acknowledged messages of the operating device s serial message system erased In addition the delete variable must contain the value E216h This is to help avoid unintentional deletion The delete variable is deleted in the system parameters for the serial message system 7FF5h 3 11 10 Cancel Printing the Print Log You can use the following control code from the controller to instruct the printer con nected to the operating device to cancel the current print job for a print log 7FF6h 3 11 11 Printing a Print Log You can use the following control code from the controller to instruct the printer con nected to the operating device to print the print log whose number was written to the variable defined for this purpose 7FF7h The operating device will write one of the following four values back to the variable for the print log number to allow the print process to be monitored Table 3 44 Return values from operating device Value Description 0 Print log printed with no e
240. ification of messages e g according to the area of the plant Further classification of messages according to priority New assignment option for parallel messages For serial message channel Simultaneous screen change and message transfer Simultaneous screen change and message call If this check box is selected a screen change takes place at the same time as the message transfer and the message is stored in the serial message memory This only applies to messages transmitted by the serial message channel and messages to which 8000H was previously added Example The value 800AH is written to the serial message channel In this case screen number 10 is called up and the message with the number 10 assigned is stored in the serial message memory Transfer from the parallel to serial message memory Put message from parallel to serial message memory Store in ser message memory Messages of the parallel message system can be stored in the memory for serial messages This allows parallel messages to be captured that appear for a short time only You can also capture the moment messages appear and disappear using the arrived departed status identifiers 2 45 S TRON Programming With appear disappear status Messages with this parameter are identified by a status attribute at the start of the entire message text The following letters are provided to identify the status You can however re place the
241. ign individual images to the numeric values The numeric values do not need to be contiguous or sorted consecutively Then in a screen create a variable field for the selection image variable In the dialog field for the representation type Selection Image link the vari able with the image list The corresponding image will then be displayed in the oper ating device depending on the controller values used The default image will be dis played for controller values that have not been specified in the image list 3 15 S TRON Tutorial Note that all of the images in an image list must be the same size to ensure that they cover each other completely Furthermore make sure that the images used are not too large to avoid slow display buildup You may need to modify the polling time ac cordingly Table 3 9 Key functions for selection images Key Function 0 9 No function Decimal point No function Plus Selection in ascending order after the final value in the text list is reached the value at top of the image list is se lected next Minus Selection in descending order after the first value in the image list is reached the value at the bottom of the text list is selected next Cursor Right No function Cursor Left No function Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the top level variable t
242. igurable val ues Milliseconds 3 100 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 15 10 KeyResponseTime Function Shows how much time in milliseconds elapses to modify a variable in the controller Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Milliseconds ics You can use this system variable only with touch panels 3 4 16 Editors Editinvers displays editor in inverse mode EditEnter input behavior of editor StatePerm status of status LED for data release EditUpperLimit indicates the upper limit for input editor EditLowerLimit indicates the lower limit for input editor ActEditNumber indicates the variable number of the edit order 3 4 16 1 Editinvers Function Displays the variable inverse while it is edited Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Not inverted Inverted 3 4 16 2 EditEnter Function Controls the cursor when the Enter key is pressed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Cursor changes to the next input
243. imal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Stop data set transfer 3 4 11 14 DSDnloadState Function Displays the status of the data set transfer to the controller Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Data set transfer is requested but not yet released by the controller Data set transfer in progress 3 4 11 15 LoadDSName Function Name of the last data set transferred Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Up to 30 characters If the data set was deleted after being transferred a number of question marks are displayed instead of the name 3 93 S TRON Tutorial 34 11 16 LoadDSNr Function Number of the last data set transferred Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val If the data set was deleted after being transferred the number 0 zero is ues shown 3 4 11 17 StartSave Function Loads data sets to the PC Data type Numeric Represe
244. imal string C any even number of the digits 0 9 or letters A F or a f Example C12 or CAAFF33 ASCII string Any string of characters enclosed between two backslash characters Example This is one ASCII string Comment Any string of characters enclosed between two dollar signs Comments can be inserted in the data set backup file at any position and can stretch across several lines Example This is a comment Any number of separators blanks tab characters or line feed characters can be placed between these language elements The above mentioned language elements are used to create a file with the following structure Start of file identifier Any number of data sets End of file identifier A data set consists of Data set header Any number of data set variables End of data set identifier Table 3 29 Start of file identifier Start of File Identifier Key SFA Parameter none date and time are output by the operating device as a comment 3 121 S TRON Tutorial Table 3 30 End of file identifier End of File Identifier Key SFE Parameter none Table 3 31 Data set header Data Set Header Key SDK Parameter Recipe number data set number data set name as an ASCII string data set size in bytes recipe version number write over identifier Table 3 32 Data set variables Data Set Variables
245. ime and as a result the data is not output in real time The more cyclical data is transferred the longer the reaction time to new values from the controller For these applications select cycle times gt 500 ms To improve the performance of transfer to the controller use data types identically and ensure that the address ranges of a screen are as continuous as possible 3 3 12 2 Formatted Output You can format a numeric variable value to suit an output area Formatting consists of Field length Fractional digits Positive values only Display leading zeros The field length determines the entire length of the output value including signs dec imal points and fractional digits The number of fractional digits gives the operator the impression that a value has been divided however in reality no value has been divided However the variable value must exist in the controller in a correspondingly high resolution Example In the controller the value of a length is stored as a word The range of values is be tween 0 and 65535 The following settings are made for display Decimal number Output Only positive Field length 6 5 decimal point Fractional digits 2 absolute The display area is between 0 00 and 655 35 If the check box Only Positive is not selected the display area changes The value is displayed with a sign You must specify an additional position in the field length for
246. in after a power failure 3 4 1 21 BaseScreenActivate Function Activates deactivates the time controlled change to base screen func tion Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number ues Configurable val Time controlled screen change deactivated Time controlled screen change activated Ie The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 2 Communication SER1 ComDataLenA Number of data bits ComParityA Parity setting ComStopBitsA Number of stop bits ComBaudrateA Baud rate setting ComHandshakeA Handshake setting ComDefaultA Submit parameters ComTimeout Timeout setting ComRetryTimeout Retry time setting ComSlaveNr Network slave number ComErrorCode Memory for last error code ComErrorSubcode Memory for last error subcode 3 60 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 2 1 ComDataLenA Function Sets the number of data bits for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 5 Bit oo 1 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 3 8 Bit 3 4 2 2 ComParityA Function Sets the parity for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanu
247. in front of a specific background 3 3 14 9 Attribute Priorities 1 First the attributes of the variable or text set in the normal dialog box for the screen element are used 2 fa control variable exists its value and the range of values definition are used to define the dynamic attribute 3 If no control variable exists the value of the PLC variables and the range of val ues definition are used to determine the dynamic attribute Not in the case of static texts 4 lf value specific attributes were defined in the text list for selection texts these attributes are used 3 3 14 10 Variable Selection Double click a variable folder to open it The variables are then positioned one below the other You can select a variable by double clicking it The dialog is then closed and you are returned to the previous window 3 3 14 11 Font The Font attribute determines the font in which the characters are displayed in a screen Note Only some operating devices can display fonts up to any size The names of the fonts can not be changed You can select a separate font for each static text in a screen The system displays all messages using the same font The system displays all elements in a recipe using the same font 3 53 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 15 Aligning Selected Elements to the Grid Elements in a screen are normally aligned to the grid whose grid spacing is defined by the width of the cha
248. indow It displays the particular properties of the elements currently selected in an editor position and size for ex ample Project Folder window The Project folder window displays the entire project in the form of a tree structure You can expand any branches within the tree structure that are marked with a plus sign Additional branches or objects may appear below the branches 2 1 SUTRON Programming Within the project folder you can move or copy objects using the drag amp drop function for example to add a language and a controller to a project Properties window The Properties window always displays the properties of the particular branch or ob ject that is currently selected in the project folder Any changed properties are trans ferred directly by the programming software Output window The Output window shows all messages that may be generated during compilation of the terminal file You may print out the window content by clicking the printer sym bol Tools window You can choose screen objects or library in the tools window Screen objects To create screen objects first select a tool from the Tools window The object icon is then displayed on the mouse pointer while you work with a tool Library You put screen objects into the library to use them again in other projects To call a library function perform a right click on the title bar of the library window See chapter Working w
249. ing error message is displayed FLASH MEMORY FAILURE Figure 3 47 Error message FLASH MEMORY FAILURE This error message indicates that a write process was not completed successfully During programming we recommend that you activate the automatic download func tion By starting the download on the PC you automatically set the operating device to the download operating mode If you are using a PC without a serial interface for example a laptop you can per form the download using an adapter via the USB interface For a suitable USB adapter part number 81 215 000 contact S tron electronic GmbH 3 198 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 24 1 1 Download Cable 25 Pin This download cable applies to operating devices with a universal interface only Operating Personal device Computer 6 DSR e DCD 7 CTS XE a N YE RTS Io 8 RTS GN EN C CTS l ID 2 WH WH 2 no lo lo RD m EN BN 3 a0 lo lo 5 SGND mm CN 1 GN oND D SUB D SUB male connector female connector 25 pin 9 pin 3 199 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 200 SUTRON Index A Index A ACCESS YPE aagi s ten dde dattes 3 31 Regular Normal 3 31 DEISCUVE orccain eau tose 3 31 Acknowledging messages 3 140 Administration operating mode 3 195 Alternative DNS server 2 84 Alternative WINS ser
250. ing terminals with a SER2 serial interface The memory contents of the serial and parallel message systems can be printed ei ther in full or in part The entire contents of the message memory of the serial message system is printed if the system variable PrintAllRep is set to the value 1 formatted printout or the value 2 full length printout The entire content of the message memory of the parallel message system is printed if you press a softkey or button linked to the system variable PrintAllState To print the message memory in part the messages to be printed must be selected in the message screen This is done by pressing the Data Release key in the mes sage screen or acorresponding button and selecting the messages in the message field using the Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys The print job is started by pressing a softkey or button linked to the system variable BlockPrint prints visible part of the selected block or BlockPrintLong prints mes sages of the selected block in full length The system variables can additionally be included in a configuration screen and be edited during operation 3 138 SUTRON Tutorial 3 8 5 8 Direct Call of the Message Screen In the programming software you can link a function key or button with a message screen You can use this function key the button must be available in each screen to go from each screen to the message screen As well as accessing the message scree
251. inted on the logging printer A further requirement for automatic printing is that the RepmanRepPrint system variable be set to 1 Automatic print after acknowledgement Messages with this parameter are output on the printer immediately after they have been acknowledged A further requirement for automatic printing is that the RepmanRepPrint system variable be set to 1 2 10 6 1 3 Foreground and Background Color of the Message Allows you to assign the background and foreground color combination to a mes sage The setting can be viewed immediately after you return to the message 2 10 6 1 4 Font for Editing Messages Select a font to be used when you create or edit messages in the Messages window To save a new font in the list of fonts available for selection click the New font but ton The selected font only applies when messages are displayed within the programming software not on the operating device 2 46 SUTRON Programming 2 10 6 2 Controller Area Activate Messages Representation option Select either reduced or extended representation of the parallel message system With the reduced representation you define the parallel message system with start address size and polling time With the extended representation you define up to 8 sections of the parallel message system with start address acknowledge areas sizes offsets starts of message ar eas and ends of message areas Parallel message syste
252. ion The operator can change the value of a variable only with the Plus and Minus keys The changed value is transferred to the controller each time you select the Plus and Minus keys 3 3 3 10 Access Type 3 3 3 10 1 Regular Normal Use the access type Regular for accessing selection text or selection image vari ables for projects that do not use any variant options The system then displays for selection all entries in a text list or an image list 3 3 3 10 2 Selective Use the access type Selective to only display the selection texts or selection images that are released using a controller variable Each bit of the controller variable rep resents an entry in the text or image list Control Byte Text list Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4 Mixer 5 Mixer 6 Mixer 7 Mixer 8 Figure 3 13 Selective access You can use the control byte depicted in the Selective Access image to only display the first four entries in the text list Enter the name of the controller variable in the property window of the text list or im age list respectively The controller variable is only read once when the operating device is being initial ized 3 31 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 3 11 Variable Type 3 3 3 11 1 Standard The standard type is the variable type most frequently used to display decimal num bers The maximum length depends on the data type The significance of the dis play
253. ion Settings Change Display Mode nae O a Oo gt LCD Saver O VW Change Display Mode 8b ed 46 ie LCD Saver pp SNTP Settings Server myserver myhost local Server myserver myhost local Interval minutes 5 Interval minutes 5 Figure 3 44 Registry Registry Save Registry Settings 3 189 S TRON Tutorial The entire registry is saved Registry Change Display Mode Set up of display adjustment LCD Saver switches the brightness to the lowest value if no user operation occures for at least one hour This entry is password protected Change Display Mode Color Selection of color depth for TFT displays LCD Saver switches the brightness to the lowest value if no user operation occures for at least one hour Registry Start Calibration The touch screen calibration process is started After calibration the values are au tomatically saved in the Registry Registry SNTP Settings The name of a time server can be entered via the Intranet or Internet The synchro nization interval is specified in minutes This entry is password protected 3 190 S SUTRON Tutorial Network Settings Network Settings Fix Settings Home Fix Settings Home Current IP FTP Settings Current IP DHCP Device Name DHCP l Device Name Fix Settings
254. ion key thereby allows you to directly change to another screen This change of screen is not possible if the data release has been requested status LED in the Data Release key is flashing or lights up in a screen without automatic data release Direct selector keys allow speedy and convenient operation 3 14 2 Function Keys in the Controller In addition to programming function keys as direct selector keys they can be pro grammed to carry out a function in the controller To do this instead of assigning a screen change to a function key assign it the symbolic name of a controller variable in the application description When you press the key it can set or reset the variable and the same functions are assigned to it when you release the key If you assign the set function to the key the value entered is assigned to the data type In other words If the digit 1 is entered as the value A flag bit receives logical 1 A flag byte receives the value 01h A flag word receives the value 0001h A double word receives the value 00000001h For values greater than 1 you must specify at least a byte address for the variable 3 158 SUTRON Tutorial 3 14 3 Softkeys Softkeys are function keys that carry out a different function depending on the screen in which the appear The current function of a softkey is described in the cur rent screen In this context you can use images background images selection
255. ith Screen Objects on page 3 5 See chapter Working with Libraries on page 3 110 Hiding windows Using the Autohide attribute from the context menu you automatically minimize a window to the size of an icon when it is not in use This icon is then displayed at the very bottom of the main window If you move the mouse pointer over the icon the window reopens in its original location E Eigenschaften Ready Figure 2 2 Window displayed as icon To dock a window follow these steps 1 Using the mouse right click the title bar of the window 2 Select Dockable from the context menu Keeping the left hand mouse button depressed drag the window to the edge of the main window until the window dimensions match the size of the main window Release the mouse button To undo the dock operation select Floating from the context menu 2 2 S TRON Programming 2 2 File Menu The File menu contains all of the functions you require to create a new project folder open an existing project folder save or close the active project folder and quit the programming software package 2 2 1 File Menu Open a Project Folder Select the Open project folder menu item to open an existing project folder Follow the steps below to open an existing project folder Select Open project folder from the File menu The Open dialog appears Navigate to the project folder required Select the project folder require
256. ive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 255 3 4 10 7 ActEditLevel Function Displays the current edit level Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 255 3 89 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 11 Recipes SelectDSNr Active data set number SelectDSName Active data set name variant 1 DestDSNr Target data set number DSCopy Copy data set DSDelete Delete data set ActDSName Active data set name variant 2 SelectRezeptNr Active recipe number SelectRezeptName Active recipe name StateDSDelete Status of delete process LoadRezName Name of last recipe loaded DSDownload Send data set to controller DSDnloadBreak Stop data set transfer DSDnloadState Monitor data set transfer to controller LoadDSName Name of last data set transferred LoadDSNr Number of last data set transferred StartSave Send data set to PC SaveState Monitor data set transfer to PC StartRestore Send data set from PC to terminal RestoreState Monitor data set transfer to terminal RestoreLineNr Line number of data set file to terminal StartRezPrint Print data set RezPrintState Monitor data set print process StartUpload Read data set from controller UploadDSNr Number of destination data set UploadState Monitor
257. l ues Inactive Data transfer in progress 3 4 11 21 RestoreLineNr Function Current line number in the data set file Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 1 to 255 3 4 11 22 StartRezPrint Function Starts printing a data set Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Initial state Start printing Stop printing 3 4 11 23 RezPrintState Function Displays the status of the data set print process Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Printing in progress 3 95 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 11 24 StartUpload Function Loads the data set which is currently active in the controller to the operating device Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive 1 Loads one variable at a time to the destination indicated in Uploa
258. l patterns for bars 1 For the empty area of the bar background 2 For the filled area of the bar foreground 3 For the bar if the lower limit value is not reached 4 For the bar if the higher limit value is exceeded The programming software contains four standard fill patterns You can use any other images as fill patterns Prior to use you must import these images into the pro gramming software or insert them as OLE Example of fill status display Four graphics have been created for the example They display a container that is either empty or full The word MIN is used to demonstrate a situation in which the value is not reached And the word MAX to depict a situation in which the value is exceeded The container in the middle depicts a container for a case where the op erating device displays a midpoint controller value for the variables ld Figure 3 3 Example of fill status display IEY You may only use values of the integer and unsigned integer data types for the dis play as a bar 3 23 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 3 11 Curve In the Field Type field define how the value is to be read Cyclically Once or Event controlled You can influence the format of a curve by specifying the Width Height Width Specify the horizontal size of the bar in pixels Height Specify the vertical size of the bar in pixels The documentation value is a character string that fills
259. l tab Function None The button does not have a function Pushbutton Used to change screens or write a value to a system or controller variable Switch Used to write a value to a system or controller variable Key simulation Used to simulate any key in the system Editor Used to activate the edit screen for the input variable This option is only available for selection if Variable was selected under Contents You must then configure an input variable 3 34 SUTRON Tutorial Position Extension Enter the position and expansion height and width for the button in pixels Table 3 15 Position and expansion for a button Symbol Meaning 1 Distance from the left border of the screen 4 Distance from the top border of the screen p Width of the button IO Height of the button Released condition Select colors for the foreground and background elements for when the button is not pressed Select the frame that should appear around the button in the same way If you are unable to select a frame then no frame image is available In this event you can create your own frame image Pressed condition Select colors for the foreground and background elements for when the button is pressed Proceed in the same manner as described for released state Button background Check the checkbox transparent to represent the button transparency Only buttons with th
260. le due to a lack of plausibility To be able to reproduce the incident we need to know the code and subcode number as well as the software versions of the operating sys tem and programming software Do not hesitate to call our hotline and we will help you FIRMWARE NOT CONFORM FIRMWARE NOT CONFORM TO HARDWARE FIRMWARE 1 HW_VERS 2 If this error message is displayed contact the S tron electronic hotline Before call ing make a note of the firmware and hardware version The operating system of the operating device switches into an endless loop to prevent damage to the device DATASET STORAGE FAILURE DATASET STORAGE FAILURE A checksum error was detected when checking the memory areas of the recipe data sets Either the battery or the RAM memory is defective 3 135 S SUTRON Tutorial a amp 3 8 5 External Messages External messages are generated by the connected controller and forwarded to the operating terminal as information on the monitored process The user can choose two separate message systems Depending on the requirements message transfers to the operating device can be either serial or parallel This is regardless of whether the messages are process messages or fault messages Messages can consist of the message text and a scaled and formatted variable Ev ery variable type available in the system is valid The information in the message memory can be used for statistical ev
261. les to change the height of the area You can not change the width of the area 3 3 9 1 Message Field Parameters In the Message System area determine whether messages of the parallel message system or the serial message system will be displayed in the current message field Specify a value for the height of the message field A message field can have a maximum height of 60 lines In the Representation of Message area you can specify data that can be changed when the operating device is running Global settings If this parameter is active default settings from the system parameters are used for the message system Message group The system outputs the group identifier before the message text Message number The system outputs the message number before the message text Message date The system outputs today s date before the message text In the date the year can either be output as two digits or four digits The value of the date is frozen with the message Time of message The system outputs the time before the message text The value of the date is frozen with the message The maximum number of lines per message specifies that only the number of lines entered here will be displayed The standard value is the maximum value of 255 lines In the Time Period area you can specify the time period from which messages will be displayed Chronicle The system displays all messages 3 48 SUTRON Tutorial
262. lic Cyrillic Cyrillic Supplementary U 0400 to U 052F 1024 to 1327 Armenisch Armenian Armenian U 0530 to U 058F 1328 to 1423 Hebr isch Hebrew Hebrew U 0590 to U 05FF 1424 to 1535 Arabisch Arabic Arabic Syriac Thaana U 0600 to U 08FF 1536 to 2303 Devanagari Devanagari Devanagari U 0900 to U 097F 2304 to 2431 Bengali Bengali Bengali U 0980 to U 09FF 2432 to 2559 Gurmukhi Gurmukhi Gurmukhi U 0A00 to U 0A7F 2560 to 2687 Gujarati Gujarati Gujarati U 0A80 to U 0AFF 2688 to 2815 Oriya Oriya Oriya U 0B00 to U 0B7F 2816 to 2943 Tamil Tamil Tamil U 0B80 to U 0BFF 2944 to 3071 Telugu Telugu Telugu U 0C00 to U 0C7F 3072 to 3199 Kannada Kannada Kannada Malayalam Malayalam Malayalam Sinhala U 0C80 to U 0CFF 3200 to 3327 U 0D00 to U 0DFF 3328 to 3583 Thai Thai Thai U 0E00 to U 0E7F 3584 to 3711 Laotisch Lao Lao U 0E80 to U 0EFF 3712 to 3839 Tibetanisch Tibetan Tibetan Myanmar U 0F00 to U 109F 3840 to 4255 Georgisch Georgian Georgian U 10A0 to U 10FF 4256 to 4351 Koreanisch Hangul Hangul Hangul Jamo U 1100 to U 11FF 4352 to 4607 Ethiopic Cherokee Unified Cana dian Aboriginal Syllabics Ogham Runic Tagalog Hanun6o Buhid Tagbanwa Khmer Mongolian Limbu Tai Le Khmer Symbols Phonetic Extensions Latin Ex tended Additional U 12
263. lication 35 Format error 36 Script error E EN CE pl ES 2 62 S TRON Programming 2 10 10 2 1 Terminal Messages Parameters Background color Select a color for the background on which the terminal message should be dis played Status line Specify a text as status line This text will be displayed in any screen by means ofthe Status text system variable as long as the terminal message is displayed See chapter Status Text on page 3 104 2 10 10 2 2 Terminal Messages Memory You can store important terminal messages in the serial message memory To do this select the number to be used to enter the terminal message in the serial mes sage memory 2 10 10 2 3 Terminal Messages Touch Screen Terminals System icon Select the system icon to be displayed instead of the terminal message Symbol colors Select a color combination for both the system icon foreground and background color See chapter Terminal Type Color Palette on page 2 29 2 10 10 2 4 Terminal Message 1 Wrong Format You are attempting to enter an invalid data format into a variable field of the numer ical editor For example the number of places entered before the decimal point ex ceeds the setting specified in the user interface 2 10 10 2 5 Terminal Message 2 Value Too Large You are attempting to enter a value into a variable field of the editor that exceeds the variable s upper limit Th
264. lling time to specify the time intervals at which the operating device reads from the controller the variables for the control byte and the reset byte The running time meters are activated in the operating device as soon as you have entered a variable name for the control byte and specified a value for the polling time If the polling time is 0 or if there is no address for the control byte the Running Time Meter function in the operating device is off For each running time meter you can enter a variable name in the controller The operating device stores the value of the corresponding running time meter if the con troller requests that the operating device to do so For this purpose the controller writes the hexadecimal code 7FCF into the serial message channel of the polling area For each variable a 32 bit memory area must be available in the controller 3 148 SUTRON Tutorial Example You want to set up a running time meter for a maintenance interval of 50 hours The polling time for the counter 60 seconds the counter increases by one each minute System Variable Counter1 Representation Decimal number Format Field length 4 Fractional digits 1 Only positive Scaling Factor 1 Divisor 6 Addend 0 After 150 polling cycles the operating device displays a value of 2 5 hours 150 6 0 25Using the format Fractional Digits 1 the value 25 is displayed as 2 5 This
265. location Function AppStarter EXE Root directory on USB stick Starts TSvisRT_LD exe Admin INI Root directory on USB stick File with administration files IPSetting INI Root directory on USB stick File with settings for IP assignment TSvisRT_CE INI SubdirectoryTSvisRT Project Initialization file for TSvisRT_LD exe name on USB stick SPSTtxxxxxxx yyy DLL SubdirectoryTSvisRT Project Protocol driver name on USB stick CB SubdirectoryTSvisRT Project name on USB stick Compressed application file TSvisRT_CE EXE SubdirectoryTSvisRT Project TSvisRT Runtime name on USB stick TSvisLD_CE EXE SubdirectoryTSvisRT Project TSvisRT loader name on USB stick EBOOT nb0 Subdirectory Bootloader Windows CE Bootloader NK nbO Operating system Windows CE Subdirectory Bootloader 3 23 Communication With a Controller Communication between a controller host computer for example and an operating device may occur with any interface except those for the logging printer and parallel outputs The interface used always depends on the connected counterpart or on the network For more information on the interfaces themselves see the manual for the corre sponding operating device A standard cable measuring about 3 m 9 843 ft is available to ensure a secure connection for each connection option More detailed information is available on possible connections to different controllers and networks
266. logger 3 AJOJN Trigger for data logger 4 3 108 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 20 2 DataLogClear Function Erase the memory of a data logger Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Initial state ee 1 Erase the memory of data logger 1 2 Erase the memory of data logger 2 3 Erase the memory of data logger 3 4 Erase the memory of data logger 4 3 4 21 Image Parameters ScreenOffset Variable for multiplex procedure 3 4 21 1 ScreenOffset Function Functions as a multiplex variable The value of this variable is transferred by the current screen Each screen can have another screen offset value Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to ues 65535 3 4 22 Script Processing Skriptid ID number of current script InstructionPointer last value of instruction pointer SkriptAktiv turnes the script processing on off 3 4 22 1 Skriptid Function Displays the ID number of the script currently being executed Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 3 1
267. lue before display There are no blanks between the characters In the controller the variable appears in special floating point formats for example IEEE Only some controllers support floating point numbers Table 3 10 Key functions for floating point numbers Key Function Oto9 Enters the numbers 0 to 9 Decimal point Enters the decimal point Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected 3 17 S TRON Tutorial Table 3 10 Key functions for floating point numbers Key Function Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Plus 1st case Variable is selected The value is deleted and you can enter a new value 2nd case Cursor was moved within a positive value The value is not changed 3rd case Cursor was moved within a negative value The negative sign for the value is deleted Minus 1st case Variable is selected The value is deleted and a negative sign is inserted at the least significant posi tion You can enter a new value 2nd case Cursor was
268. m For the parallel message system you must enter a starting address of the data area where the messages are stored in the controller in bit coded form You specify the number of bytes to define the size of the area for the status mes sages in the controller You can specify a maximum of 256 bytes for this area By entering the polling time you specify the interval at which the operating device reads the status messages data area from the controller You can enter values from 0 to 25 5 seconds for the polling time The active messages are displayed in a screen with a message field for parallel mes sages The status messages can be sorted according to various criteria 2 10 6 3 Controller Area Options Parallel message system You specify a name for a variable with the same size as the variable for status mes sages in the field start address acknowledgement area Serial message system From the controller you can delete all acknowledged messages if you write the bit pattern E216h to the controller address Delete variable to messages and write the control code 7FF5h to the serial message channel If you want to delete all messages you need to write the control code 7FFEh to the serial message channel If you want to use this function of the operating device you must assign a variable for deleting messages 2 10 6 4 Terminal Area Memory amp Message General parameters You can enter a message number to display a mess
269. m the communication and language categories that are to be compiled as a project The name of the TSwin file is used for the name of the project automatically 2 15 1 Project Management Activating a Project If you have created more than one project you must activate the project that you cur rently want to work with Follow the steps below to activate a project possibility 1 1 Mark the Project management branch in the project folder 2 Select the name for the active project in the Active project area of the Proper ties window Follow the steps below to activate a project possibility 2 1 Using the right mouse button click the name of a project 2 Select Activate from the context menu The name of the activated project is then shown in bold print 2 15 2 Project Management Languages Language selection Select the languages that are to be included in the current project The list on the left displays all languages contained in the current project folder The list on the right dis plays the languages contained in the current project gt copies the selected language s into the active languages list gt gt copies all languages into the active languages list lt removes the selected language s from the active languages list lt lt removes all languages from the active languages list Start up language The operating device must start with one language Select the start up language from the list 2 15 3 Proje
270. m with other letters The letters are assigned to the relevant language so that you can choose different letters for each language K Appears G Disappears Q To be acknowledged q Acknowledged Automatically clear appear disappear A message of the parallel message system with this parameter is stored in the memory for serial messages when it appears The message is first labeled with the Arrived appear status here Once the parallel message is no longer active it is removed from the serial mes sage memory once again Acknowledgment of message You can acknowledge messages with this parameter that have been stored in the memory for serial messages Acknowledged messages are then labeled with the Acknowledged identifier To acknowledge messages you require the Acknowledge key a function key which controls the RepmanQuitKey system variable or a relevant button Printing the message in the serial message memory Automatic print of message With this parameter a message which reaches the operating device is not only displayed in the message field but also printed You must select this parameter separately for each individual message which should be printed directly A further requirement for automatic printing is that the RepmanRepPrint system variable be set to 1 Automatic clear of the message after printing Messages with this parameter are deleted from the serial message memory im mediately after they are pr
271. marks within the scale The dis tance between individual tick marks can be specified in the field next to the appropri ate check box Select a line thickness and line color for the representation of the scale Table 3 23 Parameters for the X axis scale Icon Function Enter the distance of the scale from the left edge of the graph element Enter the distance of the scale origin from the left edge of the graph element l an Enter the length of the scale Add the space between the scale and the graph area to the length to ensure that the scale ex tends to the right edge of the graph element 3 45 S TRON Tutorial Table 3 23 Parameters for the X axis scale Icon Function Click the button to display an arrow at the left end of the scale Click the button to display the ends of the scale without an ar row Click the button to display an arrow at the right end of the scale 3 3 6 8 Axis Scale Wizard Y Axis In the Y axis in the Graph Element Area select the Add check box to display a scale along the x axis Select the Grid ticks check box to show tick marks within the scale The distance between individual tick marks can be specified in the field next to the appropriate check box Select a line thickness and line color for the representation of the scale Table 3 24 Parameters for the Y axis scale Icon Function Enter the dis
272. mber Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Minus active 3 4 9 31 KeyEnter Function Simulates the key function of the Enter key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Enter active 3 87 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 32 KeyEdit Function Simulates the key function of the Data Release key Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Key function Edit active 3 4 10 Password ScrchgPasswd Input password ScrchgResPasswd Delete password reset authorization ChangePasswd Change password FlashPasswd Reset passwords Passwdlnactive Disable password protection ActViewLevel Topical view level ActEditLevel Topical edit level 3 4 10 1 ScrchgPasswd Function Variable for password input Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 11 characters 3 4 10 2 ScrchgResPasswd Function Deletes the currently entered passwordand resets the access authoriza tion Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection
273. me of the control variable if needed Click the Assign button ar D You can display up to 25 objects with dynamic attributes in a screen 3 3 14 1 Global Variables with the attribute Global Appear in all languages for a project in all screens with the same name andin the same position If you change the parameters of these variables the changes apply to all screens with the same name and to all languages for the project 3 3 14 2 Underline You can assign the dynamic attribute Underline to variables and static texts ni I i chee Figure 3 28 Text with the Underline attribute 3 3 14 3 Inverse You can assign the dynamic attribute Inverse to variables and static texts This for mat is particularly suitable if you want to emphasize the variable that is currently se lected l eser mT at 35 T S Inverse Figure 3 29 Text with the Inverse attribute 3 3 14 4 Flashing You can assign the dynamic attribute Flashing to variables and static texts Note that an element that is assigned this attribute is displayed in the strikethrough format and not as flashing text Di T T Hip T Figure 3 30 Text with the Flashing attribute 3 3 14 5 Invisible You can assign the dynamic attribute Invisible to variables and static text to ensure that they do not appear below or above specific controller values The attribute Invisible is only evaluated together with a control variable In all other cases
274. men 2 Special Variation Selectors Combining Half U FE00 to U FFFF 65024 to 65535 forms 2 Marks CJK Compatibility Forms Small Form Variants Arabic Pre sentation Forms B Halfwidth and Fullwidth Forms Specials 2 13 8 Supplementary Functions Status Information Specify a variable name for every status element you want to use in the current project Image of screen number The image of the screen number corresponds to the number of the screen currently shown by the operating device Read coordination byte The Read coordination byte consists of 8 bits whose states are written by the oper ating device and read by the controller at cyclic intervals Table index If tabular data can be displayed and edited on the operating device you have the possibility of receiving the current position of the cursor in the table as the table index In this case the row number is stored in the variable for the table index during the next polling procedure Keyboard image In achain of bytes there is one bit that displays the status of each key of an operating device If the bit for a key is set to logical 1 this means that the key is pressed Once the key is released the bit is set to logical O again To enable the keyboard image to be read request code 7FFCh must first be written into the cyclical polling area The operating device then writes the current keyboard image into the agreed variable in the controller
275. meric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 No parity si 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity 3 4 2 3 ComStopBitsA Function Sets the number of stop bits for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 1 Bit gi 1 1 5 Bit 2 2 Bit 3 61 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 2 4 ComBaudrateA Function Sets the baud rate for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 300 Baud ee 1 600 Baud 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud 8 57600 Baud operating devices with 386 CPU only 3 4 2 5 ComHandshakeA Function Sets the handshake method for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 No handshake ii 1 Hardware handshake RTS CTS 2 Software handshake XON XOFF 3 4 2 6 ComDefaultA Function Activates the interface parameters for SER1 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 In
276. message field RepoutSelectGroup Output messages of group only RepoutSelectTime Output messages in chronological order RepoutGroup Output message group 3 4 6 1 RepmanSortCrit Function Defines the sorting criterion for message output Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues By priority of message number In order of arrival most recent first In order of arrival oldest first By group 3 4 6 2 ClearRepBuf Function Erases the memory for the serial messages Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Delete all messages from the message memory Delete only the acknowledged messages from the message memory 3 70 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 6 3 RepmanRepPrint Function Is used to have messages output to a printer Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive pas 1 Formatted output the interface is used permanently 2 Complete output the interface is used permanently 3 Formatted output the interface is used temporarily 4 Compl
277. message that arrived first in the serial message memory appears at the top of the message field Activate this sorting if you like to print out the messages online Sort by priority If messages are sorted by priority they are sorted in the message field in such a way that the message with the highest priority is at the top and the messages below are listed according to descending priority The lower the message number the higher the message priority Sort by group With this sorting order the message that has the lowest group number appears at the top of the message field If several messages belonging to the same group are listed they are sorted according to time with the newest ones first Sort by acknowledge status unacknowledged first This sorting brings the unacknowledged messages to the top of the message field Message representation Representation with message group The system outputs the group identifier before the message text Representation with message number The system outputs the message number before the message text Representation with message date The system outputs today s date before the message text In the date the year can either be output as two digits or four digits The value of the date is frozen with the message Representation with message time The system outputs the time before the message text The value of the time is frozen with the message 2 50 SUTRON Programming
278. minal takes place Firmware download process Select the directory and the file name for the S3 file of the firmware Select the terminal Select the firmware version Create the firmware file S3 file Download the firmware to the device Oe D Enter a target directory and a file name for the firmware file Alternatively select an existing directory and file Select the check box to start a download immediately after the firmware file has been created Then click Next gt to continue 2 4 4 1 Firmware Update Terminal Type Select a terminal type from the left list box If the device can be equipped with memories of different sizes select the appropriate memory size value from the right list box Then click Next gt to continue Alternatively click lt Back to return to the previous window 2 4 4 2 Firmware Update Version Select a firmware version Note that the listed firmware versions only apply to the previously selected device Then click Next gt to continue Alternatively click lt Back to return to the previous window 2 13 SUTRON Programming 2 4 4 3 Firmware Update Generate The last window of this wizard illustrates the progress of the file creation process Once the firmware file has been created successfully you can either Immediately load the file into the device download cable required or Load the file into the device at a later stage Follow the steps below to load
279. n It is also displayed if no help screen is available for the vari able and current screen 2 36 SUTRON Programming 2 10 1 3 System Defaults Standard Format You have the option to select a font for the current language so that language spe cific characters can be displayed This font is used as the standard font for all texts you input during programming Fonts selected in Options can disable this setting for representation in various edi tors 2 10 1 4 System Defaults Reference Screen In the Time controlled target area you can specify a base screen that is displayed if the operating device is not used for a set period of time You can choose all of the user interface screens as the base screen with the excep tion of the following Startup screen Setup screen Password screen In the base screen note that you may need to reactivate password protection Enter a value between 10 sec and 9999 sec for the time 2 10 2 Screens Screens refer to the contents of a page on the operating device display This means that screens vary in size depending on the operating device being used You can display and enter texts and variables 250 in screens You can define the layout of these screens and use images to customize them to your own specific needs To display basic elements that are identical in every screen you can create these elements in subscreens and link the subscreens with screens For
280. n E S 3 127 3 8 5 External Messages serenana 3 136 3 8 6 Serial Message System ccccceeceeceee cesses eeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeestaeeeeeeeeee 3 141 3 8 7 Parallel Message System Status Messages ccccceeeseeeeeees 3 142 3 8 8 Settings for Status Messages cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeees 3 142 3 8 9 Memory Requirement for Messages and Data Sets 3 144 3 9 Working with Password Protection 3 145 3 9 1 Reactivate Password Protection 3 147 3 9 2 Password Screen and Password Functions 3 147 3 10 Working with Running Time Meters ec eeeeeeeeeenceeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaes 3 147 3 11 Working with Control Codes 3 149 3 11 1 Delete Data Logger a 3 150 3 11 2 Trigger Data Logger 3 150 3 11 3 Write Values of Running Time Meters to Controller 3 150 3 11 4 Switch to Another Language 3 151 3 11 5 Activating Recipe and Data Sets from the Controller 3 151 3 11 6 Automatic Data Release for Scanner Module 3 151 3 11 7 Reload Event Controlled Variable Values 3 151 3 11 8 Transfer Single Data Set from Operating Device to Controller 3 151 3 11 9 Delete Acknowledged Messages from Serial Message Memory 3 152 3 11 10 Cancel Printing the Print Log eccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeee
281. n from a selection menu you can then also use the function key to access the message screen The integrated LED of the function key then takes on the task of indicating when new messages have been received In this case the LED flashes when a new message has been received When you select the flashing function key the system goes directly to the message screen When you select the function key again the system automatically returns to the previous screen The usual flashing help key LED is not available when program ming a function key 3 8 5 9 Message Output Formats The following information is available for each external message Message Number Date Time Message text The values of up to two variables from the time the message appears only if available You can use different system parameters to influence message display in a message screen or on a printer You can set these parameters during operation in a pro grammed configuration screen System variables are then used to select and deselect message elements Table 3 35 System variables for messages Serial Messages Parallel Messages Affects RepoutNr RepoutNrP Message Number RepoutDate RepoutDateP Date RepoutTime RepoutTimeP Time RepoutAnzYear RepoutAnzYearP 2 digit or 4 digit display of the year You can select or deselect individual message elements to influence the length of a message line These settings do not infl
282. n only select the names of existing recipes The programming software auto matically generates a text list with the names of existing recipes and links it to this system variable 3 4 11 10 StateDSDelete Function Displays the status of the data set delete process Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 0 Delete inactive 1 Delete active the current data set of the current recipe is deleted 3 92 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 11 11 LoadRezName Function Name of the last recipe transferred Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues Up to 30 characters If the recipe was deleted after being transferred a number of question marks are displayed instead of the name 3 4 11 12 DSDownload Function Loads the current data set to the controller Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Loads the content of the recipe buffer to the controller Loads the content of the single variable to the controller 3 4 11 13 DSDnloadBreak Function Ends the data set transfer currently in progress Data type Numeric Representation Positive dec
283. n to with the as signed name You have to enter the name of the project without the file extension Without a directory name the cur rent directory is used Example 1 Program directory TSwin exe TSwin starts In case of having already generated a project and having checked the checkbox load automatically the last opened file in the global settings this project is opened Example 2 Program directory TSwin exe Project directory Project name TSwin starts with the assigned project If the assigned project is not existing TSwin starts and shows an error message 3 1 S TRON Tutorial Example 3 Program directory TSwin exe o O Output directory Project directory Project name TSwin starts with the assigned project If the assigned project is not existing TSwin starts and shows an error message In case of projects for TesiP n or A devices the subdirectory TSvisRT Project name is generated automatically In this directory the output files TSvisRT_CE exe TSvisRT ini SPSTxxxx dil Projectname CB are copied after compilation of the project In case of projects for E devices the output file Projectname CB is copied to the output directory without subdirectory Example 4 Program directory TSwin exe n N Template directory Template name Project directory Project name TSwin starts and generates a new project from the assigned template If the assigned template is not existing TS
284. ng area One bit activates or deactivates the corresponding status LED the other bit displays the flashing attribute of the status LED The status LEDs can only be influenced by the controller The following exceptions apply You have programmed a function key as a direct selector key for a message screen You have entered a value greater than 0 zero as the message priority In these cases the status LED of this function key can not be influenced by the con troller In these situations the status LED can only be controlled using the message functions If the operating device you are using has less status LEDs than can be controlled here the superfluous bits have no function To minimize the transfer times select the length of the polling area so that only the bytes required for status LEDs are transferred See chapter CFCardError on page 3 108 3 160 SUTRON Tutorial 3 15 Working with the Cyclic Polling Area The cyclical polling area is a freely definable memory area in the controller The controller writes to this memory area The operating device polls this memory area cyclically In other words it reads the content in regular intervals The polling area is created in a byte oriented or word oriented manner The controller must be able to access this memory area bit by bit and the memory area must be continuous The operating device accesses this memory area byte by byte or word by word
285. nitialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 3 by the operator Input of the destination data set number via the system variable UploadDSNr Input of the destination data set number via the system variable UploadDSNr l Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 2 by the operator Initialization of the system variable StartUpload with the value 1 by the operator Not enough memory or Not enough memory Yes pod Yes data set is protected No No y y y Data transmission to the next free data set within the terminal memory Indication of the error message via the status LED Help End Data transmission to the data set which is defined in the system variable UploadDSNr Figure 3 33 Data transfer to the operating device operator controlled 3 7 3 3 Transferring Data Sets to from a PC Itis possible to transfer data sets to or from a PC via the interface X3 in order to back up the data sets that have been stored in the operating device process the data or supply the operating device with new data sets It is also particularly important to back up the data sets if a new application descrip tion is loaded in the operating device as all the data sets in the RAM are then de leted If the recipe structure remains unchanged however they can be reloaded in
286. ntation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Initial state se 1 Transfers a single data set to the PC 2 Transfers all data sets of a recipe to the PC 3 Transfers all data sets to the PC 4 Transfers all data sets to the CompactFlash card 3 4 11 18 SaveState Function Displays the status of the data set transfer to the PC Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ae 1 Transfers a single data set 2 Transfers all data sets of a recipe 3 Transfers all data sets in the operating device 3 4 11 19 StartRestore Function Controls the process of loading recipes and data sets to the operating de vice Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Initial state a 1 Activate ready to receive 2 Stop transfer 3 Transfer of all recipes and data sets in the tesrez bak file located on the CompactFlash card 3 94 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 11 20 RestoreState Function Displays the status of the data transfer to the operating device Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable va
287. o inform the controller that the values of the subsequent controller variables of the current screen are to be changed To do this you must Create a variable for the Read Coordination byte AND Create a variable for the polling area See chapter Read Coordination Byte on page 3 165 See chapter Write Coordination Byte on page 3 168 The attribute PLC Handshake allows you to Create your own recipe management system Inform the controller that a specific variable value will be changed 3 29 S TRON Tutorial The PLC handshake process runs as follows Jump to mask with variable N which has the attribute PLC handshake e Operator presses the data release key Controlller sets the Refresh Acknowledge Bit in CBW to 1 v Terminal sets the Edit Request bit in CBR to 1 Terminal sets the Refresh Request Bit in CBR to 0 AA External Data Release bit in CBW set to 1 i Controller sets the External Data Release Bit in CBW to 1 Yes AA Controller sets the Refresh Acknowledge Bit in CBW to 0 t Terminal reads the refreshed controller variables again t Terminal activates the data release internally t Status LED Data Release switches ON Terminal activates the data release internally Y Operator enters new variable valu
288. o recognize and start a download automatically This also applies to the En able automatic upload check box 2 31 S TRON Programming 2 9 2 2 PC gt gt Terminal Interface Parameters The interface parameters defined for the connection between the PC and terminal influence the download process First select the COM interface whose values you wish to change The Interface Parameters area contains default values To change those values simply select other values from the appropriate lists The default values can be restored at any time To restore the values click the De fault Values button To adopt the interface parameters from the S3 file belonging to the compiled project click the S3 File button The PC interface is set up with these default values Table 2 4 Default settings for the RS232 interface Parameter Value Baud rate 19200 Baud Parity Odd Data bits 7 Stop bits 1 Handshake Software handshake Port interface COM2 2 9 3 Terminal gt gt Printer amp Scanner This function is available for all operating devices with an SER2 serial interface Op erating devices with Windows CE operating system only use the USB interface for printing Define the communication parameters required to connect the operating device with a logging printer or a scanner See chapter Working with Scanners on page 3 170 2 32 S SUTRON Programming 2 9 3 1 Terminal
289. oard image to controller 7FFD Data set transfer from controller to operating device single mode 7FFE Erase serial message memory 7FFF Refresh message system 3 11 1 Delete Data Logger You can use the following control codes from the controller to have the operating de vice delete the data logger values Hexadecimal code 7FC7h deletes data logger 1 7FC8h deletes data logger 2 7FCQh deletes data logger 3 7FCAh deletes data logger 4 3 11 2 Trigger Data Logger You can use the following control codes from the controller to have the operating de vice trigger a data logger to log a new value Hexadecimal code 7FCBh triggers data logger 1 7FCCh triggers data logger 2 7FCDh triggers data logger 3 7FCEh triggers data logger 4 3 11 3 Write Values of Running Time Meters to Controller You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice pass the values of the running time meters to the controller Only the values of active running time meters are transferred Hexadecimal code 7FCFh 3 150 S SUTRON Tutorial Hexadecimal code Example 1 Example 2 Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code 3 11 4 Switch to Another Language You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice switch to another language The number of the language is the least significant digit of the hexcod
290. oftware updates See User Manual TSDiag 2 4 9 Tools Menu Documentation You can document the content of a project in an RTF file To determine the scope of documentation select the required project elements arranged in a tree structure You can further adjust the documentation layout by selecting and deselecting differ ent documentation parameters The following options are available Checking unchecking a documentation element Starting documentation for the selected element Document from selected element downward 2 4 9 1 Documentation Parameters Global Settings In the Screen reference lists area choose between two options either display the screen reference lists in the documentation with their name only or specify the cur rent screen for a variable value If the screen reference list is specified by name only the documentation includes a reference to the list The contents of the list are not output You can also specify the current screen to be switched to if a variable assumes the value that you enter in the field next to the appropriate radio button 2 4 9 2 Documentation Parameters Projects If you activate the Document general project information check box the docu mentation support function takes account of all entries provided under general project information 2 17 S TRON Programming 2 4 9 3 Documentation Parameters Screens In the Variables area choose whether you want to s
291. oller inverse scaling must be carried out The system uses the following formula to scale the input Input Value of the Unit Summand Controller Value Oe x Divisor Input Value of the Unit Factor Figure 3 5 Scaling of the input variables in the operating device A rounding error may occur during scaling which is calculated using the following for mula x Factor lt Upper Limit Divisor 2 Figure 3 6 Rounding of the input variables in the operating device 3 3 3 8 2 Scaled Output You can scale output to modify the range of values to suit user interface require ments The scaling data is used for both output and input in the operating device This does not restrict the range of values for the variable Scaling is only carried out in the operating device You use the following operands for scaling Factor Divisor and Addend 3 27 S TRON Tutorial Note that a factor or divisor with the value 0 is not permitted Table 3 13 Scaling decimal numbers Operand Range of Values Factor 32768 to 1 1 to 32767 Divisor 1 to 32767 Addend 32768 to 32767 Table 3 14 Scaling floating point numbers Operand Range of Values Factor 999999999 99999999 to 0 00000001 0 00000001 to 999999999 99999999 Divisor 999999999 99999999 to 0 00000001 0 00000001 to 999999999 99999999 Addend 999999999 99999999 to 999999999 9999
292. olor that contrasts well against the background color In the Grid tick marks field specify the spacing between the grid points In the Ex tension of graph element area you can modify the size of the field if necessary in which the graph set of curves including the frame scales and legend is to be dis played In the Frame area enter the distance of the set of curves graph element from the bottom and left edge of the set of curves area Table 3 22 Geometry and Grid parameters Icon Function Enter the distance of the graph area from the left edge of the he graph element Enter the distance of the graph area from the bottom edge of the graph element 3 3 6 6 Axis Scale Wizard Legend To display a legend for the individual sets of curves you must select the Display check box You can enter a legend text with a maximum length of 15 characters for each set of curves You can use one of the following options to position the legend within the graph ele ment Top positions the legend across the top end of the graph set of curves element Bottom positions the legend across the bottom end of the graph set of curves element Right positions the legend on the right edge of the graph element 3 3 6 7 Axis Scale Wizard X Axis In the X axis in the Graph Element Area select the Add check box to display a scale along the x axis Select the Grid tick marks check box to show tick
293. on text selection image hexadeci mal number binary number bar Configurable val Oto 23 Hours ues 3 4 5 4 RtcDay Function Sets the day of the date for the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0to31 Number of days depends on the month Invalid settings are corrected by ues the real time clock next time when the date changes 3 4 5 5 RtcMonth Function Sets the month of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 1to12 ues 3 4 5 6 RtcYear Function Sets the year of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to 99 Only the year and decade are influenced ues 3 4 5 7 RtcDayOfWeek Function Sets the day of the week of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0to6 Only for operating devices with TMP Z84 CPU or RISC CPU oe 1to7 Only for operating devices with 386 CPU 3 68 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 5 8 RtcDateFmt Function Sets the
294. only delete the active data set To do so you need to write the value 1 to the system variable DSDelete The following conditions must be fulfilled in order for the data set to be deleted suc cessfully The active data set can not be edited at the same time The data set must be stored in the RAM If any of these conditions is not satisfied the delete process is not carried out and a corresponding terminal message is issued After the deletion the data set with the lowest number in the current recipe becomes the active data set See chapter DSDelete on page 3 91 3 116 SUTRON Tutorial 3 7 2 5 Modifying a Data Set The active data set can be modified providing it is stored in the RAM To change the contents of a data set the variables must be edited in the recipe win dow Note however that the new values are not written in the data set as soon as the Enter key is pressed but are first stored in a temporary buffer The Data Release key must then be pressed in order to enter them into the data set If the new data is not to be entered the system variable Break can be set to 1 to dis card the contents of the buffer For ease of use you might want to program one of the softkeys or a specific button to the system variable Break You can not select another data set until the buffer contents has either been ac cepted or discarded If the controller changes to a different screen while a data set is
295. or lt 3 32 SUTRON Tutorial vorne in front hinten at the back Figure 3 15 Background image OR linked Using XOR a link is created between the pixels where the logic is gt exclusive or lt hinten at the back Figure 3 16 Background image XOR linked The layer number determines whether an image can overlay other images The im age with the lowest layer number is displayed in the foreground and is linked to the image with the next highest layer number The link is always created in accordance with the settings of the background image with the smaller layer number 3 3 5 Buttons Buttons are graphic areas that are linked with a specific function When you press a button the preconfigured function is activated This only applies to operating devices equipped with a touch screen On operating devices with a full graphics display but tons can only be used to display images variables or texts A button can be broken down into the following Button Contents static text variable image symbol Functionality key function key simulation Display gt frame colors of fore and background Figure 3 17 Button The button content the functions and the representation display frame other at tributes can for the most part be programmed independently of each other 3 33 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 5 1 Content of Buttons
296. ordination byte Enter a polling time that meets the requirements of real life situations System parameters General parameters Specify a polling time that meets the requirements of real life situations Create a variable for the Read Coordination byte IEY When you determine the timeout time in the controller remember to take the transfer times and polling times into account 3 15 7 5 Data Set Download Active As soon as the operating device transfers a data set to the controller it writes a log ical 1 to the Data Set Download Active bit After all data were sent the operating de vice writes a logical 0 to the Data Set Download Active bit The controller can now work with the new data set values 3 167 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 15 8 Write Coordination Byte The term Write Coordination byte indicates that the controller writes this byte The Write Coordination byte is only read by the operating device This byte is used together with the Read Coordination byte for the handshake and data coordination with the controller Here the controller indicates its current status to the operating device The individual bits are independent of each other Table 3 55 Structure of the write coordination byte Bit Abbrevia Function tion 0 ED External Data Release 1 RQ Refresh Acknowledgment 2 PL Delete Password 3 LM Liveness Flag 4 DDF Data Set Download Release 5 BS Screen Saver 6 Free 7
297. ore the message text Representation with message number The system outputs the message number before the message text Representation with message date The system outputs today s date before the message text In the date the year can either be output as two digits or four digits The value of the date is frozen with the message Representation with message time The system outputs the time before the message text The value of the time is frozen with the message 2 49 S TRON Programming 2 10 6 9 Output Format Recording General parameters You can have the messages displayed in indented format To do so specify the num ber of characters by which the lines are to be indented after the first line The value you enter here refers only to the display of messages in the operating device s mes sage field Message sorting Messages can be sorted for output You can use the corresponding radio button in the Message Sorting area to define the sort criterion Using the corresponding check boxes in the representation of message area you can mark which parameters of a message are also output The parameters can be combined in any way Sort by time newest first With this sorting order the message that arrived last in the serial message memory appears at the top of the message field Activate this sorting if you like to print out the messages online Sort by time oldest first With this sorting order the
298. ore workspace Select the menu item Restore workspace to get back the previous arrangement size and number of opened windows Close all windows Select the menu item Close all windows to watch the work space without any other windows Project folder Opens and closes the Project folder window The check beside the menu item indi cates that the window is open Properties Opens and closes the Properties window The check beside the menu item indi cates that the window is open Tools Opens and closes the Tools window The check beside the menu item indicates that the window is open Output Opens and closes the Output window The check beside the menu item indicates that the window is open 2 4 Tools Menu The Tools menu offers you a number of different functions depending on the partic ular element within the project tree that is currently selected 2 4 1 Tools Menu Options These are the options you use to define the default settings for the programming soft ware You can change these settings at any time These options are saved together with the project 2 4 1 1 Options Project Management The project management options are divided into the following areas Backup databases Current database Template directory Undo single step undo Backup Databases area Select one of three possible backup variants If you select None no backup is generated when you reopen a database
299. orial By means of the system variable SelectDSName You can edit the system vari able only as a selection text In this case only the names of those data sets that are available for the active recipe are displayed See chapter SelectDSNr on page 3 90 See chapter SelectDSName on page 3 90 3 7 2 3 Copying a Data Set You can only copy the active data set To do so write the number of the destination data set to the system variable DestDSNr and then write the value 1 to the system variable DSCopy The following conditions must be fulfilled in order for the data set to be copied suc cessfully The number of the destination data set must be in the range of 1 to 250 There must not already be a data set with the same number for the active recipe unless DSCopyis set to 3 The active data set can not be edited at the same time There must be enough free RAM on the operating device If any of these conditions is not satisfied the copy process is not carried out and a corresponding terminal message is issued The destination data set becomes the active data set after it has been copied After it has been copied the name of the destination data set consists merely of blanks You can use the system variable ActDSName to change the name See chapter DestDSNr on page 3 91 See chapter DSCopy on page 3 91 See chapter ActDSName on page 3 92 3 7 2 4 Deleting a Data Set You can
300. osition of variables in system messages using either pixel dots or grid units The variables in a system message are displayed in a numerical sequence when you activate the corresponding check box The description of the variables in a system message only appears when you select the With variable description check box Select the Include text list strings in variable description check box in the Text list area if you want to list the text strings of text lists linked to selection text variables For the text strings to be listed the value entered in the Max number of text list strings field must be greater than the actual number of text list strings You can thus selectively document all text lists in a system message that contain fewer than a par ticular number of entries 2 4 9 7 Documentation Parameters Messages You can select the following functions from the Output format area Activate the tabular display of messages if you want to display the messages in text format rather than graphically Activate the Include Numbers in Graphic option if you want to display the vari ables so that they are numbered consecutively for graphical output Activate the With Variable Description option to display a short description below the message for each variable it contains Activate the Empty Documentation Value for Variable option to display a frame for graphical outputs and a line instead of the documentation value for text
301. oup number along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues OFF ON 3 78 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 8 Printer Control StopPrint Cancel print process BlockPrint Print selected block PrintAllRep Print serial messages PrintAllState Print parallel messages BlockPrintLong Print selected block in full length 3 4 8 1 StopPrint Function Stops the current print process Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Stops the print process 3 4 8 2 BlockPrint Function Starts to print the selected messages Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Starts the print process 3 4 8 3 PrintAllRep Function Starts to print all of the serial messages Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Inactive Starts printing using the current formatting Starts
302. p Screen area to provide the operator with help on the variable In the Attribute area assign an access level to the variable If the user has a lower authorization level the password request will occur After successful entry of the password you may tap the button again 3 38 S TRON Tutorial gt Given that several variables can appear in one screen you can specify the order in which they are edited This means that the cursor moves from one variable to an other in this order Selection text and selection graphics image variables The user presses the button to navigate in the corresponding list For one line selec tion text variables pressing on the left half of the variable will result in a decremen tation and on the right an incrementation For multiple line selection text variables or selection image variables in general pressing on the upper half of the variable re sults in a decrementation and on the lower half an incrementation One line selection text Figure 3 19 Button with horizontal layout Multiple line selection text and selection image Figure 3 20 Button with vertical layout If you configure an input variable of type selection text or selection image the En ter button is automatically created prompt appears that is no edit screen is linked for these two types 3 3 5 3 7 Variable Reference for Button Select a variable from the tree view Proceed as follows 1 Double click
303. p screen is always displayed if you have not linked any help screen to the screen or input variable The default help screen is always available and only dis plays a blank page if it is not programmed 2 10 4 2 Help Screen Background Color You can select a background color or color combination for the background of a screen A color combination comprises color 1 and color 2 Color 1 means that the background usually has this color Color 2 means that the background alternates between color 1 and 2 in flash mode Selecting contrasting colors for color 1 and color 2 e g no 17 for the background and no 16 for the foreground will ensure that the element remains legible when flashing However if you select color no 1 for the background and color no 16 for the fore ground the element will disappear when it is flashing 2 10 5 Global Function Keys Global function keys can perform a function from any part of the project Any settings defined for global keys apply to screens only if no other functions have been as signed to the keys within that screen Possible functions are listed below 1 Jump to a screen 2 Transfer variable value when a key is pressed 3 Transfer variable value when a key is released 4 Activate the LED in a function key when a message has been received from the serial or parallel message system 2 42 SUTRON Programming 2 10 6 Message System The message system is an integral part
304. pe and version number of the current protocol Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric field length 8 Configurable val ues Format determined by the manufacturer 3 4 1 4 UserVersion Function Displays the project s version number Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 to 255 ues 3 4 1 5 Boot Function Boots the operating device system restart Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive Eee 1 Reboots the TSvisRT runtime 2 Reboots the operating device 3 56 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 1 6 LodContrast Function Sets the contrast of LC displays Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Depends on the operating device type Ie gt The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure Adhere to the values for the upper and lower limits as specified in the user manual for the relevant operating device 3 4 1 7 LedBackground Function Displays screens in invert
305. pecify the variable positions in pixels or grid units Select the Include numbers in graphic check box to have the variables of a screen numbered The variable description function of a screen is only activated if the With variable de scription check box is activated Select the Empty documentation value for variables check box if you want only to display a frame for the variable Select the Include text list strings in variable description check box in the Text list area if you want to list the text strings of text lists linked to selection text variables For the text strings to be listed the value entered in the Max number of text list strings field must be greater than the actual number of text list strings This option allows you to selectively document the text lists that have a limited number of text string entries In the Function keys area decide whether you want to document the functions of function keys of a screen 2 4 9 4 Documentation Parameters Recipes In the Variables area choose whether you want to specify the position of variables in recipes in pixels dots or grid units The variables in a recipe are displayed in a numerical sequence when you activate the corresponding check box The description of the variables in a recipe only appears when you select the With variable description check box Select the Include text list strings in variable description check box in the Text list area if you want to list
306. pended to the most recently arrived message This status identifier is appended to both serial and parallel messages In the case of parallel messages that have to be acknowledged the Arrived appears status identifier is not appended un til the messages have been acknowledged The Departed disappears status identifier marks the point of time when a message is cleared This status identifier is only appended to parallel messages that were stored in the serial message memory The To be acknowledged status identifier rather than Arrived is appended to mes sages with the Acknowledgment of Message parameter enabled Once the message has been acknowledged the Acknowledged status identifier is appended Group identifiers Group identifiers classify the messages in 8 groups And thereby assign a priority to the messages at the same time The following applies the higher the group number the lower the priority of the mes sage 2 10 6 7 Terminal Area Terminal Messages Messages for terminal messages Specify the message to be output when the terminal indicates a fatal error Also specify a message to be output when a communication error with the con nected controller occurs These error messages are stored in the serial message system 2 48 SUTRON Programming 2 10 6 8 Output Format Status General parameters You can have the messages displayed in indented format To do so specify the num ber of character
307. presentation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Ready ues rare Printing in progress Print process stopped by operator Error while printing 3 4 18 4 PageNumber Function Current page of the current print job Can be combined with the represen tation type Bar to create a progress indicator Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues 3 4 19 Compact Flash Card CardFileName File name display CardApplicationMove Start firmware update CardFileError Output software error messages CFCardError Output hardware error messages The ope rating device can only use Compact Flash cards formatted as FAT 16 By de fault the Windows XP operating system formats Compact Flash cards in FAT32 format Make sure to change the settings to activate the FAT16 format when format ting a Compact Flash card using Windows XP 3 4 19 1 CardFileName Function Name of a file which you want to access in write mode or read mode Enter the file name including the file extension The file name can not exceed a length of 40 characters including the dot and the file extension Data type Alphanumeric Representation Selection Text Configurable val
308. quirements 3 3 1 Static Text Static texts are displayed using a font of your choice Depending on the operating de vice that you are using you can set the following static text attributes Inverse Flashing Underline Font Dynamic attributes Foreground color Background color 3 3 2 Text Field It makes sense to use a text field if you want to insert more than two words as con tiguous text in a screen A wizard will guide you step by step through the individual dialogs required to create a text field 3 3 2 1 Text Field Position Size Color Specify the following parameters for the text field position dimension text spacing and text size The unit for these specifications is pixels Furthermore you can select the foreground and background colors and define dy namic attributes The preview for the text field becomes active only when you modify an existing text field Select the Display check box to activate this function 3 5 S TRON Tutorial If you have created a new text field click the Next gt button Table 3 2 Position size and color of the text field Icon Description i baal Enter the distance of the text field from the left edge of the 5 screen Enter the horizontal dimension of the text field L Enter the distance of the text field from the upper edge of the screen IL Enter the vertical dimension of the text field Enter the di
309. racters and numbers When a pixel oriented graphic display is used you can also move the elements in a screen pixel by pixel The Align selected elements function can be used to undo the pixel oriented posi tioning of elements Use the following procedure 1 Select the elements in the screen you want to realign to the grid 2 Select Align selected elements from the context menu You can now move the selected elements according to the grid spacing defined by the characters 3 3 16 Aligning Selected Elements You can align the elements in a screen either in relation to each other or at the edge of the screen At the same time they are aligned in horizontal and or horizontal di rection Only the selected elements are taken into account during this process Elements are aligned to Select whether you want the elements to be aligned to the border or to the selection boundary Selection boundaries are imaginary lines of outer points of the selected outermost elements in vertical and horizontal direction The following figure shows a square circle and triangle as selected elements Figure 3 31 Selection boundary In horizontal direction the left edge of the square is the selection boundary to the left to the right it is the right corner of the triangle In vertical direction the top edge of the square is the selection boundary to the top to the bottom it is the bottom edge of the triangle Horizontal Select which o
310. ransfer Status 3 114 SUTRON Tutorial 3 7 1 Structure of a Recipe A recipe comprises a maximum of 255 variables In addition up to 255 explanatory texts can be programmed The variables and texts can be spread out over a maxi mum of 255 lines with each line stretching across the entire width of the screen A help text can be programmed for every variable The recipe is displayed in a recipe field within an I O screen that extends over the entire width of the screen The height of the recipe field can be as small as one line or as large as the entire height of the screen The Cursor keys can be used to scroll through long recipes in the recipe field All one line display formats can be used for recipe variables Multiple line formats can not be used for example multiple line selection fields tables etc In addition neither variables nor texts can be displayed with the zoom option 3 7 2 Working with Recipes and Data Sets The majority of the operations described below refer to the active data set In order to activate a data set first select the recipe to which it belongs and then the data set itself How to select recipes and data sets is explained in the next two sections 3 7 2 1 Selecting a Recipe Each recipe is assigned a number from 1 to 250 when the recipes are programmed You can select a recipe as follows By means of a fixed assignment between the recipe and a screen This means that whenever you
311. re when inputting BCD numbers You can enter numeric values as standard decimal numbers using the Standard ed itor You can also increment or decrement each individual digit of the BCD value us ing the Mixmode editor You can only use the Increment editor to make incremental changes to individual digits in a value with decimal transfer This corresponds to the procedure used by a decade switch For scaled variables the value in the controller changes by 1 However the value displayed also depends on the scaling specified Table 3 5 Key functions for decimal numbers of the type BCD Key Function Oto9 1 Standard and Mixmode Enter the numbers 0 to 9 2 Increment No function Decimal point Enters the decimal point Plus 1 Standard No function 2 Mixmode and Increment Increments the value at the cursor and influences the more significant digits when the range of values is exceeded Minus 1 Standard No function 2 Mixmode and Increment Decrements the value at the cursor and influences the more significant digits when the range of values is not reached Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down
312. reases protection against unintentional deletion If deletion is not required you should reset the variable or specify no symbolic name in the programming software 3 8 7 Parallel Message System Status Messages The parallel message system supplements the serial message system The mes sages are transferred in parallel and evaluated in the operating device In this con text the current message status is compared with the previous status in the operat ing device The messages that no longer exist are automatically deleted from the memory and new messages are added to the memory The current status of the messages can be output All messages have a date and time to enable you to determine when a message ap peared for the first time The length of the message buffer can not exceed 512 bytes Set the length in the system parameters for the message system in the programming software Certain restrictions may apply to the length depending on the protocol used Status messages are only retained in the message memory for the length of time they are reported by the controller To set up a message system with acknowledg ment you must have the messages of the parallel message system written to the se rial message memory You must set the transfer of a message from the parallel to the serial message memory separately for each message Status messages can be transferred on a time and or event controlled basis 3 8 8 Settings for Statu
313. received are acknowledged with either the Acknowledge special key or a function key The function key must control the value of the RepmanQuitKey system variable 2 10 6 1 1 Import Messages from a Message File To call this feature click on the item Message system with the right mouse button and select the identically named menu item form the context menu Select a file which must have the following structure Message number_1 Message text 1 Message number_2 Message text 2 Message number_n Message text n Check the check box delete already existing messages if they do not exist in the message file if you import the same message file again but with less messages in it and you want these messages to be deleted in the message system too To import the messages with a message number offset enter a value for offset for message numbers from the message file At the import only messages are taken into account with numbers from 1 to 9000 2 10 6 1 2 Message Parameters Colors Displays the background color and foreground color assigned to the message These colors are used to display the message on the operating device To replace with other colors click Assign The setting can be viewed immediately after you return to the message Screen change If a message is called up a screen of the operator s choice can be called up at the same time The screen does not have to be called up immediately when the message is re
314. requested the help screen ap pears for this screen for the length of time you press the Help key or after you have pressed a button that has been programmed accordingly In order for the button to simulate the key function of the Help key you must create the Help key using the key simulation function and link it with the system variable KeyHelp See chapter KeyHelp on page 3 84 3 13 2 Help Screen for Input Variable You can create a separate help screen for each input variable You can link the help screen with the variable using the variable parameters If you are in a screen that contains a variable and data release has been requested the cursor must be located at the variable In this case the help screen appears for the length of time you press the Help key or press the button that has been pro grammed accordingly The help screen for an input variable is specifically designed for specifying the per mitted range of values for the current input variable In order for the button to simulate the key function of the Help key you must create the Help key using the key simulation function and link it with the system variable KeyHelp See chapter KeyHelp on page 3 84 3 13 3 Help Screen for Message Screens You can only create one help screen for a screen that contains a message field You can not call a help screen for any programmed input variables in the message screen If you are in a screen that contains a
315. reshold value and no direct selector key has been assigned to the message screen 2 10 10 2 10 Terminal Message 7 Message Buffer Full This text is displayed as a warning that the next external messages may overwrite the oldest or lowest priority messages depending on the configuration 2 10 10 2 11 Terminal Message 8 Invalid Screen Number This text is displayed to indicate that a non existent screen number has been trans mitted by the controller via the serial message channel 2 10 10 2 12 Terminal Message 9 Invalid Message No This text is displayed to indicate that the controller has transmitted a message num ber that does not exist in the user interface 2 10 10 2 13 Terminal Message 10 Print Log Invalid The operator or the controller attempted to start a print log that does not exist in the user interface 2 10 10 2 14 Terminal Message 11 Interface in Use Interface X3 is already being used by another print job You are attempting to trans mit different types of data to the printer at the same time e g to print recipes and messages 2 10 10 2 15 Terminal Message 12 Invalid Password You entered a password which does not exist in the password management function With this message the previous access authorizations view and edit level are reset 2 10 10 2 16 Terminal Message 13 Password Unchanged The operator did not enter the same new password the first and second time 2 10 10 2 17 Terminal Message 14 Overvol
316. rity 2 Even parity 3 65 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 4 3 ComStopBitsB Function Sets the number of stop bits for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 1 Bit bee 1 1 5 Bit 2 2 Bit 3 4 4 4 ComBaudrateB Function Sets the baud rate for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 300 Baud one 1 600 Baud 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud 8 57600 Baud operating devices with 386 CPU only 3 4 4 5 ComHandshakeB Function Sets the handshake for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 No handshake VSS 1 Hardware handshake RTS CTS 2 Software handshake XON XOFF 3 66 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 4 6 ComDefaultB Function Activates the interface parameters for SER2 Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive re 1 Activates the interface parame
317. rogramming 2 10 2 9 Linked Subscreens Subscreens are linked to screens to ensure screen elements are identical and al ways appear in the same positions This allows you to standardize the design of the project The left list box displays all of the existing subscreens The right list box shows all of the subscreens linked to the current screen You can use the buttons in between to perform the following actions gt Adds the selected subscreen to the linked subscreens A subscreen can be added only once gt gt Adds all of the listed subscreens to the linked subscreens lt Removes the selected subscreen from the list of linked subscreens lt lt Removes all of the subscreens from the list of linked subscreens Complete your entry with OK to return to the previously used function 2 10 2 10 Screen Background Color Static text and variable screen elements can be displayed in different color combina tions The selected screen element is assigned a background and foreground color from the list for this purpose Select the screen element and choose Parameters screen element from the con text menu The list has two columns color 1 and color 2 The background for the screen element is generally displayed in color 1 For the background to flash a different color must be selected for color 2 The background color then switches to and from one color to the other If color 2 is now the same as the foreground color it creates
318. rrors 1 Printing of the data set with the desired data set number is not pos sible 2 The selected print log does not exist 3 Print process stopped 3 152 SUTRON Tutorial Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code Hexadecimal code 3 11 12 Printing a Data Set You can use the following control code from the controller to instruct the printer con nected to the operating device to print the current data set 7FF8h The operating device will write one of the following two hexcodes back to allow the print process to be monitored Table 3 45 Return values from operating device Value Description OxOh Data set printout OK OXFF Printing of the data set with the desired data set number is not pos sible 3 11 13 Set Clock in Operating Device You can use the following control code from the controller to have the operating de vice set the real time clock in the device as specified in a defined control word For the clock the year can be set as two digits only 7FF9h See chapter Date and Time Image on page 3 155 3 11 14 Data Set Transfer from Controller to Operating Device Block Mode You can use the following control code from the controller to have a data set trans ferred from the controller to the operating device The data are transferred in block mode The number of the data set must be written to the variable defined for this purpose
319. ry 2 64 Representation type 3 7 Binary number 3 19 Decimal number 3 8 Selection text 3 13 Representation type alphanumeric 3 11 Representation type bars 3 21 Representation type BCD format 3 9 Representation type CUrVe eeeeeeeeeeenees 3 24 Representation type floating point number 3 16 Representation type hexadecimal number 3 18 Representation type selection image 3 15 Representation type standard 3 9 PRROSOUICES inter teen aaan aeiaai 2 78 Running time meters 3 97 S Safety notes 0 ccccceeceeecee cece eeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeanees 1 1 Scaled Input usaina 3 27 Scaled output 3 27 SCAIING 25 5 ee 3 27 FOGGING scenes cic cguaveenecnenctnaseapaddadshavdeccets 3 27 DIVISOM ireen aana 3 27 FACIO Ps csadves cacecnsbetadedeadantageddadantvecnpinaess 3 27 Scanner erfor es 2 66 Screen reference lists 2 67 Screen reference lists global control 2 67 Screen reference lists local control 2 67 Screen structure 3 3 Screen background color 2 39 Screen function Keys 2 39 Screen general 2 37 Screen help screen 2 39 Screen password protection 2 38 Screen script parameters 2 39 SCIOEINS reerde deee iE EiS S 2 37
320. ry number Configurable val OFF ues ON 3 4 7 3 RepoutDateP Function Allows you to output the date along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val OFF ues ON 3 76 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 7 4 RepoutTimeP Function Allows you to output the time along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val OFF ues ON 3 4 7 5 RepoutAnzYearP Function Specifies how the date appears when the message is output Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Year with 2 digits Year with 4 digits 3 4 7 6 RepoutRepTextP Function Displays the most recent parallel message The message is displayed in accordance with the specified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 7 7 Repout RepText21P Function Displays the most recent parallel message beginning from the 21st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified
321. s signed accordingly The active data set is printed via the SER1 interface when a 1 is written to the system variable Writing the value 2 to the same system variable will cancel the print process 3 122 S SUTRON Tutorial General Parameters A heading including the recipe number data set number and data set name will be printed at the beginning of each data set The status of the print process can be displayed through the system variable Rez PrintState To be able to control a print process from the controller the data set number and rec ipe number must be entered into the appropriate variables first You then start the print job by writing the value 7FF8H to the address of the serial message channel A value of 0 zero in the variable for the recipe number for request from the operat ing device will indicate that the data set is being printed If another print job is currently being printed so that the printer can not print the spec ified data set the value 255 will be written to the variable for the recipe number for request from the operating device 3 7 3 8 Memory Requirement for Data Sets The RAM in the operating device that is not required by the system approximately 110000 bytes is used to store messages as well as data sets that have been stored in the RAM The size of the message buffer is configurable Each message takes up 24 bytes This makes a total of 12000 bytes for the default message b
322. s Messages 3 8 8 1 Size in Bytes Enter the size of the parallel message system in bytes You can transfer eight status messages per byte The absolute size depends on the data type used address of the variables For example the number of bytes is always rounded up for a word address The maximum size for the parallel message system is limited to 256 bytes Depending on the operating device different storage quantities are available which are also used differently for messages and data sets 3 142 S TRON Tutorial This is how you determine the memory requirement in your operating device Table 3 36 Memory space memory requirement CPU in Operating Device Z80 32 Bit RISC Available Memory Space in Bytes About About 116000 for FW version 1 07 or lower 116000 About 147000 for FW version 1 08 or higher Memory Requirement per Message 24 Bytes 32 Bytes 1 Memory Location Memory Requirement per Data Set 33 Bytes 44 Bytes without User Data You must expect three times the memory requirement for the following message variants 1 Messages containing 2 variables 2 Messages with Appear Disappear 3 Messages with acknowledgment Appear Disappear active 4 Messages whose first variable has a size of greater than 4 bytes The following table illustrates the memory use for 500 messages and a maximum number of data sets containing 22 bytes of user data Table 3 37 Memory use for
323. s by which the lines are to be indented after the first line The value you enter here refers only to the display of messages in the operating device s mes sage field Message sorting Messages can be sorted for output You can use the corresponding radio button in the Message Sorting area to define the sort criterion Using the corresponding check boxes in the representation of message area you can mark which parameters of a message are also output The parameters can be combined in any way Sort by time newest first With this sorting order the message that arrived last in the serial message memory appears at the top of the message field Sort by time oldest first With this sorting order the message that arrived first in the serial message memory appears at the top of the message field Sort by priority If messages are sorted by priority they are sorted in the message field in such a way that the message with the highest priority is at the top and the messages below are listed according to descending priority The lower the message number the higher the message priority Sort by group With this sorting order the message that has the lowest group number appears at the top of the message field If several messages belonging to the same group are listed they are sorted according to time with the newest ones first Message representation Representation with message group The system outputs the group identifier bef
324. s for the polling area date amp time running time meters Unicode status informa tion date input options screen saver Resources Symbols images image lists Project management Projects with startup language project lan guages project controller 2 6 1 Terminal Type Change If you want to port a project from one terminal type to another select the required terminal from the Type field Depending on the model you can select one of the procedures below for grayscale display 16 8 4 4 Dithering 2 6 2 Terminal Type Memory Size Select the appropriate memory size for operating devices with different memory ca pabilities 2 28 SUTRON Programming 2 6 3 Terminal Type Touch Parameters You can define the following default settings for touch sensitive terminals Default sound This is the default setting for the signal tone that sounds when the button is pressed The following options are available No beep no sound Beep when pressed sound for press touch Beep when released sound for release touch Beep when pressed and released sound for press and release Continuous tone while pressed sound during press touch Enter the duration of the beep in seconds under Time Default Image for System Icon Enter the image to be displayed if a system icon is not available See chapter System Icon on page 3 124 2 6 4 Terminal Type Color P
325. s menti inerte manette 1 1 1 4 Target Group sise 1 1 2 PO AMININQ ss SR Rd dd ds sde ii 2 1 2 1 Programming Interface cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesnncaeeeeeeeees 2 1 2 2 File Men s iaia ana aida aa aai a aeiaai Aaa 2 3 2 2 1 File Menu Open a Project Folder 2 3 2 2 2 File Menu New Project Folder ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneecaeeeeeeeeees 2 3 2 2 3 File Menu Save Project Folder cc scccccsssseeeeeessseeeeeseneeeeessaas 2 5 2 2 4 File Menu Close Project Folder 0cc ccccccssssseceeesssneeeeesesseeeeeseaas 2 5 2 2 5 Pile Men EXT annee decetavavedsidanche ocdends ta vaceauauauaiaetttagecnafanseas 2 5 2 3 VieW Menura anaia aaia Aiea aa a E se deceuaueseast 2 5 24 TOONS Men sinan aene a a a aia aE a 2 6 2 4 1 Tools Menu Options 2 6 2 4 2 Tools Menu Defining the Interface 2 12 2 4 3 Tools Menu Application ID 2 12 2 4 4 Tools Menu Firmware Update ssessseeeseessennnnnnennnreerennnnnnnnnseeenene 2 13 2 4 5 Tools Menu Transmit S3 File Download 2 14 2 4 6 Tools Menu Transmit S3 File Upload cccceceesseeeeesstteeeeeeeaes 2 15 2 4 7 Tools Menu Transmit Recipe Data Sets 2 16 2 4 8 Tools Menu TSDiag ennn nne 2 17 2 4 9 Tools Menu Documentation 2 17 2 4 10 Tools Menu Translation Support 2 19 2 4 11 Tools Menu Import 2 21 2 4 12 Tools M
326. s of eight bytes that must be stored contiguously in the controller Table 3 78 Arrangement of the keyboard image in the controller Address Byte number 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IN BB wy D Table 3 79 BTO7AM keyboard image Byte Number Bit Key Byte Number Bit Key 1 0 Cursor left 2 0 Data release 1 Enter 1 Cursor right 2 Delete 2 Cursor up 3 Help 3 Cursor down 4 Cursor home 4 Decimal point 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 0 0 4 0 5 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 7 3 3 3 8 4 4 4 9 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned S SUTRON 3 183 Tutorial Table 3 79 BTO7AM keyboard image Byte Number Bit Key Byte Number Bit Key 5 0 Plus 6 0 F4 1 Minus 1 F5 2 F1 2 F6 3 F2 3 F7 4 F3 4 F8 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 0 F9 8 0 F14 1 F10 1 F15 2 F11 2 Not assigned 3 F12 3 Page down 4 F13 4 Print 5 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 3 184 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 21 4 Keyboard Image for the BT21AM The
327. s se lected next Minus Selection in descending order after the first value in the text list is reached the value at the bottom of the text list is selected next Cursor Right Moves the cursor one position to the right Cursor Left Moves the cursor one position to the left Cursor Up Moves the cursor to the next highest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the top level variable the lowest level variable is selected Cursor Down Moves the cursor to the next lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already posi tioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Delete Deletes the character at the cursor position Example For the parity of an interface the text items none odd and even should be dis played instead of the respective values 0 1 and 2 Therefore you create a text list with the following entries Table 3 8 Example of a text list Value Text 0 none 1 odd 2 even Select the name of the text list in the selection text dialog window This links the field which should display the variable values to the textlist 3 14 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 3 6 Selection Image In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable Additionally define how the value is to be read cycli
328. s the value with a variable number of fractional digits The number of digits stored in a variable is added to the globally defined number of fractional digits Enter the variable into the status information of the Fractional digit control field If you want to start a script after entering the variable value select the name of a script from the Post editing script field The Scaling function allows you to adjust the input value to meet specific conditions Factor Addend and Form reciprocal value For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired Select an Editor that is to be used to enter the values of an input variable By using the numeric keys standard editor or Using the PLUS and MINUS keys only Increment editor or Using both variants Mix mode editor The documentation value is a character string that fills the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Floating point type variables function as follows The significance of the displayed digits increases from right to left The number can optionally be displayed with a decimal point Scaling is only carried out using a factor The operating device can also form the reciprocal va
329. same font you create a WYSIWYG display Provided that your print logs do not contain characters that are reserved in the ASCII table for control characters you can authorize conversion to ASCII for translation support If you are using these reserved characters this information would be lost during conversion Grid area You can display a grid for character boundaries as an input help Select the Display check box to activate this function You can also select a Color for the grid Representation area You can use different colors to differentiate between elements in the print log that have been assigned the Non printable and Output variables properties Select a zoom factor to increase the screen segment in the print log editor You can also choose to display a brief description of the variables name and ad dress while the mouse cursor is pointed at the variables area Select the Display subprint log check box if you want to be able to distinguish sub print log elements from elements belonging to the main print log To adjust the display of the print log editor when opened to the size of the working field select the corresponding check box 2 4 1 7 Options Translation Support For the translation support function you can decide in general whether or not to use an extended functionality The following areas are provided for these options While Exporting and While Importing Export area With While Exporting you
330. se on the Communication branch 2 Select New controller from the menu The Protocol selection dialog opens 3 Select the name of a controller 4 Confirm with OK The Create controllers dialog appears 5 Enter a new name if necessary 6 Confirm with OK The name of the controller is added as an element in the Communication branch 2 9 1 Protocol Selection Choose the protocol that you want to use for your project to exchange data between the operating device and PLC For this purpose select the name of the protocol to be used and confirm with OK The next dialog allows you to assign another name to the selected protocol that is the name to be displayed for the protocol in the list box of the Controllers tab To ensure smooth exchange of data between the PLC and the operating device you must define the protocol parameters In addition you need to create a system of allocation in the variable list between the variables their addresses and the type of data The type of addressing used depends on the PLC 2 9 2 PC gt gt Terminal This function is available for all terminals with an SER2 serial interface Define identical communication parameters on both ends You can exchange the following information by means of this connection Recipes Data sets Terminal files 2 9 2 1 PC gt gt Terminal Enable Transfer By selecting the Enable automatic download check box you instruct the operating device t
331. sitive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Year with 2 digits HRS 1 Year with 4 digits 3 4 6 8 RepoutRepText Function Displays the most recent serial message The message is displayed in ac cordance with the specified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 6 9 Repout RepText21 Function Displays the most recent serial message beginning from the 21st charac ter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified represen tation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 6 10 RepoutRepText41 Function Displays the most recent serial message beginning from the 41st charac ter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified represen tation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 6 11 RepoutRepText61 Function Displays the most recent serial message beginning from the 61st charac ter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified represen tation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 72 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 6 12 RepmanQuitKey Function Simulates the function of the Acknowledge key D
332. sks You can assign at least four scripts that should start after boot from the operating de vice or start cyclically to a starting behavior and a time span in a table The table for planned tasks consists of the columns Script Behavior Time span and Time unit Column Script Select an already existing script Column Behavior Select cyclically to apply a continually returning task Select after booting to start a task after booting from the operating device Column Time span Enter a time that is applied as delay between cyclically returning tasks or as delay after booting of the operating device 2 70 SUTRON Programming Column Time unit Select a multiplier for the entered time span You can select 100 msec 1 sec 10sec imin 1 hour 2 13 Supplementary Functions The supplementary parameters which you can specify in the programming software are saved in the operating device 2 13 1 Supplementary Functions Polling Times Set the polling times to the intervals at which the respective elements are to be polled When entering the polling times pay attention to the total load being placed on the communication path Choose times as long as possible to minimize the communication load and as short as possible to avoid missing any events See chapter Communication With a Controller on page 3 197 See chapter Polling Time on page 3 164 See chapter Working with
333. so store the registry if desired If the Explorer is activated the system shuts it down The AppStarter exe file then starts the TSvisLD_CE exe file from the Flash File Sys tem FFS 3 22 4 Function of the TSvisLD exe Program The TSvisLD exe loads the following components into the memory of the operating system in accordance with the instructions in the TSvisRT_CE ini file User application Protocol driver TSvisRT firmware The program then unpacks the compressed application file CB and starts the TS visRT Runtime component 3 22 5 Memory Media Used The following memory media are used in small operator terminals with the operating system Windows CE Table 3 83 Memory media used Operating system memory Flash file system USB stick TSvisRT Runtime FlashDrv amp Hard disk Protocol driver AppStarter exe Application Subdirectory TSvisRT Project name with TSvisRT Runtime protocol driver and application Registry settings Admin ini IPSetting ini Image storage in Flash Subdirectory amp Image Bootloader storage in Flash Subdirectory Bootloader Legend Copying carried out by operating system Copying carried out by the bootloader Copying carried out by the Launch exe 3 196 SUTRON Tutorial 3 22 6 Important Files and Directories Table 3 84 Important files and directories File Storage
334. ss 28 Recipe unknown 29 Data set download LE AE 30 Scanner error FE 31 Print log unknown 32 Language switching error S 33 Flashcard information ie 3 126 S SUTRON Tutorial Table 3 34 Terminal messages and icons Number Brief Descriptions System icon 34 New application F4 35 Format error eal 36 Script error 3 8 3 Suppressing the Display of Terminal Messages You can prevent terminal messages from being displayed by deleting the corre sponding text The entry of the terminal message in the project management function remains existent Example Terminal message 7 Message buffer full is to be suppressed Older messages or messages with a lower priority are to be overwritten Delete the terminal message text in the project management function By suppressing the display of this terminal message the user agrees that incoming messages automatically overwrite the oldest messages or those with the lowest pri ority once the message buffer is full 3 8 4 Error Messages The messages listed here are displayed by the operating system in English The size of the texts has been chosen in such a way that they can be displayed on every op erating device The text output can not be suppressed and the texts can not be modified The term error message is used because the terminal does not operate in accordance with
335. ss level for the startup screen is always 0 The setup screen is an exception with regards to the password and external data re lease functions Since no communication is taking place when the setup screen is displayed the external data release function is not applicable To restrict access passwords must be used By defining the die system variable ScrchgPasswd as the first editable variable in the setup screen all further variables can be protected against unauthorized access The view level does not apply when accessing the setup screen Viewing is always permitted if a value less than or equal to 254 is selected for the access level of the setup screen The edit level for all variables of the setup screen with the exception of the system variable ScrchgPasswd is the same as that defined as the access level 3 146 SUTRON Tutorial Control Byte Access to the screen is always denied if an access level of 255 is defined for the setup screen This means that the setup screen will no longer be displayed during initialization of the operating device and can therefore not be selected However all device specific parameters can also be edited in any other screen The new param eters become effective by restarting the operating device or with the system variable Boot 3 9 1 Reactivate Password Protection The access authorization for a screen or variable is reset when the following is car ried out The operating d
336. stance of the text from the left edge of the text field Enter the horizontal dimension of the text Enter the distance of the text from the upper edge of the text field HON MD Enter the vertical dimension of the text L n Hi Select a foreground color Select a background color E See chapter Dynamic and Static Attributes on page 3 51 3 3 3 Variables LD 0 All operating devices support standard usage variable types The connected control ler determines the number of variable types permitted The variable type determines the range of values and the number of significant places Table 3 3 Variable types Type Size Range of Values Bit 1 bit 0 1 Byte 1 Byte 128 to 127 Byte 1 Byte 0 to 255 Word 2 Bytes 32768 to 32767 Word 2 Bytes 0 to 65535 3 6 S TRON Tutorial Table 3 3 Variable types Type Size Range of Values LWord 4 Bytes 2147483648 to 2147483647 LWord 4 Bytes 0 to 4294967295 LWord 4 Bytes 1 2 x 10 38 to 3 4 x 10 38 ASCII 42 Bytes 0 to 255 In the programming software you define a variable as a screen element The screen element Variable is made up of the Symbolic name Controller address Representation type Field type Field length Format Documentation value Limits Scaling Communication type Access type Editor
337. t change the width of the area To display variable values in the table create a variable frame in the table field Spec ify the address for the variable and select the representation type Variables displayed in a button that has a frame can not be dragged with the mouse to the table field Frames of buttons can not be displayed in tables Example You have 256 elements you want to be displayed in a table which has four columns The operating device has screen with 20 lines 16 of these lines are to be used to display elements Therefore create a table field with a height of 16 Enter 64 16 lines x 4 elements for the number of table elements 3 47 S TRON Tutorial 3 3 8 1 Table Field Parameters Specify how many lines the table field will have and how many elements can be dis played in this table field The Font area specifies the font used to display all elements of the table on the op erating device To display all elements of the table in another font click the New Font button 3 3 9 Message Field The message field refers to the area in a screen that is used to display messages To create a message field carry out the following steps 1 Select the Message Field icon in the toolbar and in the screen select the area where messages will be displayed This area is displayed as a rectangle The message field is marked with the letter M on the left edge of the rectangle 2 You can use the sizing hand
338. t column of a table Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ae 1 Move to left column 3 4 9 5 TabRight Function Is used to move to the right column of a table Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 Inactive ues Move to right column 3 81 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 9 6 TabPgUp Function Is used to page up within a table Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Inactive ues Page up 3 4 9 7 TabPgDn Function Is used to page down within a table Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val Inactive ues Page down 3 4 9 8 Shift Function Enables alphanumerical character input Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Initial state only numerical input possible Upper case alphanumerical character input enabled
339. t fields of the Entry of a Sin gle Address with Comment area Importing from a symbol file Select a symbol file Use the Select button to search the computer s directory for the symbol file that you want to open and import If the symbol file is in the same directory as the programming software simply enter the name of the symbol file in the input field Click Next gt to continue this procedure To return to the previous step click lt Back 2 4 11 8 Import Importing into a Text List Step 3 In the Length of symbolic description area you can specifically limit the length of the entry for import to a specific length or decide to ignore the symbolic identifier de scription during import By default no limit applies to the length of the symbolic identifier during import In the Gap character between symbol land comment area enter a character to be inserted between the symbolic identifier and the comment to separate them visually If you do not enter a character the identifier and comment are joined together The conditions that apply to the Length of comment area are the same as those that apply to the symbolic identifier It is not necessary to specify additional settings when importing the contents of only one line Click Next gt to continue this procedure To return to the previous step click lt Back 2 24 SUTRON Programming 2 4 11 9 Import Importing into a Text List Step 4 Step 4
340. t the default zoom factor to be used for displaying a mes sage in the message editor You can also choose to display a brief description of the variables name and ad dress while the mouse cursor is pointed at the variables area In addition you can display the width of the terminal display using markers in the message editor Message Number area The area displays the default font to be used to display the message numbers To change the default font use the mouse to click the Select font button To have messages automatically numbered in sequence when created activate the Automatic message number ing check box When the Display values hexadecimally check box is selected you can also enter and display the message numbers in hexadecimal format Always precede the hexa decimal value with the letter H example HO01A 2 4 1 6 Options Print Log Editors The print log editor options provide a number of settings that you can use to define the appearance of the print log in the editor You can define settings in the following areas Font Grid Representation 2 10 SUTRON Programming Font area This area shows the default font used to edit the print logs in the editor To change the default font use the mouse to click the Select font button You can only select fonts that are non proportional OEM fonts The size of the characters is also re stricted By setting up the printer to use the
341. tage The operating device has detected that the supply voltage is too high Switch the de vice off immediately to avoid damage Check the supply voltage 2 64 SUTRON Programming 2 10 10 2 18 Terminal Message 15 Data Set Protected You attempted to modify individual values of a data set stored in the Flash or to de lete the entire data set 2 10 10 2 19 Terminal Message 16 Illegal Data Set The data set number you specified as the destination for the data set copy process exists already or is outside the valid range for example Flash The upload destina tion for a data set transfer is invalid e g zero 2 10 10 2 20 Terminal Message 17 Data Set Unknown The data set with the number you selected does not exist in the data set list 2 10 10 2 21 Terminal Message 18 Data Set Memory Full You attempted to create a new data set but the data set memory is full 2 10 10 2 22 Terminal Message 19 Data Set Active You attempted to erase or to copy to the active data set or to select a data set even though the active data set is currently being edited 2 10 10 2 23 Terminal Message 20 Data Set Transfer You attempted to initiate a data set transfer to the controller even though the previ ously initiated transfer has not yet been completed 2 10 10 2 24 Terminal Message 21 Password Missing You attempted to switch to a password protected screen or to edit a password pro tected screen without having entered a p
342. tance of the scale from the left edge of the graph element Enter the distance of the scale origin from the left edge of the graph element Enter the length of the scale Add the space between the scale and the graph area to the length to ensure that the scale ex tends to the right edge of the graph element Click the button to display an arrow at the bottom end of the scale Click the button to display the ends of the scale without an ar row SE eir IP Click the button to display an arrow at the upper end of the scale 3 3 6 9 Into the Frame area enter the distances of the graph area from the left and bottom Bitmap Loader Wizard edge of the background image Table 3 25 Parameters for the background image Icon Function Enter the distance of the graph area from the left edge of the background image Le Enter the distance of the graph area from the bottom edge of the background image In the Import background image area click the folder icon to browse for a back ground image 3 46 S TRON Tutorial Choose a separate color for each curve the position index of the plotter and the background image To do this click the arrow beside the field for the color Click the Arrange Graph to the Center button to center the graph area within the background image The values in the Frame area are automatically adjusted 3 3 7 Recipe Field
343. tarts with 1 From the system you can also use status message texts in the serial message sys tem Make sure that the serial and parallel message systems do not overlap If you want both message systems to be independent of each other make sure that the message numbers of the serial system start above the status messages If you would like to program full page message outputs you must harmonize the message and screen numbers See chapter Full Page Message Output on page 3 141 3 136 SUTRON Tutorial No Date 1234 25 08 92 1234 25 08 92 11 30 00 Temperature 285 C at station 07 Time Text 1 11 30 00 3 8 5 3 Message Text and Variable The text length must not exceed 255 characters including a formatted variable The programming system will not allow you to enter texts longer than this The standard size of all characters of the operating device specified in each case is permitted Each message text can contain two output variables The output format of the variables is identical to the one off output variables in input output screens In this way for example coded texts can be used to modify individual messages or to use them for several statuses You can change the output format of the message line during operation in a config uration screen for the message screen The same options exist for serial and parallel messages Example Complete message format Variable 1 Text 2 Variable
344. tation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Status LED OFF Status LED ON Status LED FLASHING iT For operating devices equipped with a keyboard this function is permanently linked with the Help key There are a number of options for acknowledging a terminal mes sage for touch screen operated operating devices Siehe Kapitel Buttons auf Seite 3 33 3 4 17 4 StatusText Function Displays the most recent parallel message The message is displayed in accordance with the specified representation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 17 5 StatusText21 Function Displays the most recent parallel message beginning from the 21st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 17 6 StatusText41 Function Displays the most recent parallel message beginning from the 41st char acter The message is displayed in accordance with the specified repre sentation settings Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 104 SUTRON Tutorial 3 4 17 7 StatusText61 Function Displays the most recent parallel mess
345. ters entered by the operator 2 Activates the interface parameters that were specified in the programming software 3 4 5 Real Time Clock Ie RtcSec Display set seconds RtcMin Display set minutes RtcHour Display set hours RtcDay Display set day RtcMonth Display set month RtcYear Display set year RtcDayOfWeek Display set day of the week RtcDateFmt Display set date format RtcYear2000 Display year with 4 digits The values for the real time clock can be set from the operating device and from the controller See chapter Date and Time Image on page 3 155 3 4 5 1 RtcSec Function Sets the seconds of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadeci mal number binary number bar Configurable val 0 to 59 Seconds ues 3 4 5 2 RtcMin Function Sets the minutes of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadeci mal number binary number bar Configurable val 0to59 Minutes ues 3 67 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 5 3 RtcHour Function Sets the hours of the real time clock Data type Numeric Representation Decimal number alphanumeric selecti
346. that they can be checked for proper func tioning The operating device then switches to the main screen If you press the Enter key or Setup button while the startup screen is displayed the operating device switches to the setup screen Setup You can only access the setup screen if you press the Enter key or the Setup button during the initialization phase the startup screen is displayed for five seconds On the setup screen it may be useful to include the following functions Activate deactivate download function Set protocol parameters Select PLC protocol Set date and time Display firmware level of the operating device If you program these functions using system variables the operator can select the corresponding parameter from text lists Password If you wish to use the same screen for each password query create a password screen and specify its name here It may be useful to allow all function keys go to the main screen so that the operator does not get stuck on the password screen Main The main screen is always displayed after the initialization phase has been com pleted The user interface must start from here Starting from this screen branches can be created to all other screens The main screen can contain all of the elements of a standard input output screen Default help The default help screen is always displayed if no specific help screen has been set up for the current scree
347. the Refresh Acknowledgment bit in the Write Coordination byte 3 15 7 4 Liveness Flag Read Coordination Byte In some communication protocols you can not control the operability of the interface in the controller The Liveness flag has been developed to address this shortfall This is a simple function which has proven very effective in practice Whenever the controller needs to know whether the connection is still active it writes a logical 1 and subsequently a logical 0 to bit 3 of the Write Coordination byte The operating device constantly monitors the Liveness flag in the Write Coordination byte and compares it with the status of the Liveness flag in the Read Coordination byte As soon as the two bytes are no longer the same the operating device copies bit 3 from the Write Coordination byte to the Read Coordination byte Within a timeout time the controller must now also check whether both statuses are identical 3 166 SUTRON Tutorial PLC Compare PLC i in WCB No Time out Yes Communication error LM Bit in RCB Yes PLC Invert status of LM Bit in WCB 0 to 1 1 to 0 Operating device read polling area and gt copy LM Bit into RCB PLC Start timer Figure 3 34 Monitoring the liveness flag Define the following settings for the liveness flag monitoring System parameters Poll area Create a variable for the Write Co
348. the attribute Invisible results in an error message during compilation and no terminal file is generated Static texts and one off variables variables that are output only once with the at tribute Invisible are not output 3 52 S SUTRON Tutorial Cyclical variables with the attribute Invisible are overwritten with blanks This erases any existing obsolete value on the screen If background images and cyclical variables are being used simultaneously the background image is not updated Regarding input variables note that the operator can not enter the range of values for the attribute Invisible If an input value is in the area of the attribute Invisible the edit process is not started The operator then has no possibility to change the value again 3 3 14 6 Non Editable You can assign the dynamic attribute Non Editable to variables to ensure that they can not be changed below or above specific controller values You can only use the Non Editable attribute in conjunction with a control variable 3 3 14 7 Foreground You can assign the dynamic attribute Foreground to variables and static text to ensure that they are when values are below or above specific controller values are displayed with a specific color 3 3 14 8 Background You can assign the dynamic attribute Foreground to variables and static text to ensure that they are when values are below or above specific controller values are displayed
349. the file into the operating device immediately 1 Connect the device with the PC using the download cable 2 Set the user mode switch of the operating device to Delete Application Memory 3 Connect the device with the supply voltage 4 Once the message Flash is Erased or a similar message is displayed reset the user mode switch to the normal position leave operating device switched on 5 When the device displays DOWNLOAD 1 click the Download button The download is complete when the device reboots 2 4 5 Tools Menu Transmit S3 File Download You can load an S3 file compiled project into an operating device with serial inter face individually To do so you directly connect the PC with the operating device us ing a download cable or a modem In this case the operating device must also be connected with a modem Enter the S3 file in the File area In the Download Type area choose between the following Default if you want to download directly from a PC to the operating device baud rates automatically adjusted Modem fixed parameters if you are using modems for the connection fixed baud rate setting Adjustable parameters configurable parameters if you want to work with special interface settings To change the parameters for the serial interface click the Parameters button The parameters for the modem are assigned fixed values Table 2 1 Parameters for Modem P
350. the impression that the element is being switched on and off 2 10 3 Subscreens Subscreens are used to ensure a consistent design across all screens containing the same elements To achieve this you define a subscreen which contains the required elements and then link it to each of the screens that are supposed to have the same design Subscreens can contain all the elements of a standard screen with the exception of tables recipe and message fields When compiled the screen and linked subscreens are joined to become one result ing screen 2 10 4 Help Screens To optimize usability you can create a help screen for each screen and each input variable To call up this help on the operating device press the Help key a button that has been programmed for this purpose or click a free area of the display back ground If data release is not requested a help text appears for the screen The help text for the variable that is currently selected appears provided the editor for entering a vari able value has been activated 2 41 S TRON Programming The default help screen appears if no specific help screen has been linked to a screen or a variable A help screen is the same size as a standard screen You can enter static texts back ground images output variables and tables in a help screen To ensure consistent design help screens can also be linked to subscreens 2 10 4 1 Default Help Screen The default hel
351. the oper ating device If bit X is set in the control byte when polling is carried out the running time meter X is incremented 2 72 SUTRON Programming Using the address of the Reset variable Reset Byte you can reset the running time meters in the operating device The polling time specifies the time intervals at which the operating device is to in crement the running time meters The running time meters are activated in the operating device as soon as you have entered a variable name for the control byte and specified a value for the polling time If the polling time is O or if there is no address for the control byte the Running Time Meter function in the operating device is off You can specify an address in the controller for each running time meter The oper ating device stores the value of the corresponding running time meter to this address when requested by the controller to do so For this purpose the controller needs to write the hexadecimal code 7FCFh into the serial message channel of the polling area For each variable you must provide a 32 bit memory area in the controller See chapter Working with Running Time Meters on page 3 147 See chapter Write Values of Running Time Meters to Controller on page 3 150 2 13 6 Supplementary Functions Set Running Time Meters Specify a variable name for each running time meter The value of the running time meter is placed into these variables
352. the sign The following data is re quired Decimal number Output Field length 7 5 decimal point sign Fractional digits 2 absolute The display range is then between 327 68 and 327 67 3 50 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 13 Input Variables When displaying input variables for the first time in the operating device the system uses the same approach as for one off output variables output variables that are output only once This also applies to scaling which works from the controller s viewpoint Input variables are processed by editors in the operating device 3 3 13 1 Plausibility Check The system carries out a plausibility check for all input variables During this check it compares the value entered with the range limits stored in the variable list If the limits are not adhered to the system issues one of the following terminal mes sages Value too large or Value too small The incorrect value is not written to the controller If an error occurs the previously valid value is retained To prevent the above mentioned terminal messages from appearing you must de lete them in the programming software When you do this the following applies Ifthe value is exceeded the value of the upper limit is entered Ifthe value is not reached the value of the lower limit is entered 3 3 14 Dynamic and Static Attributes For the screen elements Static Text Text Field
353. the true meaning of the standard mode while these messages are displayed In ad dition to true system errors various conditions and processes are also described COMMUNICATION ERROR COMMUNICATION ERROR CODE X SUBCODE X RETRIES XXX This message is generated for all types of protocol and interface errors The error codes CODE X and SUBCODE X are protocol specific and are listed in the re spective description in the chapter on controller and bus connections The connec tion with the communication partner has been interrupted RETRIES displays the number of unsuccessful attempts to establish a connection This number is incre mented while the device is running The number of retries depends on the protocol that is being used 3 127 S TRON Tutorial ADDRESS ERROR ADDRESS ERROR This message may be displayed during a download The S3 file addresses physical addresses in the operating device The transmission is aborted as soon as invalid ad dresses are detected during this process The starting address of the invalid line in the S3 file is specified in hexadecimal format FLASH MEMORY FAILURE FLASH MEMORY FAILURE Is displayed during a download if the Flash Eprom can not be programmed This message indicates that the application memory is defective The starting address of the invalid line in the S3 file is specified in hexadecimal format CHECKSUM ERROR CHECKSUM ERRO
354. the variable field in the screen If the documentation value is shorter than the field it is entered repeatedly Curve type variables function as follows Use the representation type Curve to display a value table as a row of points in the operating device The address for the controller variable represents the start of the value table in the controller Each value in the table describes one pixel of the curve A curve is defined by the following parameters Maximum width 54 pixels for each curve variable Maximum height height of the display in the operating device Specify a length and height to determine the dimension of the curve in the unit Char acter To produce a curve with a width of 54 pixels several curve variables next to each other are required Insert a coordinate grid as a background image The operating device reads the variable values as an array from the controller and inserts these as continuous consecutive height data The value with the starting ad dress address 0 is displayed on the very left Each subsequent piece of height data address n is offset one pixel position to the right The height data for the curve is cyclically refreshed 3 24 SUTRON Tutorial Example of a curve display Figure 3 4 Example for displaying a curve 3 3 3 4 Field Type By selecting a field type you determine whether the operator will be able to modify the variable s value or whether th
355. ther it is to run horizontally or vertically For the Representation of the bar you can choose between predefined templates patterns or your own graphics This allows you to choose the appearance of the fol lowing bar elements Bar Background Limit value not reached and value fallen below Limit value exceeded Bar The bar graphic is used to display the actual bar If you select a graphic of a silo for example the bar is displayed as a silo Background The background graphic is used to display the area not yet covered by the bar Limit value not reached value fallen below The bar is displayed using the limit value not reached graphic if the value of the vari able falls below the value of the 1st limit value Limit value exceeded value exceeded The bar is displayed using the limit value exceeded graphic if the value of the vari able rises above the value of the 2nd limit value You can influence the format of the bar by specifying the Width Height Reference value 1st limit value 1 Corner value 2nd limit value 2 Corner value Width Enter the horizontal dimension of the bar in pixels Height Enter the vertical dimension of the bar in pixels Reference value The reference value is used to specify the variable value from which the bar is to grow If you enter the name of a variable this value will be calculated at runtime Example The values from 0 to
356. tion on page 3 145 3 12 S SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 3 5 Selection Text In the Field Type field define whether the variable is an input or output variable Additionally define how the value is to be read cyclically once or _event controlled For the data transfer you must also specify when a value is to be transferred on pressing Enter only on pressing the Plus Minus or Enter key or automatically on each change The PLC handshake procedure can be used for this process if desired For the format you can specify the field length and field height of the selection text The field length also determines the maximum length for the text strings in the text list If the field length differs from the length of the texts in the list a dialog appears asking which length is valid The following access types are available normal access selective access In addition the following options are available for the DIN measurement protocol Article Administration Delete Article Administration Normal access All of the texts in the list can be selected To do so create a text list fill it with the required texts and then link it to the variable that you are just about to create Selective access Only texts whose corresponding bit is set to logical 1 in the variant buffer are dis played For this access type you need to create a variable for the variant buffer The v
357. tion runtime Output of initialization messages from TS visRT Customer application is displayed 3 187 S TRON Tutorial 3 22 2 Loading Procedure on Windows CE Operating Proce dure 3 22 2 1 Launch exe The initialization starts the Launch exe program The program allows you to use the keys F1 to F4 to make changes to the configura tion To guarantee data security the USB stick is required for all modifications to the de vice status and for all updates The USB stick thus functions as a dongle The Launch exe program has 3 operating modes Normal no key is pressed Setup Main F1 key pressed Administration Cursor Down key pressed 3 22 2 1 1 Normal Operating Mode The program AppStarter exe starts from the internal Flash memory Setup Main Menu Press For Setup Main Menu Figure 3 40 Display after startup operating devices with keys operating devices with touch screen The following message is issued if the AppStarter exe file does not exist AppStarter not found Figure 3 41 Error message after startup 3 22 2 1 2 Setup Main Operating Mode If you press the Enter key or the Press For Setup Main Menu button during the star tup phase the Setup Main mode starts The normal entries apply to operating devices with keys only The gray entries apply to operating devices equipped with a touch screen Ce Ne Registry amp Registry g Settings Batchfile
358. to the operating device again after the application description has been loaded If changes have been made to the structure of any of the recipes number of variables position of the variables in the data set buffer etc only the data sets of the other unchanged recipes can be reloaded into the operating device The data sets are transferred in a format that can be edited using a Text Editor see section 3 8 4 3 Structure of the Data Set File 3 119 SUTRON Tutorial The parameters for the X3 interface can be freely configured by means of the corre sponding system variables Merely make sure that the same parameters are set at the PC end You can send or receive at the PC end with any suitable program such as Windows Terminal 1 3 7 3 4 Transfer to a PC The transfer of data sets to the PC is initiated by writing a value to the system variable StartSave The number of data sets that are transferred depends on the value that is written to the system variable The following are valid values System variable value 1 Only the active data set is transferred System variable value 2 All of the data sets of the active recipe are transferred System variable value 3 All of the data sets of all recipes are transferred The process can be monitored by the operator with the aid of the system variable SaveState 3 7 3 5 Transfer from a PC The operating device is placed to the Ready to Receive state when the system v
359. to be multi plexed is MW100 the result is a controller address of MW120 when the screen is called up Options area Choose the direction in which the next variable is accessed when you press the Enter key after editing a variable value Activate automatic data release if you wish to have the option to edit variable values immediately after changing to the current screen Otherwise you will need to press the Data Release key Automatic data release can not be used with operating devices that use a touch screen See chapter ScreenOffset on page 3 109 2 10 2 2 Screen Password Protection The parameters to password protect a screen are divided into the following areas Access level Reset password Access Level area The access level corresponds to a threshold value for password management You use it to determine if and when operators must enter a password Table 2 7 Access level Configurable Values Default Value 0 to 255 0 The initial access level default value for each screen is 0 This corresponds to the status general release If the threshold value is above the view level the operator can only display this screen by entering the correct password If the threshold value is above the edit level the operator can only change the vari ables contained in the screen by entering the correct password Reset Password area If you activate the Reset Password parameter password protection
360. to provide an explanation of the system number The length of the texts is designed to allow them to be displayed on one line even on the smallest operating device display 2 60 SUTRON Programming A newly created system contains the following terminal messages with brief descrip tions Table 2 10 Terminal messages and icons Number Brief Descriptions 1 Wrong format 2 Value too large 3 Value too small 4 Replace battery 5 Message overflow 6 New message Naw 7 Message buffer full 8 Invalid screen no 9 Invalid message no 12 10 Print log invalid 11 Interface in use zu 12 Invalid password a 13 Password unchanged si Pa 14 Overvoltage p 15 Data set protected 16 Illegal data set 17 Data set unknown E 18 Data set memory full H 19 Data set active S SUTRON 2 61 Programming Table 2 10 Terminal messages and icons Number Brief Descriptions System icon 20 Data set transfer 21 Password missing 22 Editing mode active 23 Data set file error 24 Data set format 25 Number invalid 26 Loop through active 27 No data set address 28 Recipe unknown 29 Data set download HE 30 Scanner error FE 31 Print log unknown 32 Language switching error 33 Flashcard information 34 New app
361. troller To update the real time clock data in the operating device from the controller you must firstly create a variable in which the controller will store the date and time image Enter this variable in the system parameters for the real time clock in the field Setup Finally write the control code 7FF9h in the serial message channel This instructs the operating device to read the date and time image once from the agreed variable 3 12 3 Transferring the Real Time to the Controller To transfer the real time clock data from the operating device to the controller you must firstly create a variable in which the operating device will store the date and time image Enter this variable in the system parameters for the real time clock in the field Update Then specify a polling time with which you want the operating device to write data at cyclical intervals into the variable 3 13 Working with the Help Function For each screen and each input variable in the project you can create a help screen and link these screens with each other If you do not create or link any help screens the default help screen is displayed The help texts are always limited to the size of one single screen 3 156 SUTRON Tutorial 3 13 1 Help Screen for Screens You can create a separate help screen for each screen You can link the help screen with the screen using the screen parameters If you are in a screen and data release has not been
362. ts The default values can be restored at any time To do so click the Default values button To adopt the interface parameters from the S3 file belonging to the translated project click the S3 file button 2 4 3 Tools Menu Application ID The application ID is used to identify a particular application The application ID is stored in the S3 SB CB file of a project and is therefore trans ferred to the operating device after the download operation The same ID is stored in the project management file You can compare the ID of a project management file and the ID of an S3 SB CB file Similarly you can compare the IDs of an S3 SB CB file and the contents of the op erating device For this you need to establish a connection between the PC and op erating device by means of a download cable The application ID consists of the following elements IDText Version Date Time of Count Postfix ID text The maximum length of the ID text is 13 characters You can specify the file name of the project using the 8 3 format for example and edit the ID text as required Version The version of the programming software is identified by a 5 character string This text can not be edited Date The date of creation is represented by a 6 character string This text can not be ed ited Time of A 6 character string indicates the time at which the project was compiled This text can not be edited
363. tton with vertical layout 3 40 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 5 5 Frames for Buttons The frame for a button is created as an image that is saved in the programming soft ware as an image This image is then made available by the programming software and you can use it for button frames In the following example a frame is created that depicts a button when it is not pressed released state The image for this frame looks like this Figure 3 23 Image for a basic frame This image is made up of four subareas Figure 3 24 Image split into four areas The programming software automatically splits an image into these four areas The pixels for the edges are then determined and inserted a number of times de pending on the dimension of the button 3 41 S TRON Tutorial F3 0 i Figure 3 25 Determining and expanding frame edges In this context only the top left and bottom right corners are taken into account For the following image each frame edge has been expanded by two pixels Figure 3 26 Button Final result The arrows in the image illustrate the directions in which the pixels are inserted for the frame edges The hatched area depicts the button s usable area Texts variables and images are displayed here You can assign a background color to this area You can use the formats bit map BMP device independent bit map DIB Windows Metafile WMF or Enhanced Metafile EMF to create im
364. type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val 0 OFF a 1 ON 3 75 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 7 Parallel Message System RepmanSortCritP Set sorting criterion RepoutNrP Output message number RepoutDate P Output message date RepoutTimeP Output message time RepoutAnzYearP Display year RepoutRepTextP Output message RepoutRepText21P Output message starting from 21st digit RepoutRepText41P Output message starting from 41st digit RepoutRepText61P Output message starting from 61st digit RepoutSelectGroupP Output messages of group only RepoutGroupP Output message group 3 4 7 1 RepmanSortCritP Function Defines the sorting criterion for message output Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val By priority of message number ues In order of arrival most recent first In order of arrival oldest first ics The value of the variable is stored retentively The stored value is automatically used again after a power failure 3 4 7 2 RepoutNrP Function Allows you to output a message number along with the message Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number bina
365. uence the information saved 3 139 S TRON Tutorial The following output variants are available for selection Complete message format No Date Time Text 1 Variable 1 Text 2 Variable 2 1234 25 08 92 11 30 00 Temperature 285 C at station 07 Variants 1234 25 08 92 Temperature 285 C at station 07 1234 11 30 00 Temperature 285 C at station 07 1234 Temperature 285 C at station 07 25 08 92 11 30 00 Temperature 285 C at station 07 11 30 00 Temperature 285 C at station 07 25 08 92 Temperature 285 C at station 07 Temperature 285 C at station 07 3 8 5 10 Zooming Messages Messages are displayed in a one line format in the message screen for the sake of clarity In order to display a longer message in its full length the message must first be selected and then the Enter key pressed Line of the message screen on an operating device displaying 20 characters per line 1234 25 08 92 11 30 00 Station 137 Zoomed view 1234 25 08 92 11 30 00 Station 137 in the furnace has a temperature of 285 C The zoomed view remains active for as long as you hold the Data Release key down With smaller displays for example with 4 x 20 characters only the message text is zoomed The device type that is to be used must be considered when the text is pro grammed to ensure the lines are wrapped correctly 3 8 5 11 Acknowledging Messages Message acknowledgment in the controller can be carried out by means of var
366. uffer size 500 mes sages so that a further 98000 bytes are available for storing data sets Space is also needed to store the data set name and management information ad ditional 28 bytes per data set Example If the data set size is programmed as 22 bytes a total of 98000 22 28 1960 data sets can be saved in the RAM message buffer size 500 Other fixed pro grammed data sets can also be stored in the Flash Eprom 3 8 Working with Messages You can specify general parameters and parameters for the serial and the parallel message system You can enter a message number to display a message directly The message num ber also indicates its priority The lowest message number has the highest priority and the highest message number has the lowest priority All messages that have a higher priority than the message number specified here are handled using a special procedure in the operating device when they appear These messages are indicated by flashing of the status LED in the direct selection key of the message screen or are signaled by a terminal message Using the Size of Message Buffer you define how many messages can be stored in the operating device Specify the maximum number of messages to be managed by the operating device You can have the messages displayed in indented format To do so specify the num ber of characters by which the lines are to be indented after the first line The value you enter here re
367. umbers This does not change the field length however one digit for displaying the decimal point is lost 3 3 3 6 Documentation Value The documentation value for displaying a variable is a placeholder when you pro gram with the programming software Depending on the representation type you are using the programming software specifies another documentation value for exam ple F for hexadecimal numbers or 9 for decimal numbers The documentation value is also used for project documentation instead of a real controller value See chapter Tools Menu Documentation on page 2 17 3 26 SUTRON Tutorial 3 3 3 7 Limits In the programming software you can specify a lower and an upper limit for each variable to restrict operator input The lower limit is automatically set to 0 for variable values that are displayed with the attribute Only Positive If the operator tries to enter a value outside of these limits one of the following ter minal messages is issued Value too small Value too large The operator can ignore these terminal messages but he must enter a value that lies between the limits or use the Cursor Up or Cursor Down keys to go to another vari able in the screen The system then accepts the current controller value again 3 3 3 8 Scaling 3 3 3 8 1 Scaled Input To modify the values that the operator enters in the operating device in line with the values used in the connected contr
368. unctions Polling Area 2 71 2 13 3 Supplementary Functions Transfer Date amp Time 2 72 2 13 4 Supplementary Functions Receive Date amp Time ccceeeeeneeeees 2 72 2 13 5 Supplementary Functions Reset Running Time Meters 2 72 2 13 6 Supplementary Functions Set Running Time Meters ssesseessees 2 73 2 13 7 Supplementary Functions Unicode ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 2 73 2 13 8 Supplementary Functions Status Information 2 76 2 13 9 Supplementary Functions Data Input 2 77 2 13 10 Supplementary Functions Screensaver 2 77 2 14 TROSOUICES iacctensdeccce cin a E M anti 2 78 2 14 1 Images and Symbols ccececeeeeceeeececeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeseneeees 2 78 S TRON Overall Table of Contents 3 Tutorial 2 14 2 2 15 2 15 1 2 15 2 2 15 3 2 15 4 2 15 5 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 3 3 10 3 3 11 3 3 12 3 3 13 3 3 14 3 3 15 3 3 16 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 4 8 3 4 9 3 4 10 3 4 11 3 4 12 mage LISTS a 5 2 de ennui mn man 2 80 Project Management 2 81 Project Management Activating a Project 2 81 Project Management Languages cceeeesseeeeeeenteeeeseenaeeeeeeeaaes 2 81 Project Management Communication 2 81 Project Management Terminal File
369. uring normal operation Possible contents for the Admin ini file Lock On Launch is locked Only the administration operating mode is en abled if a USB stick containing the Admin ini file is inserted Lock Off Launch is unlocked LaunchTouch On Launch for touch devices will be used Therefore larger dialog boxes are displayed Operation with USB mouse is recom mended LaunchTouch Off Launch for touch devices will not be used Explorer Off Deactivates the Explorer in the registry The change becomes ef fective on the next device reboot Explorer On Activates the Explorer in the registry The change becomes effec tive on the next device reboot Registry Default Destroys the current registry and activates the default registry of the image The change becomes effective on the next device re boot Start MyProgramm exe Starts the application MyProgramm exe StartRepllog On Enables automatic startup of the Repllog exe program in the reg istry The change becomes effective on the next device reboot StartRepllog Off Disables automatic startup of the Repllog exe program in the reg istry The change becomes effective on the next device reboot gt Observe upper and lower case for all entries 3 195 S TRON Tutorial 3 22 3 Function of the AppStarter exe Program The AppStarter exe program creates all the necessary registry settings and can al
370. variable Cursor remains at the current position 3 101 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 16 3 StatePerm Function Displays the status of the status LED for the data release Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues Status LED OFF Status LED ON Status LED FLASHING 3 4 16 4 EditUpperLimit Function Indicates the upper limit of the input value for the current input variable Data type Numeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 16 5 EditLowerLimit Function Indicates the lower limit of the input value for the current input variable Data type Numeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 4 16 6 ActEditNumber Function Indicates the number of the current edit variable in the edit order Data type Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues The number indicated by the system variable not always comply to the programmed number of the edit order Example Edit order is 1 2 3 ActEditNumber indicates 1 Edit order is 7 8 9 ActEditNumber indicates 1 Edit order is 6 8 4 ActEditNumber indicates 2 2 3 2 3 3 1 3 1
371. vates the first data set of the recipe 2 Deletes all data sets of the current recipe and activates the default data set of the recipe 3 4 11 6 DSNew Function Generates a new data set with the name specified in the system variable DSDesiNr contains no value Data set is assigned to the next free number DSDesiNr contains a value Data set number is checked if already assigned and not write protected the data set is overwritten if already assigned and write protected the data set is assigned to the next free number Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 3 91 S TRON Tutorial 3 4 11 7 ActDSName Function Name of the current data set Data type Alphanumeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues 30 characters 3 4 11 8 SelectRezeptNr Function Number of the currently active recipe Data type Numeric Representation Positive decimal number alphanumeric selection text selection image hexadecimal number binary number Configurable val ues gt You can only enter the numbers of existing recipes Invalid entries are ignored 3 4 11 9 SelectRezeptName Function Name of the current recipe Data type Numeric Representation Alphanumeric Configurable val ues The programming software provides the texts automatically 30 charac ters Ie You ca
372. ver 2 85 Axis scale wizard 3 44 Colors of graphs and background 3 44 Geometry and Grid 3 45 Legend eiaa 3 45 NEAXIS inea eaaa 3 45 VAIS osiad sensein aaa iea ia 3 46 B Background 3 53 Background image 3 32 Bitmap loader wizard 3 46 BOOt POCOS hunter mn durite 3 187 PUTON e niet ere 3 33 Key simulation 3 37 pushbuttons 3 36 WITCH iaiu nie 3 37 C ComMMENi sieca 2 30 Communication 2 31 Communication definition With Entertainment 3 30 Communication type cceeceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeees 3 29 PLC handshake ccccceeseeeeteeeeeeees 3 29 Communication types For all changes sasson annnka 3 31 With or Enter cccccccceeesessseeeeeeeeees 3 31 Compact Flash card 3 106 Control codes EGF Re ans 3 150 TCB Se ania Rain 3 150 TP A indus 3 150 T GA iaiia hese seciiees entrer denses 3 150 PCB iis sisted erecteters mie 3 150 LEGG uingie aa a aeie 3 150 TA a A D E EE A AE E 3 150 AR aaaea 3 150 TGR EA E A able 3 150 IFEX sioen 3 151 EPA EE T 3 151 TER 2 E E E T 3 151 TEP e E E T 3 151 A e EA E ATT 3 151 TEED nn eaaa at 3 152 ARG A E TTT 3 152 TEE a E E 3 152 TPES T 3 153 PAS PR S 3 153 TEA E enee 3 153 TEE Boiga aa 3 153 PERG A 3 154 LEE e E A E 3 154 PFE E E E E 3 154 A ee E 3 1
373. win starts and shows an error message The name of the project is automatically used as the project name in the project man agement for the application ID and for the output file Projectname CB Example 5 Program directory TSwin exe n N Template directory Template name 0 O Out put directory Project directory Project name TSwin starts and generates a new project from the assigned template If the assigned template is not existing TSwin starts and shows an error message The name of the project is automatically used as the project name in the project man agement for the application ID and for the output file Projectname CB In case of projects for TesiP n or A devices the subdirectory TSvisRT Project name is generated automatically In this directory the output files TSvisRT_CE exe TSvisRT ini SPSTxxxx dll Projectname CB are copied after compilation of the project In case of projects for E devices the output file Projectname CB is copied to the output directory without subdirectory 3 2 SUTRON Tutorial 3 2 Working with Screens 3 2 1 Screen Structure Screens with specific functions form the basic components of the screen structure System screens Setup screen Start up screen Password Screen Main screen User screens Input output screens The screen structure is made up of a network of input and output screens There is no hierarchy Input and output scr
374. with zeros Example 192 168 42 1 gt 192 168 042 001 Network Settings Fix Settings DNS The system deselects DHCP and enters the settings from the IPSetting ini file of the USB stick This file must exist in the root directory of the USB stick If no USB stick is connected the information is read from the registry This entry is password protected Contents of the IPSetting ini file IPCONFIG PrimaryDNS 172 016 042 150 SecondaryDNS 172 016 042 151 All addresses must be given in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Numbers smaller than 100 you have to fill up with zeros Example 192 168 42 1 gt 192 168 042 001 Network Settings Fix Settings WINS The system deselects DHCP and enters the settings from the IPSetting ini file of the USB stick This file must exist in the root directory of the USB stick If no USB stick is connected the information is read from the registry This entry is password protected Contents of the IPSetting ini file IPCONFIG PrimaryWINS 172 016 042 150 SecondaryWINS 172 016 042 151 All addresses must be given in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX Numbers smaller than 100 you have to fill up with zeros Example 192 168 42 1 gt 192 168 042 001 Network Settings Current IP Displays the MAC address current IP address subnet mask device name DHCP status gateway DNS and WINS 3 192 S SUTRON Tutorial Network Settings DHCP The system enables DHCP After enabling DH
375. xt lowest editable variable in the display and selects it If the cursor is already positioned at the lowest level variable the top level variable is selected Plus 1st case Variable is selected The value is deleted and you can enter a new value 2nd case Cursor was moved within a positive value The value is not changed 3rd case Cursor was moved within a negative value The negative sign for the value is deleted Minus 1st case Variable is selected The value is deleted and a negative sign is inserted at the least significant position You can enter a new value 2nd case Cursor was moved within a positive value A negative sign is placed in front of the value 3rd case Cursor was moved within a negative value The value is not changed Delete Deletes the position where the cursor is located and also deletes the sign 3 3 3 3 3 BCD Format The significance of the displayed digits increases from right to left You can display integers as BCD numbers with leading zeros The representation refers to the data types bit byte word and Lword The maximum length is 8 digits There are no blanks between the characters The variable appears in BCD format in the controller For one byte the range of values spans from 00 to 99 3 9 S TRON Tutorial Example for a BCD number 108 102 10 10 107 10 Significance 0 1 2 3 4 5 Displayed 1234p It is important that you take particular ca
376. ystem when creating the application de scription and the operating device s hardware are not compatible For example the Interbus protocol driver has been loaded to a device with standard interfaces KEYBOARD ERROR KEYBOARD ERROR PLEASE RELEASE KEY A self test is performed and the keyboard is checked when the operating device is switched on Make sure no keys are pressed during this process Please follow the request If this message is issued when no key is pressed it indicates that the key board is defective 3 130 SUTRON Tutorial INITIALIZING MESSAGE BUFFER INITIALIZING MESSAGE BUFFER When the operating device is switched on all messages in the operating device are sorted This initialization process requires a certain length of time based on the num ber of stored messages The message is always generated but is only displayed for a very short time period or is not visible at all ERASE FLASH EPROM ERASE FLASH EPROM Is displayed while the application memory is being erased All of the programmed data are erased at this point FLASH IS ERASED FLASH IS ERASED FLASH XXX kBYTE HFXXXXXX This message appears after the delete process is completed Interface SER2 X3 is initialized for download operating mode DOWNLOAD 1 DOWNLOAD 1 FLASH XXX kBYTE The operating device indicates that it is ready for a download with a baud rate of 19200 B

User Manual - Sütron electronic GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual - S&uuml;tron electronic GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual - Sütron electronic GmbH